ÐÏࡱá1111111111111111;11þÿ 111111111111

111 1111111111111 111þÿÿÿ11111111{111ü111} 11þ

1
1t11õ11v11÷11l
11ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ
ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ
ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ
ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ
ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ
ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿýÿÿÿù11þÿÿÿ111þÿÿÿ111111111
111
111
111
222
222
D.S. Brown 120686 words 4030
Twin Lane First N.A. Rights
DENALI
CHAPTER 1
He gazed at the far off mountain with its mist covered center,
like a halo surrounding a ghostly giant. He remembered the stories of
the past. The story of work, growth and success. Karl Cain was
many things, but he was no fool or idle dreamer. When this man from
Texas wanted to do something he did it with no hesitation. This had
gotten Karl into trouble on more than one occasion, but this time
something was different.
 She leaned her back into him as he held her in his arms. Sharyn
Morgan tried to see, to feel what he was feeling at that moment. She
knew that part of what he saw was from some distant memory, and she
longed to share that memory with him, even for an instant.
 Karl smelled her sweetness and he stirred inside. Her hair was
full and fine with its soft feel and lustrous reds and golds. With the
colors running through it now, it looked every bit like a brilliant
sunset.
She was about a head shorter than he was, possessing an inner
glow that gave him a helpless feeling. His coloring was dark and rich,
almost like the natives of this vast land, but with the look of the
plains and the Southwest about him; a mixture of the past and the
present. He was tall and muscular with a walk like a cat.
Karl looked at her and then back to the mountain in the far
distance. He yearned for the world beyond this city surrounded by
mountains.
For now he must make the trip to the mountain. He had met her
only a few short months before and had been strangely drawn to her, as
if they had always been close. He was thirty one and she was the same
age. Sharyn had a maturity about her that made him feel good. She was
not the flighty kind that he had always seemed to attract in the past.
Their last few two months were spent in a warm, close and tender
relationship.
When he told her of his feelings, Sharyn smiled shyly and reached
for his strong hands. When he said that he was going to Alaska, a cold
empty feeling and a heaviness came over her. She seemed to realize that
they would be parting soon. He would not be taking her, and she felt a
sadness like she had never before experienced. When Karl asked her if
she wanted to go she squealed with delight. Sharyn always squealed when
she was happy. She knew that this was the start of their life together.
Holding her now the feeling that drew them together returned.
Slowly he let the day's care melt from him, like a great weight being
lifted from his body. A peace came over him and he felt life surging
anew throughout his body.
Karl thought of the past and the future he thought could never
be, and yet she was with him here and now. He needed to tell her the
story of the mountain but not of the rock and the bird. That was a
time far beyond this time.

CHAPTER 2

The canoe was beached next to a freshly fallen tree. That was
lucky he thought. The gods were watching over him for here were trees
that had the bark that he needed to mend their little craft. The river
was calm now, but not last night. They were tossed and carried by
churning, grabbing waves that threw them through the water. Several
times during that fearful night he wondered if they should have left
the tribe to start a new life in some place that no one had ever been
to before, at least no one ever talked about the land beyond the ice
flow.
The air was soft and warm, with a sweet gentle breeze coming down
from the mountains where the sun god lived. Circles broke forth in the
river as fish jumped for food. He wondered what the fish ate and would
there be some for them. Most of their possessions were lost in the
raging river the previous night.
He could see the tops of the mountains glistening in the light of
the long day. This was the time when the sun god stayed with them and
never slept. It was like that for about six moons. The air was warm and
the yellow flowers danced in a rhythm all their own that spoke of peace
and warmth and fulfillment of the land.
He looked at the holes in the sides of the canoe and wondered how
they had gotten this far. He was hungry and wondered if the one with
bones coming out of his head would be near. He knew that she would like
the meat and that she could make covers and clothes out of the skin.
She was so kind, so caring. Never complaining. When he told her of his
plan to cross the ice and see the other side of the world she shyly
smiled, took his hand and waited for him to ask her to come along.
He thought of the little white animal with the big feet that ran
around on the soft white ground when day was not there. He looked for
something to make a snare to catch small animals.
Perhaps if he could spear a big animal he could use the parts that were
strong and thin to make his traps. He had learned well, sitting with
his father and the other men as they talked of the great hunts that
lasted for many suns. He was smart and learned how to make all of the
things that he would need to live forever. Now here he was far from any
of the things that he had back there. He thought again of the little
animal and he remembered that this was one of her favorite meats.
Before starting to work on the canoe he emptied it, and carried
their possessions to a place where they would be safe from storms, a
place that would be home for that period when the snow god came. He
wondered where she had gone. He had not seen her for some time, but he
was not worried for she could take care of herself. She had hunted with
him many times and even gotten game when he did not.

While he was going about the tasks before

him, she silently approached so as not to scare him. She knew he was
worried about where they were and what they were going to do now that
they were here. She had been out gathering all the dry wood she could
carry for she knew they would be too tired that day to go and look
later. She came to him, put the wood down and looked into his eyes.
They were warm and came alive as she touched his arm. Silently she
gathered up some of the small pieces of wood and reached into a little
bag tied to her waist. From the skin bag she pulled out some dry moss
and scratched out a fire. This was the time when all was bright and the
air was warm. Because of this she was able to quickly find lots of dry
wood under the huge trees that covered the land so thickly that she
could not see for more than three or four rows of the giants. Quickly
she made the fire bigger and felt its warmth reach into all parts of
her body. Somehow she had always been able to find dry

moss, even when the white powder came from the sky. She had told him
that was her magic, finding dry moss. She set about picking berries to
eat and glancing at him she saw that he was looking at her in a way
that made her feel warm inside. She smiled shyly and knew that he liked
her now more than ever. Both were shy and tried not to show their
feelings, but could not hold back what was in their eyes. For him, as
the man, this was something that was not done. The man had to be strong
and fearless. Later in the long day she would find tender shoots of
tall grass by the river while he hunted for the meat. She would make a
warm drink for them and cook some shoots to go with whatever he brought
to their camp. She had no doubt that he would catch something. She
had watched him with the other boys and the men and he was the one that
seemed to bring in the best meat, the biggest string of fish or the
choicest birds. She thought that if he speared a big animal she would
be able to make a special

snare to catch fish and also to start to make the warm clothes they
would need for the time when there was no sun. She saw that they were
able to save little from their boat.
He looked at her with quiet eyes, wondering how he had ever lived
without her. Before going out to try and get the food that they would
need he came to her, and pulling her to him he held her close, smelling
her hair. Gentleness and warmth was all that he felt.
He laid out the skins they had saved so that they could dry. Then
he headed into the deep forest. She started her search for the roots
and berries that were to be used for their dinner.

CHAPTER 3
It was difficult going in the forest, for the trees covered most
of the warm light by the rivers edge. There was no straight path
through the trees like there was back home. Here and there he heard the
sounds of a giant bird. As he moved quietly, he wondered if the bone-
headed one even lived over here in this world.
Suddenly there was a sound like he had never heard. It was a deep
throaty rumble that came from behind him. He turned and there before
him was an animal unlike anything he had ever seen before; tall and
straight with huge finger-like objects coming from his hands and feet.
His face was short and seemed to go into his neck. He stood so high
that he had to push the lower branches aside so that he could walk.
Eigak guessed that the animal stood twenty of his hands spread on each
other. It was much bigger than the boned one, he wondered if it was as
fast. As he looked again at the animal he noticed that it had deep
brown fur. Its color was much like the little fish animal that swam on
its back and had nice fur. The skin of the big animal would give them a
cover to keep them warm, if only he could get it before it got him. The
large brown one growled and dropped to all fours and started towards
him. He saw two trees a little behind him that were close enough
together so that the big one could not get through. He thought that if
he were able to get behind them then when the big one went for him he
could push his spear between the trees and kill the beast. At that
moment the big one started to run even faster toward him. He ran for
the trees. He could smell the big one's breath as he got to the trees
and stood between the two trunks. The big one lunged toward him, again
standing on its hind legs. The giant claws raked the trees causing them
to rock back and forth. As the big one put its giant head through the
trees, Eigak's spear hit home. With a howl and then a strange cry the
big one was down and rolling from side to side. Eigak came over to the
animal and pulled the spear out of the head. Shaking from the
experience he sat down near the huge animal waiting for it to die.
After the animal was dead he went over, bent down and grabbed one
of the feet to pull it back to their camp. She would be happy to have
the skin, and what if the meat tasted good. That would be something
extra for them. This looked like a good start for them in this new
world. Try as he might he was not able to move the animal, he went
back to the little camp and got her to come and help him. The two of
them could not move the huge animal. Telling her to go back to camp and
bring him his bone knife he decided that he would take off the skin and
cut as much meat as they could carry. They would dig a hole near the
camp and bury the unused meat in the cool ground.
While she carried the skin to the camp, he set about cutting the
meat. As he did he noticed that there was a large amount of fat, not
unlike

the large fish with big teeth they would spear back home. He remembered
that the women of his village would take the fat and heat it in a pot
until it was liquid. They would store it for the cold time to give them
light in their hut. Slowly he cut the fat away and then began on
the meat. He cut it into large chunks and thin strips, putting the meat
in-between pieces of bark. As he did he also found that the beast had
long muscles that would make for good fishing material. He took off the
mighty claws and thought how they could be used for small spears and
also for making holes in the skin to tie it together.
After they had gotten all of the materials together they made two
trips bringing all of the meat back to their camp. He had taken some of
the big bones to make her a new knife and new spearheads for future
hunting. He realized that with animals this size he would have to have
more than one hunting tool with him when he went out to get game.
Together, without words, the two young people quickly built their
first little hut using the skins that they had brought with them, and
the bark from the giant trees. This would keep the rain gods away from
them. The warm winds told them they did not need to be covered when
they slept. The new skin would be warm and was big enough to cover them
both when the winds blew cold. The light god would be with them for a
long time and would help them to build their new home in this land of
the tall trees and mountains. This was good, he thought, for he would
be able to store up the meats and fish for the cold times when the dark
god would be with them. She would gather the berries and the wood and
roots and her dry moss.
Looking at the boat he realized he would have to fix it soon,
both because of fishing and in case they had to move away from this
land. After their meal, she cleaned up the area and he went about
getting the strips of spruce bark to rebuild their little boat. As he
cut the bark and fashioned it to the craft he looked out in the water
and saw a great red fish leap on his way up the river. This was strange
he thought, he had never seen a fish go up a river. They had always
gone down streams and rivers. He wondered at the marvel that had come
into his sight. Truly, he thought, this is a wonderful place. A place
that they could live together and raise their children. It had not been
the time to talk to her about a family. He had wanted to when they
lived in the village but since they were going to leave he had kept the
thought to himself. Now he could talk to her about a family.
 CHAPTER 4

The man and woman had just come back from

seeing the great birds nesting. The sun god was with them most of the
time now. The gods had been good to them in the years since they had
come to the great river where they had first landed, and where they had
continued to live. Yes, the man thought, all of the gods had been good
to them and they had three fine boys and a daughter.
A few years later one of the boys, Shugak went with Eigak along
the coast towards the top of the world. As they looked out across the
waters, on a bright day, he pointed out the direction where he and the
boy's mother had come from, so many years ago.
After six or seven suns they came to a place where there were
several huts. The people of the small village were amazed to find that
there were others on this side of the far land. The older man and his
son were also surprised though the two of them had talked of such a
thing. Not speaking the same language they started exchanging talk by
sign and gestures.
A beautiful young girl came near the fire as the men spoke.
Shugak was in awe of this creature. Shugak had never seen another woman
except for his mother and his little sister. The man smiled at the boy
and then went about sign talking to the other men for some time.
After a few days another man came into the camp. The new one
spoke the language of both groups, and when Eigak asked him for more
details he told him that he had lived with this group since he had left
his home across the sea, where they had all come from. He came across
the waters with them and he and his woman were the speakers for the
group. The man asked if there were others nearby and he was told that
another group lived several suns below where his family lived.
Eigak saw that they did not have the goods that he and his woman,
Mugash, had built up through hard work. When the boys got older they
helped and were taught the many tasks that would make it possible to
survive in this lonely place. The parents had wished for others to be
around, even though they cared as much for each other now as when they
first landed that stormy night so long age. Their thoughts were for
their children and the future.
As Eigak and his son Shugak were about to leave he invited the
speaker and his family down to visit. He gave him the water route and
the cove's entrance. Then he and Shugak left.
When they arrived back home they unloaded the big bark boat that
they had used. This was the craft that they also used to catch the big
fish and the large slippery black half fish, half animal. The man had
much to say to his woman about the people he had met and what he had
found out about the others that lived several suns below them. He told
her of how, when the
beautiful young woman came into the hut, Shugak started to show himself
off to the girl. The boy turned away, knowing that his father was
right, even though he thought no one noticed. The old man told his wife
that he had invited the one who spoke both words to bring his family to
visit them at the next moon.
Eigak and Mugush were older now and the days had been good to
them. Each of the children took on characteristics of their parents.
Shugak was the one who now did most of the hunting, sometimes
with the old man, but more often by himself.
Rangak, the next oldest, looked just like his father. He was also
somewhat of a dreamer who talked about the beautiful city he would
build. It was he who had set about making this a permanent home for
his parents and his brothers and sister.
Shugak often talked in the night to Rangak about the girl he had
seen at the other camp. He was not prepared to deal with the thought
that there were other women. Since he had only his mother and sister to
compare, he could not understand what gave him the warm feelings in his
body. He started to notice that his sister was physically different
from him in many ways. He also had this funny feeling inside when he
and Umlak went off to bathe in the rock pool he had built. When he told
this to Rangak he nodded in agreement.
For now Rangak built the huts and boats. He also made a large pot
out of a tree trunk. The trunk came up to his chest and was hollow for
the rain god who would fill it so that they had water without going to
the river. He made a hole near the bottom, on the side that faced his
parents hut. The hole was filled with a branch that had to be pulled
out to let the water flow. In the cold dark time he would fashion a
skin over the top so that they could get some of the white powder when
it fell from the sky. When the older man looked at his wife he saw her
eyes dance with pride whenever Rangak was close by. Eigak, Shugak and
Rangak had killed many of the big ones with the long bones and Rangak
made them into a frame that he covered first with bark and then skins
tied to the bones. Now all were warm and safe at the times of the great
cold and the big winds.
The little village that Eigak and his son first visited now knew
of Rangak's boats and they came to trade fish and skins for well built
crafts.
Umlak, the girl was much like her mother, both in looks and in
abilities. She was strong and capable, but had a shyness about her.
Only with her father was she outgoing and playful. There were times
that she went hunting with her oldest brother and often brought home
meals for all of them. Still she was her father's girl. She was always
able to get her father to do things for her. The two of them laughed
together, seemingly about anything, as if they had their own special
secrets. She also had the gift of her mother. She had that special
magic.
Toomgak was the youngest boy. He was different from the rest of
the family. He was short and wiry with a much darker complexion. His
eyes were as black as the night and they could look right through you.
Many times he went to the ocean and seemed to talking to the fish or
the large birds that circled overhead. He did little work around their
home and then grumbled about it when he did work. Always he would go
into the forest by himself, without a large weapon. When he was asked
by his father about this he just smiled and said that they would do him
no good. "I do not need them. The animals are my friends." At dinner
he would seem to sit apart from the family with a far off look in his
eyes. He would be gone for long periods of time, never saying where he
went or what he did. His ability seemed to lie in the fact that he
could help the hurt creatures that came into their area. The animals
came to him for healing, even the great eagle.

CHAPTER 5
Sometime later the old man, along with Shugak and Rangak, made
the trip to find the people who lived below their home. Toomgak had
told them that he was not going because he needed to be near the
animals.
The speaker they met on their first voyage to the north village
told them that the trip would take several suns.
It was on this trip that Rangak had his first taste of the open
sea. He had heard about it from his father and from Shugak, but he
thought they were trying to put fear in him for some reason.
Before going to the sea they travelled upstream first. This was
for a two-fold reason. First they had to make sure that the boat had no
leaks or cracks, and second the father wanted to make sure the younger
boy was up to the trip.
The boat and the boy both held up well. After returning to their
home for the night they set out for the lower camp. As they came around
the end of the cove that led to the open waters Rangak heard sounds
like he had never heard before. A roaring greeted his ears and made
them hurt. The water hurled itself against the little craft and it
began to swing wildly. The old man yelled an order and the two boys dug
their paddles deeper into the water holding the boat in a straight line
as they moved slowly toward the open sea and calmer waters.
Rangak was afraid for this was something he could not control. He
prayed to the water god to leave them alone. The tops of the water were
like the soft powder that fell during the long night, but with a
greater force. Just as it had begun the noise and the high waves
stopped. He looked back and saw the shore that they had just come from,
peaceful and quiet.
As the sun moved to the west the day was growing colder and the
three of them looked for a place to beach their craft.
Suddenly a giant fish came to the surface of the water directly
ahead of them. It was as long as one of the bark trees back home. As
the tail of the fish came crashing down on the waters the little boat
was turned to the side and swept towards the shore as the monster
disappeared from view. Startled the three men paddled for the shore
while the sea carried them even faster. The little craft hurtled toward
the shore. Rangak prayed to the spirit god that they would be safe.
As the water slowed, the craft turned slightly to the left and
started a long glide to the shore. The sandy beach was warm and safe
and they gave thanks to the spirit god for saving them.
After resting on the shore for several minutes they took out
their supplies from the boat and looked for the best place to spend the
night. This was Rangak's job, and while he was doing this the older man
went in search of wood. Shugak took this time to get his weapons
together and go to see if he could get some food so that
they would not have to go into their supplies. After what had happened
they felt they needed to conserve their foodstuff's as long as possible.
While the other two were doing their tasks, Rangak, after finding
a place for them, pulled out their skins, from the bottom of the boat,
to make sure they were not too wet and then went back to check the boat
for little leaks. Rangak discovered several places that were in need of
repair. He was proud of the boat and knew that no one else would have
made a boat that would take this punishment. He showed the spots to be
repaired to his father and then set about finding the bark and the
vines that he would need for the repairs. After he had found what he
needed he reached into the pouch that was tied to his waist, and took
out some of the sharp fingers of the great beast that his brother had
killed several moons ago. He had fashioned a hole in one end to run the
vine through the bark. With quick
hands he pulled the thin shaft through the bark and wove it into the
good bark still on the boat.
It did not take him long to complete his task and when he was
done he saw that the old man had gathered up wood and was making a
fire. The father came over and looked at the work of his second son and
said, "Rangak, you are the best boat maker that I have ever seen.
Perhaps you should find all of the other people who live by the water
and make your living in this way." Rangak was pleased that his father
would say this and it was strange for this had been on his mind for
some time now that he could make many things and sell or trade to
others.
At about the same time Shugak came back to their campsite with
two of the white-footed animals that tasted so good. They would eat
well this night and use little of their supplies. The bark was put into
the sea and then the meat was wrapped in the wet bark and cooked on the
coals. In the morning they would wrap the remaining meat in the wet
bark and take it with them as they
travelled south. Life was good that day and the spirit god had again
watched over them. For now there was only the warm fire and the slow-
cooked meat on the coals.
The following day a great wind blew and the men were unable to
continue their journey. During this time the two boys went into the
forest to look around. They were surprised to see that there was little
difference in this area and where they lived, except for the sandy
white beach. Their beach area at home was filled with stones and bits
of sharp black rocks.
After walking the tree-line for several minutes they struck off
for the interior. The tall trees seemed to have lessened the wind
inside the forest.
Suddenly they came across a large clearing. Larger than anything
they had ever seen. The ground here was also different. It was soft and
almost black. Little flowers seem to pop up everywhere. The flowers
were white and yellow and the grass in the clearing was a bright green.
Shugak was looking for the tracks of animals while Rangak searched the
trees for a sign of the giant bird with the white head and the large
black wings. Neither saw anything that said there was life here.

Shugak
thought that this would make a wonderful place to live. The air was
sweet and the smell of the forest was good. Also, he thought, the land
could be used to plant some other things that might grow and bring food.
Since they were going to be here for the day the boys decided to
go on past the clearing and see what was ahead. To their left they
found a river, but saw no fish jumping nor did they see the tracks of
any bird or animal.
After several minutes the boys noticed that the air was drier and
the trees did not seem as tall and were spaced further apart.
As they moved along the river they were pleased that they had
landed here for this was something they could talk about. They
marvelled at the stillness of the trees while by the boat the wind was
making great noise in the trees by the beach. Still there was no sign
of either birds, fish or animals.
Shugak was starting to think of the time when he would settle
down with someone, like his mother. He thought of the girl he had seen
many moons ago in the other village.
Suddenly Rangak let out a shout and as Shugak looked up to where
his brother was pointing he saw a new sight. A giant rock that seemed
to up to the clouds. The top of it was covered with a shiny white
substance not unlike that which would come down during the long night.
This was the first time either had seen a big mountain. The boys
started to go to the rock when they heard a sound unlike anything they
had ever heard before. The sound was close to the ground and Shugak
tried to pinpoint its location. Whatever it was, the short panting like
sounds seemed to be running along their path. Not having any of their
large weapons with them the boys turned back towards the place where
their father was gathering the little crystals that tasted so good.
When they reached camp they told the old man what they had seen and
what they had heard. The old man remembered that sound. It came from
the fast moving creatures they called "wolf."
The next day dawned bright and clear, with just enough of a
breeze to make paddling out to sea work for the three of them. It was
difficult getting over the waves and to the open sea but after what
seemed a long time they were free of the wind and the waves, and they
headed towards the village they were seeking.
The sea was calm and they found the paddling easy for the current
helped to carry them and the water was warm.
The next day was much like the day before with just a hint of a
breeze. The men were able to take turns paddling and keeping the boat
in the current. Rangak did a good job of repairing the craft.
Rangak had come up with an idea that if he stretched tightly
laced skins over the boat and secured them to the sides that the inside
would stay dry and they could carry more things that would not be hurt
by the sea. For now all of this was talk and it served to occupy the
time while they headed to the village below.
Two more days passed before they saw a cluster of huts on the
shoreline ahead. They were excited to find so many people in one place.
The man who spoke both words did not tell them how many were there and
they thought that it would be like the first village; but this was
different for there were twenty or thirty huts set back from the shore.
The older man gave orders for the boys to pull to the shore.
Once ashore they pulled their craft up onto the beach, past where
the water god came each night. It was strange as they pulled the boat
up no one came out to meet them or even to look from the huts at them.
It was like the camp was empty.
From the first moment that Shigashu, the leader of the village,
saw the boat he knew that it was not the man who spoke both words. When
he saw that there were three strangers in the boat he had all of the
people of the village follow him into the trees. Here they would stay
until Shigashu could find out who they were, what they wanted and where
they came from.
They knew that no one else lived near them for they had journeyed
three days in all directions looking for others like them to make their
camp even more secure from the large beasts that came into their camp
and attacked the people.
 " Who were these men and what did they want," Shigashu asked to no
one in particular. No one answered as the three men came onto the
beach. They did not have any weapons with them. They made no effort to
go into any of the huts, except for the smallest of the men, who looked
carefully at the way they were built and seemed delighted with their
condition.
Perhaps they came from the land of the Chugachi's. The big island
that they sometimes rowed near when they were fishing. They had seen
the fires and heard the loud war cries coming from the big island. For
now he would have to play the waiting game and see what the three men
were going to do to his home.
The old man looked at Rangak and said, "What do you think of the
way that they live?" The boy replied, "the huts are well built, much
like the design that I have made for my own when I leave to start my
own life." They seem to have good things to eat with and they have
small tree trunks to drink from." At this point Shugak said, "There
are no weapons in the camp. I think they're in the trees and are
watching us to see what we shall do. If we build a fire and make up
some food they might come out. If not then I will try to find them. The
man of both words said they speak our words so we might call to them
and tell them we are visitors."
The old man thought for a few minutes while the boys brought up some
supplies from the boat.
When the boys were back he told them that he would walk to the
edge of the trees and call back to the boys. This way the people, if
they were near, would know that they all came from the same land. At
that point he got up and walked towards the trees.
Shigashu did not know what to make of the new ones. They did not
seem hostile. In fact they did not even take food from any of the huts.
If only he could understand what they were talking about. They showed
no weapons and seemed peaceable but he did not want his people caught
in case there were others following.
It was then that he saw the older man get up and start his way.
Had he left tracks? He could see none. What was the old man doing? He
had no weapon as he came their way. The people saw this and they moved
further back into forest.
When the old man got to the edge of the trees he called back to
the boys, telling them not to do any damage to the campsite or the huts.
Shigashu was surprised. This man was speaking their language. Are
these people who had just come from across the water?
The old man kept talking and suddenly he heard a noise to his
side. An older man, older than he, came quietly out of the forest, and
called to him. "Who are you and why are you here?" The father looked
at him and said," My name is Eigak. I am the father of the boys down at
your village. We come from the man who speaks both words. He has told
us of your village and it is much larger than where we are, many suns
away. Also there are others who do not speak our words who live above
us by several suns." This was long conversation for Eigak who had not
spoken to anyone but his family, with the exception of the man of both
words, for many years.
Shigashu listened patiently and then called to his followers to
come out of the woods. Eigak was surprised to see so many. There must
have been thirty or forty men women and children.
They came carefully forward, not knowing what to expect. As they did
Shugak and Rangak also came to meet them, but Eigak stopped them with a
wave.
 As they approached the two men they could hear them talking in
their own language. This was a good sign for now they knew that they
would be able find out many things about the area and about their own
people.
Eigak came back to his sons and told them of his talk with the
man. He told them that they had been asked to stay for a while in the
village and get to know the people there. Rangak was overjoyed for this
meant that he could study the houses in greater detail. Shugak was not
so happy, for it was on his mind that he needed to start his own family
and the thoughts of the beautiful girl that he had seen in the other
camp were more frequent. He had a strange feeling in his body when he
thought of the girl. He became warm all over. This was the time that he
needed to find his own way.
The trio stayed for several days. They were amazed to find out
that the villagers seemed to have an endless supply of food. The three
men were going to use what they had brought but there was no need for
the people of the village fed them with fish, and shrimp as well as
bird and meat. They also seemed to have plenty of greens for them to
eat and the women fixed it exactly like their mother would when they
were home.
Rangak found that they had made the huts just like he was
planning to do and he asked who designed them. A young girl was brought
to him and he was told that she was the one who came up with the idea
of a round top so that the snow would not pile up and cave in the hut.
Rangak and the girl spent many hours together building a hut
using both of their ideas. The girl's name was Jumuha and she was about
the same age as Rangak.
Before he left he told Jumuha he would look at their boats.
Looking over their boats he found that they were badly in need of
repair. He showed the girl how he sowed new bark into the good bark
still good on the boat.
That night the three of them made their decisions, decisions that
would forever change the land. It was decided that Shugak and Eigak
would go back to get their sister, brother and mother and they would
get all of their things and move to this area. The village would make a
good place for them and the older ones would have others to talk with
and the younger ones would be able to set up their lives to live as
they pleased and perhaps find a mate.
Rangak decided to stay and would build the huts, one for his
parents and one each for his brothers and sister. Jokingly he said to
Shugak, that he would make him an extra large one for he had to bring
back the girl he had seen and build a large family. The next morning
the two men left for their home with the promise that they would be
back soon.
 CHAPTER 6
Rangak and Jumuha started in to explore the surrounding area.
Bonoha, the girls brother, went with them each day, both to keep an eye
on his sister and because he really liked Rangak. He saw that Rangak
could do things that he could not, and was hoping that the older boy
would stay with them, teaching him how to make and fix the boats.
Rangak had already checked the boats. They were in bad shape and he
asked Bonoha why the boats were in such bad condition. Everything else
was in good shape and he marveled at the way that the people had built
and prepared the land. Bonoha told him that someone in the
village had fixed one of the boats and had gone out to fish in it and
never came back. They repaired a second boat and it too disappeared.
From then on all the fishing was from the beach or up the river just a
short walk from the village.
Rangak and the girl spent much time

together. As they walked he marveled at the fact that the land was so
flat. He wondered if he would be able to see the white tops of the
earth that he had seen when they had made the first landing, in the
days before they came to this village. That far country seemed so nice,
so empty and peaceful. Would he ever see it again, he wondered. For
now, however, he was going to set about making a home for his parents,
brothers, sister and himself.
He was spending more time now with Jumuha. In fact it seemed as
if she was always with him. Her father also noticed and set about to
talk to the young man. He liked Rangak and felt that he would be a fine
mate for his daughter. Everyone in the village seemed to like him as
well.
One day Shigashu asked Rangak to take a walk with him, and during
their walk he asked him if he was going to stay with them and if so
what about Jumuha. Rangak thought for several minutes and as they
walked he realized that she was someone who would make a good mother
for his children. Someone to lie down with at night and wake up with in
the morning. Rangak and the old man came to a pile of rocks and sat
down. Rangak told the old man how he felt about the girl, and then,
looking at the other man said, "I have decided to make my life here. I
will ask Jumuha to make the life with me; but first I have a task to
perform. I am going to repair one of the boats and then I am going to
take it out to sea. I will bring it back to you and the curse will be
off the sea and the village." The older man smiled to himself and
thought that the gods had indeed blessed the village, for here was one
to give all of them a new heart.
The old man agreed and told him that he would not say anything to
the girl until Rangak had finished what he was about to do.
Rangak had to build the huts for his family, and the girl was a
big help. She knew where to find the materials that were needed. He
added something new to the huts. When a group of small animals were
brought in to eat he asked if he could have the skins. Puzzled the
villagers brought him many; in fact so many he laughingly told them,
"Save some of the animals for next year." He was told that they killed
so many now so that they could bury them in the cold ground and have
them during the dark times. Rangak noted that the days were getting
shorter and there was a little time when it was dark.
He quickly scraped the skins and got the long pieces of muscle
and used that to weave the skins together. When that was done he
gathered some tree limbs, lashed them together and then tied the skins
to the frame. He placed this on the inside of the hut in such a way as
to be able to slide it to either side. He told them that this would
keep the cold white powder from the huts and that all they had to do
was slide it to either side and go out. He showed them that when it
started to get cold how it would help to keep the heat in their huts.
The villagers marveled at the young man and what he was doing for them.

The next day found all the village people making their covers for their
huts. Jumuha watched him with happy eyes, pleased that he liked her,
and that he was helping her people. When they were alone he would hold
her in his arms and tell her how good she looked. He told her how smart
she was and that one day she would be a good mate to someone. She
laughed and said, "When I find that mate you will be the first to
know."
Rangak finished the huts for his family during the next several
days. Now it came time to find out what was out in the sea that had
taken the lives of the villagers. He took the boat that had the best
frame and taking fresh bark from the trees in the area, fashioned a
strong craft. The people came and looked at it and nodded at the fine
workmanship. Jumuha was proud of Rangak and thought that he was going
to find out very soon who her mate would be.
As the little craft and it's lone occupant headed for the sea a
great calm appeared. It was as if the sea knew that Rangak was coming
and
wanted him to feel at peace.
There was something different about this boat than others. The
top of the boat was covered with the hide of the big one with the bone
growing from his head. It was tied down to the boat itself and woven
into the sides at the top. Rangak sat in the center hole with a new
kind of paddle that had a blade on both ends. Rangak had planned this
boat before and this was the chance to test it out in the great waters
of the ocean. All of his possessions for the trip were under the
covering and he noticed that they seemed to stay dry. This was good,
the young man thought, for it meant that he would be able to bring in
dry materials over the water. He could bring them to the village.
He had decided that when he came back from trying to find the
others and the great fish he would ask Jumuha to be his mate; to be the
mother of his children and to live with him always. He would stay near
her village until they moved on

to another part of this great land.

After what had seemed hours, Rangak noticed that the water seemed
a different color. It seemed to have more blue to it. Also the spray
seemed to be warmer on his face. Perhaps, he thought, this is the
reason the others had not come back. They kept on going looking for the
warm land.
Without warning the sea erupted with a loud roar. From the very
depths of the sea a great monster rose and crashed down towards him.
His little craft swayed and bounced in the turbulent waters. The
monster slowly started to go under when its gigantic tail flattened out
and hit the water with a loud slap, causing the little boat to toss and
turn wildly in the swirl it made. Rangak felt as if both he and the
boat would be pulled under the water. In that instant he realized what
had happened to the others. If his little boat had not been covered it
would have filled with water and sunk and the force would

have pulled him down as well.

At that moment another monster appeared, but not as large as the
first. This one made for the little boat and Rangak. Suddenly the giant
fish went under the boat and came up with the boat on its back.
Swiftly down it went and created a swirl that seemed to pull the little
craft down. Was this to be the end, thought Rangak as he went down. But
just as suddenly the boat shot back up and leveled out.
The current made by the waves and the trough of water had carried
him far away from the land that he could see in the distance. He was
sure that no one could see the boat from there. Twice more the two
monster fish came up behind him as if pushing him away from his world.
Suddenly without warning the calm returned and the little craft and
it's lone occupant were free.
It must have been hours since he left the village and the day was
getting darker. He paddled toward the shore hoping to make a camp

for the rest that he needed. Tomorrow, he thought, he would start the
trip back and tell the others in the village what had happened.
For the better part of three hours he paddled until finally he
was able to beach the boat. He took out some food and sticks to build a
fire. The land was rocky and barren and there was no life to be seen in
any direction.
Rangak made his fire. He thanked the gods for his life. After he
had eaten his meal he looked over the boat to see what damage had been
done. To his delight and amazement there were no signs of damage and
the inside has stayed quite dry. He remembered some words that he had
heard his father use and he called the craft a "Kayak". As he
looked over the little craft he thought of his family. What had
happened to his father and his brother on the way back to their home?
Did they make it? Were they all alive. What about the others in the
village? Did they see the giant fish and think that he was dead?
As these questions raced through his mind he felt suddenly like a
great weight had been put on him. He could never remember being this
tired. Quickly he spread his sleeping hide and fell into a deep sleep.
He had been having the same dream for several months now. It was
a strange dream, one that troubled him. He dreamt of a great mountain,
rising out of the land. The top was covered with snow with large rocks
on the sides. Part of the way up there were trees but they stopped
before the mountain was half way out of the ground. The top glistened
with a bright sun spreading it's warmth, warmth that he could feel.At
the foot of the giant peak stood a girl.

CHAPTER 7
Rangak and Jumuha had wanted a child for many years now. They had
performed the rites of marriage almost as soon as he returned to the
village from his trip to find the others from the village. The old
ones, now long dead had come to the village along with Shugak and
Umlak, his sister and Rokal, the girl that Shugak had met at the other
camp. Toomgak had stayed behind to take care of his "friends," the
animals and birds. Bonoha had married Umlak. The others had already had
children and the camp had become a village. People from the camp to
the North had come to their camp and now they had the men to do all of
the things necessary to build a permanent place in this country. Shugak
and Rangak had become leaders and their wisdom was welcomed by all who
came to their home. Shugak was the builder and planner for the area and
for the crafts that they now used to gather large quantities of fish.
The villagers were never hungry.

Several times, in the past moons, they had seen large boats with
sails on the horizon. So far they had not come near their home. Rangak
had taken all of the young men and had taught them the ways of his
father, in the use of knives, spears and the bow. He had made a new bow
for each person and soon as they learned how to use the ones that he
supplied. They all learned to make the arrows used for the hunt.
The men of the village now were taking longer trips into the land
to search for others as well as for food. Many times they had heard the
sounds of animals but could not find them. What they did find were the
footprints of a man. The prints never seemed to come towards the
village; but moved farther inland following the slopes of the mountains
that covered the backside of their land.
Out on the horizon where the water met the sky, the large boats
with great sails were seen more often but they never came close to the
land.
One day, as was his custom, Rangak went to sea, going towards
where he had seen the giant fish. He had brought back much fish from
this part of the sea. As he turned to the south and headed for the bay
where he had landed that first terrible day, he saw one of the boats
coming towards the shore. Using all of his strength he headed for the
little bay. The giant ship came hurtling through the sea towards him.
As he maneuvered into the bay he was hidden from the ship for
several minutes. During that time he was able to get his little craft
ashore and out of sight. The big ship came to a stop at the mouth of
the bay and lowered several boats into the water and started to the
shore.
Rangak ran into the forrest with his bow, arrows and spears. On
his waist he wore his long knife. He stopped for a minute to see the
men who were searching for him. He could hear them talking in a
language he had never heard. As he rested he saw two of the men coming
up the path he had taken. He quickly hid in the brush and as the men
passed he was able to see their features. Not only did they talk
differently they looked different! Their skin was much lighter and they
had large hairs growing out of their faces. Over their shoulders they
carried a large object that he had never seen before. They had no bows
or spears and their knives were very short. They wore much body
coverings and seemed to be uncomfortable with all the weight they
carried.
Suddenly Rangak heard the sounds that had become familiar to
those in their village who had travelled to the mountains for food. It
was the man-animal!
The strangers heard this sound and it threw them into a great
deal of confusion and fright. The leaders of the men yelled some words
and the men ran forward toward the sounds.
After several minutes no one came near Rangak and he started to
go inland, away from the bay and away from the strange animal sounds.
Moving quickly and silently he started

towards the big rock that he had seen from the beach. When the dark
gods came for their brief visit he could still hear the strangers and
could see their fires behind him. He knew that he could not go back to
his little boat.
Rangak had lived forty-seven seasons of the light god and was
not as quick as he once was, but he did have his mind and now he set
about using it. First he had to get his bearings and then try to find
an inland way back to the village. After several hours he started
deeper into the forrest, hoping that he was also moving towards the
village. He was good at moving in the darkness, though the sky was only
a dark color and there was still light so that he could move with some
ease though not at the speed he once moved.
Suddenly he heard the sound of something in front of him. Rangak
froze and the sound became steps. A stranger stepped in front of him
and pointed to a path between some large trees. The

man made a shrill sound much like the giant white topped bird. In a few
seconds there was the rush of wings above him. Rangak had known fear in
his life, but not the terror that he felt at that moment. Again the man
pointed to the path and Rangak started through the trees. He turned to
the man but no one was there.
Rangak was a leader because he could think things through to a
logical conclusion, but this seemed not to have a conclusion that he
could figure out. He had been walking for several hours and the light
god was back and he noticed that the path seemed to be getting broader
and that he was going uphill. His pace had slowed as the climb became
more difficult.
After a few hours he rested and reached into his pouch for
something to eat. He had forgotten how hungry he really was and how
little he was able to take with him from his boat. As he made his fire
and started to eat his flood he saw a small animal about ten paces
away. It was much like the big footed little ones that they caught and
ate. Taking out an arrow and tightening his bow he steadied himself and
took the shot. The animal dropped and he went to get him. After
preparing him he wrapped the little meats in bark and put it into his
pouch. He decided that this was the time for him to get some rest and
he lay down off the path and in the hollow of a giant tree. Sleep came
quickly and with it the dream of the mountain and the girl. Now the
mountain seemed much closer.
When Rangak woke up he knew that something was different. Looking
around he discovered that someone had come to where he was sleeping and
had left him fresh roots and berries. He had also left water that was
clear. That was strange he thought since he had seen no springs or
ponds during the time he had been walking.
After he had eaten and packed up his precious food and the water
in it's little bag of skin he again started up the soft ground that
made up the path. He was still climbing but now he could see the
mountains around him through the breaks in the trees.
 For three days Rangak followed the path, wondering where he was
going, and would he ever see his wife and the village again. The path
was clear and he was able to cover much ground each day until the
fourth day when a large storm came upon him. He tried to keep going,
hoping to find a shelter from the wind and the rain and the first
dropping of snow. The storm lasted for several days and when it was
over he decided that he would return to the beach. He was sure that the
others would have left and returned to the big boats.
Something made him look in front of him, as he was getting ready
to leave. There in a clearing he could see the mystery man and beyond
him a large mountain glistening in the light of the gods.
Without taking time to think. Rangak started toward the man and
the mountain. It seemed that with each step he took the mountain got
closer but the man kept moving away up the path.
Rangak had been traveling for several hours when he heard the
sound of water rushing over the rocks just as the sea sounded when it
crashed against rocks. "What will I tell the others about this trip,"
he said to himself. Then he heard the sound of the giant bird and
looked up in time to see it go over the hump in the trail he had been
following. Going up to the hump he found that the pathway narrowed so
that he could look down and see a large river with foaming white water
cascading over the rocks in a brilliant display of colors as the light
hit the water.
Looking ahead he saw the mysterious man up the narrow trail and
sitting on a branch next to his him was the giant bird with the white
head. The man made a shrill sound and the bird flew out over the
water, dove and was lost from view. Moments later the bird flew just
overhead, his wings fanning Rangak. Something dropped from its beak and
a fish, still wriggling fell at his feet.

Rangak was stunned. Who was this person with the long hair who
was ahead of him? How did he talk to the bird? Where was he? All of
these questions raced through his mind and at the same time he realized
that he was very hungry. In fact he had not eaten since the dark god
came and went and now was coming again.
Rangak continued to move forward, looking for a place to eat and
sleep. The path appeared narrow for some distance. Suddenly there was a
wide spot where he could make a fire. It was close to the water and
this was good he thought for he had not had much to drink for the past
few days. He had taken the fish to eat and now was the time.
After he had eaten and satisfied his thirst he sat back and looked
around. A weariness set in and he fell asleep still sitting against the
tree.
Something forced Rangak to open his eyes. It was a feeling, for
he saw nothing in front of him. He looked up and saw that he had been
sleeping for a very long time. In the tree he sat against, was the big
bird. Rangak stretched and started to move about when he saw the
mysterious man sitting in the shadows of a giant tree across the
clearing. Going over to the man he sat down, and thinking that the man
would not understand him, he started to draw pictures in the dirt. The
man smiled at him and drew answers. Time went by and the mystery man
suddenly got up, motioned for Rangak to follow him and he started off
toward the middle of the mountains.
Rangak had no idea of where he was or how he would get back to
his village so he followed the man and the bird.
On the third day there was quite a change in the land. Now they
started down the back of the mountains. Rangak thought that they were
heading back to the village and he quickened the pace.
After several hours Rangak realized that they were still following the
river and that the land was flat and the river was narrower than
before. Ahead of him he could see another range of
mountains. That night as they slept, he had the dream again. This time
he could make out the girl. It was not Jumuha.
Two more days passed and they came to a wide spot on the north
side of the river. Since they were on the South side Rangak could not
tell how far the river went into the wide spot. Directly in front of
them he could see the mountains again starting their climb to the sky.
These days the dark god was there almost half of the time. The
man motioned for him to move on and follow him. Around the next bend
Rangak found out why they were going in this direction. There was a
cluster of huts in a beautiful clearing surrounded by large trees.
There were several of the big birds sitting in the trees and calling to
each other. From the huts came men and women and children. Why did so
many of them look familiar to him? As he stood there puzzled he heard
his name called. "Rangak, don't you think we can stop drawing pictures
in the dirt and talk to each other?"
Rangak was taken back first by the words and then by the fact
that someone knew him. Turning he saw that it was the man who had
brought him here. "Why didn't you talk to me back where we met? Who are
you?" he said. "Surely you did not forget your brother, Toomgak, did
you?" the man said. Rangak was stunned. How could this be he thought?
Who were the others here?
As if Toomgak read his mind the younger brother said, "I suppose
you want to know all about all of this so let us sit in my house and we
will talk, only with words." He laughed as he said this last part.
The two talked for many hours, each asking the other about the
family and what had happened over the past years. Rangak told him of
the village and of the people who lived there. When he told him of the
death of the old ones Toomgak became quiet and a sad look came across
his face. Toomgak in turn told him that when the old ones and Shugak
decided to go to the village he had already made up his mind that he
was going to live in the forest with the birds and the animals. He said
that he had lived there, and had learned the ways of the birds and the
animals. He also had learned to eat from bushes and trees and grass
instead of the fish and animals that the family had for their meals. He
still ate some of other food but only when it was clear that the fish
or animal or bird would not live.
Rangak was curious about this village. He said that so many
looked so familiar. Toomgak told him of how he had been moving around
the forest until he found this river and started to follow it to se
where it would lead.
After several days he ﾁ 222222‚222222ƒ222222„222222…
222222†222222‡222222ˆ222222‰222222Š222222‹222222Œ222222222222Ž222222
222222222222‘222222’222222“222222”222222•222222–222222—
222222˜222222™222222š222222›222222œ222222
222222ž222222Ÿ222222222222¡222222¢222
222
£2
2222
2¤2
2222
2¥2
3232
3¦232323§232323¨232323©232323ª232323«2
32323¬232323232323®232323¯232323°232323±232323²232323³232323
´2
3232
3µ232323¶232323·232323¸232323¹232323º232323»2
3232
3¼232323½232323¾232323¿232323À232323Á232323Â232323Ã232323Ä232323Å232323Æ
232323Ç232323È232323É232323Ê232323Ë232323Ì232323Í232323Î232323Ï232323Ð23
2323Ñ232323Ò232323Ó232323Ô232323Õ232323Ö232323×232323Ø232323Ù232323Ú2323
23Û232323Ü232323Ý232323Þ232323ß232323à232323á232323â232323ã232323ä232323
å232323æ232323ç232323è232323é232323232323ë232323ì232323í232323î232323ï
232323ð232323ñ232323ò232323ó232323ô232323õ232323ö232323÷232323ø232323ù23
2323ú232323û232323ý232323ýÿÿÿþ232323ÿ23232323 2323came to where they
were now. He had found several people here and was surprised to find
that they spoke the same language. He was also surprised to find that
they came from the same place over the waters that his parents had come
from so many years ago.
He soon met a girl and they decided to live together and raise a
family. He found out that the people were here even before his family
had come to this shore.
During his time in this village he had become it's leader. It was
he who had taught them to grow the foods that he had gotten from the
giant birds. The birds had brought him seeds of different plants and
these he planted to help him live. The people found in him a kind and
gentle person, always ready to help and yet not willing to go on the
hunts for the foods to carry them through the dark times.
He was different they realized but he was good and they listened
when he spoke. He told them of his family and of the place that they
were going to and the place where the others who did not speak their
language lived.
Rangak listened to all of this and told him how he missed his
wife and how he had been hunted by the strange men with the light skin.
He told him of the storm and how he could not find his way back to the
sea or to the village. Toomgak told him that he did not know where the
village was but that it must be a far distance that none of them had
travelled. He told him that the dark god was upon them and that he
would have to wait until the coming of the light god before he could
find his way back to either the sea or the village.
Rangak knew this and he agreed to stay with his brother for the
time of the dark god.
Back at the Rangak's village plans had been made to start a
search for him. Some of the men, including Shugak paddled down to the
little bay where they found Rangak's boat. Searching the land they
found no trace of Rangak; but did they find things that said someone
had been there. Shugak and the party returned to the village and a
great sadness came over the village.
Shortly after the return of the search party, several large sail
boats appeared off the coast. They seemed to locate the village and
sent some smaller boats close to the shore but
returned back to the mother ships and left.

CHAPTER 8

It was the time when the dark god was with them and a great
eruption took place at Shugak"s village. The earth shook and trembled
and large parts of the land opened up. When it was over the land had
settled below the coast line and the village was flooded, both by the
sea and the torrential rains that came with this storm. No one was
spared and the village ceased to exist.
When the light god again started to be with them for several
hours, Rangak and his brother set out to find the village. They too had
felt the earth shake but it was not as violent and caused only some
trees to become uprooted. Toomgak knew the land much better than
his older brother and it was he who led the way. When they came to the
wide spot in the river that Rangak had seen before, the waters were
much calmer. It was here that they crossed to the North side of the
stream, and continued on in a fairly straight line leaving the river
below. The mountains again went up to the sky. The going was much
slower than when he had come from the bay. The white powder was
deep and it was hard for them to walk for long periods of time. Since
the dark god was still with them for much of the time they did not
cover much ground.
As they continued Toomgak noticed that there were no animals or
birds making sounds. Many trees had been pulled from the ground as if
by a giant hand. There were also holes in the ground that stretched
from one path to another. The two men discussed this and did not know
what had happened to cause this terrible picture of destruction.
Rangak had become comfortable with his brother making decisions
and he had seen how well he looked after the people of his village.
Rangak had asked him if the village was there long before the old ones
came to this land. Toomgak said that all he was able to find out was
that they had been there before his parents but he did not know how
much before. He did ask if any of them knew his family or the name of
the place where they had come from. No one knew but they did say that
they had given the village a name just before Toomgak came to them.
They called the village Galena. To them it was a sacred word they used
to protect the village from the evil spirits. So far it seemed to be
working.
As the light god stayed with them for longer periods of time they
were able to make better time and cover more distance each day.
Many days later they reached the top of the mountains and started
down to the waters of the sea. As they travelled they saw much more
damage to the land and it seemed to upset Toomgak. After three or four
days he started to make the shrill cries that Rangak had first heard so
many days ago. That time there was a bird with him, but this time there
was no answer. Time and again he called and time after time he made new
and different calls with the same result.
The light god was now with them most of the time and they
travelled to the distant shoreline. Finally they arrived at the shore
and started down the coast looking for the village. Rangak saw some
familiar landmarks but most of the land was different than he had ever
seen it. Toomgak, who had travelled over the interior of this land,
also could barely find his way. He continued to call to the birds and
the animals but there were no answers.
The two boys spent much time looking at what had happened and one
day while going out in the bay Rangak stepped on something soft and
strange. He lifted it from the rocky sand and it was a coat of fur. He
recognized it as one that he had made for his wife, Jumuha. Rangak was
surprised at this and started to walk through the waters very
carefully, looking for what he did not know. Toomgak came back from
down the coast and said that he had not seen a thing. Rangak showed him
the coat. Both started to cover the ground around
the bay in a systematic manner. Toomgak decided one afternoon to swim
out to a rock in the middle of the bay.
After he had gone about half way he suddenly went under the
water. When he came up he raced back to the shore. "Rangak, Rangak,
come quick," he yelled at the top of his voice. When Rangak came to his
brother, Toomgak said, "I have found the village." Before Rangak could
say anything, Toomgak said, "The village is under the water. It is no
more. It is a terrible sight under the water and all are dead. The
great spirit that did this is the one that hurt the land." Rangak was
stunned. His wife, his brother all of the ones who had depended on him
were lost. A great cry of despair burst from his lungs, tears fell from
his eyes and he started tearing at his flesh.
Toomgak quickly put his arms around his brother and held him
close until the sobs became low, soft moans. What was he to do now. All
of his family was gone. No, he still had family. He had Toomgak!
The time went slowly for Rangak. His body was stronger than ever
but his mind was clouded with sadness. His loss could not be measured
by words. All that he knew was that he had no wife, no friends and no
home. He was here with his only living family, his brother. Toomgak
tried to make him feel as if he belonged to the village, but his heart
was heavy.
Toomgak called a meeting of the men of the village to talk about
the situation. He was worried that such an attitude could infect the
village and that the evil spirits could become part of their village.
Noongak, the oldest member of the village and one whose words were
studied with much care, suggested that Toomgak help him to build a hut
of his own. Toomgak gave this a great deal of thought and finally went
to his older brother and said, "Rangak, I think that it would be better
if you had a place of your own. It is time for all of us to get on with
our lives. Nothing can be done for those who are gone. We have prayed
to the gods for their souls
and now we must go on with our lives and those around us." Rangak said
nothing.
At first light after the dark god had left for the day he started
to build a frame for his place. For the past several days he had been
looking at their huts and he knew he could build one that was much
better. When he had finished the frame he called to one of the men to
help him get some skins. He said to the man, "Where are the big animals
that walk on their back legs and have the brown fur?" The man said
that there were some only a short ways from their camp; but he said,
"We do not have the weapons to kill them and they have gotten into our
foods and chased our people. Everyone thinks they are an evil god."
Rangak said to the man, "If you will help me build my hut I shall help
you make a weapon that will kill the big one."
Over the next few days he added some new ideas to the hut. One
was a large hole in the center of the top area. Everyone asked him
about
it and he just smiled and said, "wait until it is finished."
Rangak took the other man and one or two more to look for some
small saplings that were of the kind that bent but did not break
easily. After they had found some he looked for some straight branches
from the giant trees. When they had gotten everything they went back
to camp.
Carefully with his knife he split the young saplings and set
about taking the bark off of one of the split pieces. He then took a
flat stone that he had gotten down by the river and proceeded to run it
over the flat side of the sapling. He told the others that this would
take off all of the rough spots so that they wouldn't get pieces of
wood in their hands. He did the same with the rounded side until all of
the bark had disappeared.
The people in the village were delighted. They had wanted some to
teach them how for a long time. The only weapon like this belonged to
Toomgak, who used it only on the animals he had to kill. This was much
stronger than Toomgak's but they still had nothing to shoot at the big
one.
Next Rangak took the long branches and cut them until they were
about four hands higher than he was when he was standing. He ran the
rock over the branch until it was smooth all over. He told the others
to do the same with the branches he had brought them.
While they were working he went down to the waters edge and
looked for some flat stones that were very light. After finding several
of the stones he went back to the village where the others were busy
working on the long branches.
It was a funny sight to see them work for a few minutes and then
hand the rock to another for a short time. This happened until all had
done some and then the rock went back to the first person. They kept
this up until all the branches were scraped clean. They showed them
proudly to Rangak who smiled and told them they had done a good job.
While they had been doing their work Rangak had been rubbing the
stones until all had been made into a sharp pointed object. He got his
branch and at one end he cut out, from the center, a place to set the
sharpened stone. Rangak took some of the pieces of the cords they had
taken out of the little animal with the big feet. He used this to tie
the rock on so that it set firmly into the branch. He had figured this
kind of a spear out when he was with his wife. The thoughts and
memories came flooding back and he realized that he had to do
something, and do it soon.
When all of the preparations were made he told the men to take
their hunting weapon with them and show him where the big one was to be
found. They all took their big sticks, with the rocks on the end, and
went to find the big one.
There was a path that led out of the village and continued toward
the back of the mountains. They had been travelling two days when they
heard the sound of the big one. It was a mighty roar, one that
frightened all of the men. Rangak had been taught the way to kill the
big one from his father and he looked for two trees that he could get
behind and hold his spear.
The men now realized that they had made strong spears, and were
ready to try them out. Rangak explained the plan. First they were all
to find trees like his. He told them this was important because the big
one could chase them to the tree but could not get through it and they
could place their spear through the big one. He told them that they had
to push the spear in as far as they could and that it had to be in an
eye or the soft area at the base of the big one's neck. If they only
hurt the animal he would be even more dangerous and they might be
killed.
Again they heard the sound of the large beast. This time Rangak
told them where to go and he went out alone to try and lure the animal
into the trap. It did not take long for the animal to see Rangak. First
it was curious about this little animal that also walked on it's hind
legs. He had come into his land and he had fought for many years
to keep his valley. He would get this animal and maybe have something
good to eat, he thought.
The big one chased Rangak, and this time Rangak thought that he
might not make it to the two trees. He could feel the hot breath of the
beast when he saw the trees. He put on one last burst of speed and got
his spear up into position as the animal came charging. As with his
father, Rangak held the spear in close to his body and as the animal
tried to get between the trees he thrust it as hard as he could through
the eye and deep into the head of the huge beast.
A mighty roar filled the little valley and the men thought that
Rangak had been killed. As they came out of their hiding places they
found the big one slowly rolling on the ground. Rangak took his knife
and cut the giant beasts throat. The beast lay still.
All of the men were impressed and were happy for they knew that
they no longer had to fear the trips through the mountains. Rangak
carefully cut some bark from some trees and set it on the ground with
the inside up.
He was careful not to hurt the trees and only took the bark from
the outside layer. The he cut the huge beast up being careful not to
hurt the skin. He cut the skin away from the legs leaving the fur legs
with a skinned body. He scraped the skin until all of the wet part was
cut lose. Then he slit the leg skins and did the same. He told the men
that these small pieces would be very important to them later.
After he had gathered all of the fur parts together he started to
cut up the meat. He gave some to each of the men to take to their
family, and kept a small amount for himself. While cutting the meat he
was careful to take out the long white cords. These the men saw were
like the ones that they had gotten from the little
animal with the big legs. Rangak was very careful with these cords. He
found some loose wood and wrapped the cords around them so that they
would not get tangled.
Just as he was ready to put his meat in the bark they heard
another one of the big beasts. Rangak turned to Elask, one of the men,
"Now it is your turn. Let's see if you can get this one. He will not
come to this tree for he will smell the death of that one." He pointed
to the dead remains.
Elask was one of the younger men who had followed Rangak. He had
just taken a wife and they were living with his family. He had made
plans to build his own hut. Elask talked to Toomgak about all of this
and Toomgak told him to ask Rangak to help him. He said, "Rangak was
the builder in our family. Don't you see what he is doing to build his
own hut. He can teach you all you will need to know." That very morning
Elask had asked Rangak for his help and Rangak told him to wait until
after the hunt and they would talk some more.

CHAPTER 9

Elask started toward the noise while the

rest, including Rangak followed at a distance. Suddenly from the side
nearest the mountain came the beast. It was much larger than the one
that Rangak had killed and the man was afraid that Elask would not be
able to kill the big one. Elask saw the size of the animal and had
also found where he would have two trees to make the animal come
through. He saw that as large as the animal was it would never get
through the trees.
After drawing the animal's attention Elask got another surprise.
The animal started toward him on all fours and was running much faster
than he was supposed to, according to Rangak. Elask turned and sprinted
to the trees with the giant beast gaining at every stride.
Suddenly, in front of him were the trees. To make sure that the
animal saw where he went he ran through the trees rather than around.
He turned and planted his spear. The animal charged the trees and threw
one giant leg through the opening, his claws raking Elask. The beast
backed up and charged again, this time without putting his giant front
leg through the opening.
With surprising speed Elask moved forward and at the same time
drove the spear through the folds of skin below the jaws. He pushed as
hard and as far as he had the strength to do so, and the great one fell
to the ground. All of the men cheered. Elask slumped to the ground.
He had been able to do this with the wounds dripping blood. The
others hurried over and one of them ran down to the river nearby and
brought water, in his pouch, to clean the wounds. They were not very
deep and Elask was glad of the attention he was getting. He knew that
the story of what he did would be always told around the tribal
campfire.
Following the advice of Rangak he cleaned the skin, stored the
meat, and wound the long cords as Rangak had. Everyone was in great
spirits. Even Rangak felt good. He had taught them to make a weapon
and to gather meat for food. He would next show them how to finish the
bow and to make the arrow to use to kill smaller game and fish. He had
promised Toomgak that he would never kill the great bird with the white
head.
There was still one part of the animal they had not gathered and
that was the bones. Rangak carried his to the river and cleaned them
and told Elask to do the same. When Elask asked him why he said,
"There are many things that can be made with these and when we get back
I will show you what to do with them."
When everyone returned to the village there was much celebrating.
All but Toomgak, who realizes his animal friends were no longer safe.
He decided that he would talk to all of them after a few days and hope
that they would listen.
The next morning Rangak called Elask over to him and asked him to
help work on the hut. Elask was as curious as the rest about this hut
which
was different than anything anyone had ever seen.
First Rangak said to the young man, "Bring me the large skin that
you got. The young man was saddened by this for he had thought that it
would be his to use to cover he and his wife when it rained and the
soft snow fell from the sky. Still he did as he was told. He was then
told to bring the large bones of the beast. This he also did, though he
was now more than a little angry since he had been the one to kill the
beast. Rangak climbed up to the top of the frame and had Elask
pass him up eight of the rib bones. These he fashioned into a circle,
taking one of the leg skins and lashing it to the circle, piercing the
skin with each of the ribs and tying them where they met the skin.
 Elask marveled at this sight for he had never seen any one do
what Rangak was doing. He still did not understand why he used his
material and not his own.
Next Rangak told Elask to climb up the back side with the skin
rolled up. This Elask did and when he got to the top Rangak told him to
spread the skin, with the fur on the outside over as much of the top as
he could, working it down and tying it at each brace in the frame.
While Elask was doing this Rangak went and got his skin and set it
where the other skin stopped, overlapping it so that there could be no
leak.
All of this only covered about a fourth of the hut. Rangak said
to Elask, "We will go tomorrow and try to get some more. The days are
starting to grow shorter and soon the dark god will be with us for a
long time. We must finish my hut before there are three more periods."
Elask turning to him said, Why your hut? I have killed the beast
and done the cleaning and carried the parts home. I was the one who
will have the scars with me for the rest of my life."
Rangak listened to all of this and then said, " We will leave at
first light tomorrow and let us hope that we can get what we need to
finish. Bring two spears with you." With that

Rangak turned and went to find Toomgak.

The next day the two headed out along the same trail but at the
end of the first day they turned at a narrow spot in the river and
crossed to the other side. "All of the smells will be fresh and maybe
the big ones will be here as well." Rangak said. They had only traveled
a short distance when they heard the now familiar sound of the giant
animal. As they moved closer they saw three of the animals picking over
some fish they had gotten from the river. Suddenly one looked up and
sniffed at the wind. Making a low growl it shuffled slowly their way.
Both of the men looked quickly for the trees and soon they found
what they needed. Rangak went first and as the animal caught his scent
he stood up looking every bit as tall as some of the trees. Rangak made
some movement to attract the giant and it came forward at a run. Rangak
ran between the trees and set himself to kill the animal.

This time the unexpected happened! As the beast came at him it

pushed one of the trees down! Rangak was both stunned and frightened.
He yelled for Elask to find a safe place as he ran behind a much bigger
tree. The animal charged but Rangak moved quickly still looking for
another forked tree. Without warning he tripped over a root and fell to
the ground. The huge animal seeing him down charged at him. Rangak
raised his spear, planting it's butt firmly on the ground. The animal
lunged forward and Rangak guided the spear to the animal's soft throat.
The animal fell on the spear and it's force pushed the spear through
the flesh at the back of the head. The dying beast fell on Rangak
forcing the air out of his lungs.
Elask came running and tried to roll the huge animal off of
Rangak. When he couldn't he thought about what to do.
Suddenly he had an idea. He called to Rangak but got no answer.
Was he dead? Why doesn't he answer? Elask thought about what to do and
he
came to a decision. Following what he was taught by Rangak; cutting the
animals skin off from the top he decided to see if cutting off the legs
would take off enough weight so that he could move it off of Rangak.
 He heard a muffled cry from under the animal and called to Rangak
to stay still and then cut off the beast's legs. He called to Rangak to
push to his knife side as he pushed the animal off the downed man.
Rangak sat up and went down to the river and washed himself off
so that he would not have the scent on him as they went after some more
of the animals. Also he needed to rest and let the energy flow back
into his body. It did not take the beasts long to find the two men.
Both men quickly found trees and went about their work. The two men
set about to do the cutting and cleaning up and the wrapping of the
meat and the skins.
Rangak sent Elask back to the village to get some help in
carrying everything back to the huts. The people would eat good during
the dark time. Elask wasted no time and was back within two days.
While he was gone Rangak quickly got another of the animal's,
cleaned it and tied all of the skins together. Then he tied the bones
and wound the cords that were left.
He sat down and soon was lost in thought. What was he going to
do? Where was he going? Why was he going anywhere? Soon he fell
asleep. Again the dream and again the huge mountain with it's top
through the clouds. Again the beautiful girl with hair of red and gold.
When he awoke he knew what he had to do.
Elask and three others returned and they made their way back to
the village. The next day Elask again was called to help Rangak. This
time he did it with no complaints. The other man was teaching him more
than he could ever learn by himself.
After they had finished there was still a space that was not
covered. Rangak smiled to himself. All was like he had planned. Quickly
he
lashed a frame together slightly bigger than the opening. When it was
finished he laced the top into skin above the opening. He loosely tied
one of the leg bones to the bottom of the flap which was about six
inches below the hole. Then he took the skins of the smaller animals
that they had killed with their new arrows. When it was done he pulled
the loose bone in and rested it against the wall. The flap was closed.
Next he did the same thing, making a frame out of ribs for the
front door. For a covering, again he used the skins of the little ones
and fashioned it so that it could be tied down from the inside. After
it was done Rangak asked Toomgak and Elask to come into the hut so that
they could see what he had been up to on the inside.
When they came in it was dark except for the candlefish burning
in the middle of the room on some kind of a stand. Around it were
smaller stands. Rangak laughed at their faces and then and went over
and braced the covering over the open space so that the light and the
air came in to cool them.
He showed them his idea about the roof. He took hold of the ribs
that hung down and soon pushed them up so that the smoke rose and went
out through the opening. Rangak said, "This is a way to let the smoke
out of the hut when the dark times are here. The skins will keep the
cold and rain out as well as the snow. The heat will stay in so that a
person will be able to stay warm when the white powder falls from the
sky. To keep the food cold I have dug a hole out next to the door that
closes in the hut. The hole has a stick next to it to push the white
powder off the covering."
Then he showed them his newest idea. The candle-fish was on a
long piece of wood and around it there were smaller planks of wood
lashed together with the animal cord. Rangak sat on one of the wooden
pieces and showed them how they were set in a flat side with the ribs
also lashed in such a way to form a basket. All they had to do was take
the flat piece of tree and put it on the basket of ribs.
The other two men turned their attention to a strange object in
the far corner of the hut. The huge leg bones had been tied together
much like the piece where the candle fish rested. Tied tightly to the
eight legs were skins. Rangak went over to the object and sat on it
and then he lay down so that they could see how it was used. "This
keeps me off of the ground and I am always dry.", he said. On the
other side of the room, near the covered opening was his fire pit. He
had his wood stacked dry on the inside. The fire pit was lined with
rocks from the river. Rangak explained that the rocks kept the pit warm
and he would not need as much wood to keep a his food hot.
Over the next few days all of the village came to see Rangak's
hut, and they marveled at this man's work. Toomgak knew that they would
soon ask him to let Rangak be their leader. He would have to say "yes."
Rangak again had his dream. Now it was
clearer and came almost every night and stayed with him most of the
day. He had to make several decisions. He knew that they wanted him to
be their leader and after the dark time, which was with them now, they
would ask. He was confused for he knew that Toomgak would do what was
right for the people. He also knew that his ways were not the same as
his brother. He would have to take time to think this through before he
could make any decision.
When he awoke after a restless sleep he knew what that decision
would be. He had to find the mountain. He was a dreamer but also a
person of great belief. Was the mountain a god or was it a spirit
calling to him to come.

CHAPTER 10

Karlek never tired of hearing the stories of his grandfather,

Rangak. He wanted to be like him more than anyone else in the world.
Perhaps because he had heard the story of grandfather's dream. He had
the same dream when he was a small boy. He never told anyone about the
dream because the villagers would laugh at him and call him "liar."
They always teased him. The light hair of his grandmother was his also
and this made him stand out with the dark skin and black hair of the
rest of the village.
He remembered the story of how grandfather came through the high
mountains and across the big river that was next to their village.
Grandfather was sick from the travelling in the cold dark days.
It was told that he had been found by strangers who were going down
river, back from where he had come. When they came to this spot there
were a few families that had come earlier by dugout canoe and had
settled in, starting a village. Here they left Rangak.
He heard the story of how there was one woman in the village that
had very light hair and that Rangak knew when he saw her that she was
the woman in the dreams. She was gentle and warm and nursed him back to
health. After he was well they lived together, and in the custom of the
tribe he was taught to make a totem for his ancestors and hers.
One of the first things grandfather did was to make a fine place
to live. Karlek and his parents lived in the last house that
grandfather made. They still had his tables and chairs. These were
things that the white eyes had marvelled over when they first came to
the village, to trade with the men of the village. The traders told
them that there were chairs and tables made of wood in the homes of all
of the white people.
These men were different than any the villagers had ever seen.
They were much bigger

than the people of the village, and they had heavy fur on their faces.
Their skin was much lighter than that of the villager's, which pleased
Karlek and drew him closer to them. They did not seem to be fighters,
like the tribes to the East. They had funny musical things that had
strings and they sang and danced for long periods when it was dark and
all they had was a fire. They wore clothing different from the
people of the village; clothes of heavy cloth. When they walked in the
snow they had round things on their feet that helped them to stay on
top of the soft powder, much like the ones of his tribe. The men had
stayed for most of the period of the light god. During this time they
traded with the villagers especially with Natchusek, who had many furs
and skins that he had made into coats and foot coverings. While they
were there some of the tribe learned their language as did the
outsiders learn the language of his people. Karlek learned quickly.
Soon the traders had gathered the skins

and were ready to leave. Thanking the villagers they told them they
would return when the light came back,in what they called a year. This
was a period of time they used. The village started to use it as well
as a few of the words of the white people.
A year had gone by and in the late spring the men came back. This
time Karlek tried to find a way to learn what they wrote and more of
their language. His parents were proud for this would show everyone
that Karlek was more than different; he would be looked on as a leader.
Many of the young men in the village also realized this as well and
they made secret plans to get the strangers to take Karlek with them
when they left. Karlek, often spent hours looking at the distant range
of mountains that could be seen to the southeast. On certain days he
thought he could see the giant mountain that had appeared in his dream.
The same mountain that his grandfather had told Karlek's father and
mother

about many times before he had died.

Rangak's woman also would tell how they had left the village and
tried to find the mountain but were never able to go far because of the
driving winds and snows.
Karlek was very good with his hands and had made a new style
dugout shortly before his fifteenth birthday. The craft was much wider
than the others in the village and rode higher on the water. It could
carry more furs and food than the others. He would sit lower in the
little boat and used a longer paddle that pushed the boat through the
rapids and streams much faster than the older boats.
He would spend long hours in the forests across the river looking
for the giant bird that he had only seen once, when he was about eight.
The bird was like the one that his grandfather had told his father
about and his father had passed down the story to him.
He remembered that the giant bird was

black with a beak that was the color of the sun, a white tail that
fanned out and a white head down to it's neck. He remembered that the
bird had swooped low before him, it's wings fanning him as it flew off
into the trees on the other side of the river. The bird had never been
seen again and many had forgotten that it was ever at the village.
Karlek did not. He was sure that this was the bird that had guided his
grandfather through the mountains to the west and north.
The boy thought that he would find a way to get to the mountain
and to stand at it's base as his grandfather and his father had wanted
to for so many years.
The boy had spent much time around the visitors to their village,
trying to learn their ways and customs. One of the men, Leonid, had
taken an interest in Karlek and started to teach him how to write and
helped him with the words. Karlek could now talk easily with the
strangers and many times he would act as the go between with the
villagers and the outsiders.
Liamuk and Natchusek knew what Karlek wanted and they felt for
him as they saw him being pulled in two directions; one the old ways of
the village and the other, the ways of the outsiders. How often the
boy had thought of talking to his friend Leonid about going with him
back to his village. He knew that if he did go he would probably never
return. As he lay on his bed thinking about this, he fell asleep.
The mountain was clear. It towered over the land and was consumed
by the clouds and then rose above them to reach toward the sky. The
land at the bottom was green, waterfalls jettisoned from the sides of
the great mountain, below the clouds, crashing on the rocks and falling
into a lake. He could see the ones with the great horns on their head
and the big brown one that stood on it's back legs. He saw the great
bird with it's wings glistening in the bright light that shown down
from the lofty peaks. The mountain towered over the other peaks and
seemed to look down on

the land as if it were the ruler of all it saw.

At the base of the mountain there was a girl. She had light color
hair, bright like the sun, with red like a sunset. Her eyes sparkled
and there was a glow about her much like the bright lights that
appeared in the sky once in a great while during the dark times. Next
to the woman was a man but he could not see what he looked like. He
only knew that the man had light hair.
Karlek woke from the dream with a start. What was this dream?
Had he dreamt the same dream that his grandfather had so many times?
More than that there seemed to be a meaning in the dream that he had to
understand.
Karlek talked to his family about the dream and he also told
Leonid. To his surprise Leonid told him that there was such a mountain
and that he had been near it many times when they went on the hunt and
came to their village. Using dogs Leonid told him they pull a sled
similar to the one that Leonid used in Mother Russia, they were able to
get to the mountain from their village in about three days.
Karlek was excited when he heard all of this and ran to tell his
father. Natchusek listened to the story his son told him, then called a
meeting of the men of the village. He also asked Leonid and some of the
other traders to come, along with Karlek.
For Karlek this was more than a surprise. None of the boys could
come to the meetings. They first had to reach their eighteenth year
and go through the tribal rites. The others also wondered why this boy
was brought before them and told to sit with them. Natchusek told them
that this was no ordinary meeting. He reminded them of the story that
Rangak told of his dream. Most of them, who were older, remembered the
story of his grandfather. Still they were puzzled about why it came up
at this meeting and again why the boy and the traders were here.
Natchusek told Karlek to tell of the dream

he had two nights ago. After Karlek told the men, Leonid stood before
the group. "What you have just heard about the mountain is true," he
said. "It is the way that Karlek has described it. We passed it on the
way here and we will pass it on the way back. This is not a dream. It
is a sign that you had better study," Leonid said. "Karlek has the
special gift that we do not have and he should be able to use it. But
first he must go to the mountain," said Leonid.
There were murmurs among the tribal men and finally his father
told him to leave the meeting and go home.
It was a clear night and Karlek walked toward his home wondering
if he would ever be able to see either the great bird or the mighty
mountain. What about the girl, he wondered. Was this the girl that was
his grandmother, or was this someone that was meant for him? His mind
brought back the dream as he walked slowly in the faded light that was
the only darkness at this time of the year.
Suddenly from the air above he heard a shrill cry, and there in
the dim light he saw the giant bird. The men in the meeting heard it
also and ran out of the meeting hut to see what it was that made such a
noise. There it was just as Karlek, and his grandfather had spoke
about. The bird came closer to the village and then, as if it were
expected, it flew down next to Karlek and landed at his feet.
Everyone was dumfounded. Here was the proof that the men of the
village needed to make their decision.
Still the bird had not moved and Karlek went to touch it's silky
wings. A cry went up from Karlek's mother as she saw what he was going
to do. She was afraid that the bird would attack and hurt the boy,
maybe kill him. The bird ruffled his feathers but did not move, except
to turn and stare into the boy's face. Then without a cry the bird
lifted himself off of the ground, circled the village once and came
back fanning the boy with his wings, just as in the dream, and flew off
across the river and into the forest.
The village was astounded. All of the boys ran to Karlek, who now
was their new found hero. No more teasing or calling of names. This
was one of them that the bird came to; not one of the adults.
The men of the village murmured among themselves as they returned
to the meeting. There were decisions that had to made, and conditions
that had to be put on Karlek. They knew that he had to leave and find
the mountain. He had to search the world that they had not seen; but
they wanted him to come back and tell them what he found.
The conditions were set and the next day Karlek was again brought
back to the tribal council to hear the words of the leaders.
Natchusek told Liamuk about the meeting both before the coming of
the bird and after. He knew she would be like him, both happy and sad.
They were about to see their son leave before his time, for he had not
yet passed the rites of
manhood, yet he was going to do things that no others, from their
village, had ever done. He would come back because of the orders of the
tribal leaders--but when.
The rules were clear. He could go and live with Leonid and his
family. He could try and find the mountain and stand at it's foot. He
must try and find the girl and bring her back to their village. He must
learn all that he can of the ways of the others so that he would be
able to take his place as a leader and be able to speak for them in
matters that were the ways of the outsiders. He must always be good for
he represented the village and his family. He should always remember
his roots. The stories of the old ones. The stories of the totem poles.
There was much to be done before Leonid and his people would
leave. More furs were gathered and the trading started to wind down for
the year as the white powder again fell.
Liamuk made more pants and shirts for him.
His father made an extra set of the round shoes they wore under their
leggings when they walked in the deep snows. Karlek made himself
another set of leggings and also made two more knives out of the bone
of the big one. One was for him and the other was safely stored in his
pack, both for safety and for a gift.
For the rest of the time before they were to leave, the boy was
busy with all of his new friends. He now knew he was special, very
special. The older girls looked at him shyly and blushed when he looked
back at them. The boys played their games but he was always the one to
say what game and he was always the leader, the one to turn to for
advice.
The men of the village met frequently with the traders and
Karlek. The rules were repeated over and over.
One day while the sun still stayed out for most of the day,
though it was now showing less and less, Karlek got into his dugout
canoe,

taking some food with him he went to the forests on the other side of
the river. He had decided that he would try and find the great bird. He
also felt the nearness of his grandfather and he wanted to walk some of
the lands that the older one had taken on his way to this land.
 CHAPTER 11
The first snows of the late summer came and the traders were
ready to leave for their village. Karlek was both happy and sad. He
looked forward to the great adventure. He knew that when he found the
mountain he would be able to come back to the village. He also knew
that when he found the mountain that there would be other sights and
tasks for him. New adventures would come his way. He remembered his
obligations to the men of his village and as he said his goodby's he
reminded them that he would return with the traders, next summer. When
he said this there was a lump in his throat and he suddenly felt a cold
chill come across his back. For the first time he felt fear.
The next morning dawned with a sullen look. The skies were grey
and there was no sun. After travelling for several hours it started to
rain. It was a cold rain and blew across the little hunting party.
They knew that the winter was approaching and that they had to move
quickly, for they did not bring clothes for the severe cold.
For three days they moved at a steady pace, wondering if Karlek
could stay with them, and they were pleased with his stamina. Leonid
was proud of the boy. He had always wanted a son, but instead he was
the father of Ivanya, a beautiful young girl who looked a great deal
like her mother, tall and thin, with long raven black hair. Her skin
was soft and clear. Her body had started to shape itself into that of a
woman. Leonid had given much thought about the problem of the two
young people being thrown together in a small area. He had always had
hot blood in his veins and knew from his own past what could happen.
On the fourth day there was a break in the weather and the sun
showed briefly. Leonid turned to Karlek and said, "Keep an eye to the
east side of the trail and watch carefully through the clouds."
Karlek did not know what to make of this
statement, and then he recalled what Leonid had told him of seeing the
mountain on the trips to his village.
As they moved forward he failed to watch the trail and suddenly
he felt himself slipping down the side of the narrow trail. The trail
had turned abruptly and he had missed the turn. All of the men laughed
at him, and he also laughed for he knew that if he could laugh at his
mistakes others would not take him too seriously.
As the clouds broke in front and to the right hand side of
Karlek. He stopped. There it was! Just as he had seen in his dreams, a
mountain that towered over everything. Karlek gasped at it's sight. He
could see the craggy top glistening in the sun. The clouds seemed to
gather around it like smoke rising from a fire. He wished he could see
the entire mountain but the haze and the clouds covered the ground
around the mountain and it was surrounded by other mountains, though
not as tall.
Karlek turned to Leonid and said, "What do they call the
mountain?" "It has no name," said Leonid. "We have never been able to
name it. Perhaps you can think of what to call `your' mountain." Leonid
added, "Some of our people who have seen the mountain have called it,
BOLSHAIA GORA, the big mountain."
After stopping for their noon meal the group continued on hoping
to cover as much distance as possible before the darkness set in. The
air had turned cold and the soft white flakes had started to fall once
again. Karlek was trying to figure out what he could call this mountain
that would help to describe it to his tribe. This would take some time
and he was too tired to think. The sight of the mountain had simply
wore him out. What he wanted now was to sleep.
 Leonid saw that the boy was starting to tire and he proposed that
they camp at a small lake near the trail. After they had set up their
ground covers, Leonid took Karlek over to the lake and the two of them
started to fish for their dinner.
Karlek had brought his home made bone hooks
and the line that was made from the strings of the great brown animal.
He dug in the dirt with his knife and soon had some large black worms,
which he placed on the hooks and let the float out into the water.
Leonid had never seen this way of catching fish and he watched, with
interest, his young friend go about his fishing. It did not take
long. The water erupted in a giant swirl. A long silver fish jumped
into the air, twisting, trying to get the little hook out of it's
mouth. The fish crashed to the water, it's tail sending up a shower of
water. Karlek pulled the cord back toward him, wrapping it around a
short stick so that it would not get tangled on the ground.
Soon the fish seemed to tire and the boy brought the fish close
to the lake's shoreline. Leonid quickly grabbed the squirming fish and
put it in his pouch. He would have to tell the others of Karlek's way
of catching dinner. Soon Karlek had enough fish for all of them. Leonid
would grab them as quickly as the boy could catch them. After the
meal Leonid told the men how the boy had caught the fish. The men were
impressed with Karlek's skill and one of the group gave him one of the
fur hats they all wore. The young man felt both happy and strange. It
was as though he had passed from being a child to becoming a man. He
knew that more would be expected of him now and he was confused.
It was three more days before the little party reached their
homes. The cold had started to come on and the days were growing
shorter. The snow falling as they saw the fire lights of the town.
The towns people saw them coming and the families of the men
rushed to greet them and see what they had brought back. As the party
of traders and their new friend reached the village, families ran to
each other and huddled together sharing smiles, tears, hugs and
handshakes.
Karlek felt the sadness that goes with
loneliness. He now wondered if he should have made this journey. He was
not one of them and already he missed his family. What was in his
future?
Leonid quickly brought his family over to where Karlek was
standing. "Karlek," he said, "this is my wife, Kathrine, and my
daughter, Ivanya." Both of them looked at this fair haired boy with
the dark skin. "I am glad to know you," said Karlek, speaking the words
he had learned from Leonid. The mother and daughter were delighted that
he could speak their language. "We must go to the dacha and have
Karlek taste our food," Kathrine said. "You will both be surprised at
what I have cooked." Leading the way, Leonid was happy for he could
see that the boy liked his wife. He still did not know how his daughter
felt for she had not said anything.
Ivanya was just coming to the age when other boys and men would
start to notice her. She had long black hair that shined in the light.
Her teeth were as bright as the powder that fell from the sky. She was
not as dark as the girls of his village. Ivanya was tall for her age
and it was obvious that she would be taller than most of the women at
their home. She was already pretty, and she moved with the grace of an
animal. Her face was not as rounded as the rest of the people here or
in his village. Her supple body showed strength. Karlek had not ever
seen a girl like this and it stirred something in him.
 As they entered the small cottage, Karlek
could smell the food and laughed. Leonid laughed with him. The treat
was FISH. As they sat down, Leonid told them the story of how Karlek
taught all of them how to catch fish a new and easier way.
This was different kind of fish than the boy had ever eaten. He
asked, "What does this fish look like?" Ivanya spoke up for the first
time and told him of the big red fish and it's cousin the silver fish.
Leonid told him that the fish came when the weather started to warm up
and the

days became long. "When the time comes after the dark days I will take
you and we will see if your hooks will work on these monsters." he said
as a laugh grew in his belly and showed in his eyes.
After they finished eating it was dark and the family had little
light except for the fire. Karlek remembered how his family would
take the fat from the big animals and melt it to make light in a bowl.
He asked Leonid if he had any of the big animals around. Leonid said
they would get some the next day; but for now they had all better get
some sleep. With that he went to one part of the room with Kathrine.
Ivanya laughed and told him that they would sleep near the fire
for they did not have the great robes that covered her parents. All of
this was strange to Karlek, but he was tired and tomorrow he could ask
all of his questions. For now it was to sleep and to dream.
Karlek was up now having been awakened by the smell of some new
kind of food. When he asked
what the smell was he was told that this was a
food that they ate every morning. It was warm and tasted good with the
sweet powder that was on the table. He saw how they all put the powder
on and smiled when they tasted the substance.
Feeling a part of the family and not just an outsider anymore, he
asked all of the questions that he could think of. So many, in fact,
that they all started to laugh at his questioning ways.
Kathrine saw that he did not understand their laughter as well as
some of their words. She said to him, "Karlek, we are not laughing at
you. I have never met someone who wanted to know so much so quickly.
When you go to school in a few days you will learn much." "What is
school? asked Karlek. "It's a place where all of the boys and some of
the girls go to learn to read and write and use numbers." Ivanya said.
Karlek was now worried. He did not know how to read their words,
and had never written anything but sign pictures in the dirt. What were
numbers? He knew that he was going to have to work hard so that he
would make them proud of him, as if they were his own parents.
As soon as the meal was done they all dressed in warm clothes and
got ready to leave.
"Where are we going?" asked the boy. He did not have the heavy pull
over thing that Leonid put on. It looked warm and it felt soft. The
only clothes he had were the ones he brought with him. It was all that
he owned. He suddenly felt different again. He was an outsider and he
remembered how the people in the village felt when others came down the
river and stopped but could not talk to them for they did not know the
language.
A sadness came over him and Ivanya saw it at once. "Karlek," she
said, "one day out of every seven we do no work. On this day we go to
pray to our God. Do you pray to God?" Karlek smiled and said that his
people pray to many gods. He was surprised to learn that they prayed to
only one God and the God's son and the son's mother Marushka. This he
did not understand, but then most of their ways, he thought, were a
little strange.
It was time to go to the big place where the villagers met. There
was much smiling at Karlek as they entered the building, which was
something like the council room of his tribe. At the front of the room
was a table that was too high to sit at and eat. The table was covered
with red material with bright yellow lines down each side. It was
bound at the ends and had some kind of writing on the front of the
cloth. There was a man dressed in bright colors who wore a funny hat.
The man was swinging a little bowl on a string that cradled it like the
bowls that he had back at his own home. This was the way that they
carried the light during the dark days. There was some smoke coming
from the bowl and a new smell, unlike anything he had ever smelled
before. The man said words that Karlek didn't understand. At different
times all of the people would say words that had no meaning to the boy
and he felt as if he was lost in the middle of a forest that had no
paths.
Soon everyone sat down on the log benches. The men and the older
boys sat in the front and
the women and the girls along with the small children sat in the back.
Karlek was surprised to learn that they did this on the same day each
week. No one worked that day, except for cooking. After the man, who he
found out was the spiritual head of the village, had read from a big
book they all sang a song and left.
Karlek had never seen a book and after most of the people had
left Leonid took him up to the front to show him the book. It was
filled with characters that he could not understand and this made him
feel more uncomfortable.
That night Ivanya brought out a school book that she had used
when she was learning to read. "We have been here for seven of the
long winters. I was nine years old when we came to this place." said
the girl. I know how you must feel because I was homesick for my
friends and places that I knew." she said. Karlek nodded in agreement
and then asked her where they were. "Our people call it Knik. It is
named for one of the little animals back where we came from." Ivanya
said.
Their talk turned to the book and how he was going to read. "You
will probably start with the small boys and then as you learn you will
move up. I am in the last class." the girl said. "I will help you at
home so that you can go faster" They started to work on the reading but
the light was so bad they could not see. "Tomorrow I will make us
something to see with" he said. We can make better lights and I want to
read quickly." Karlek said with a smile.
The next day brought little light and Karlek and Leonid went to
where they kept the meat for the winter. Karlek found what he wanted.
There was one of the big brown animals that were so dangerous back at
his village.
He smiled for when the sun god started to stay longer he would
show them his tricks with the light spears that they had laughed about;
but this was not the time. Karlek cut off a great bit of the white oily
meat around the red meat. When they got back to the house Karlek got a
big pot and put the oily meat inside. Soon the meat started to boil and
became a liquid, and with it came a smell of the trees. Karlek had put
some fresh bark in the pot with the other meat. After it had boiled for
a short while he took it off of the fire and out to the snow that was
on the ground.
He set the pot down and covered the sides with the snow to cool
the pot. In a few minutes he took a small pot and put a dried piece of
bark fiber in the middle. As he held the fiber up he poured some of the
liquid into the pot. After a short time he covered the top with the
cold snow. As it cooled it melted on top of the liquid that was already
starting to harden. After letting it harden, he turned the pot over and
let the soft white powder fall out. The oil had hardened. Karlek took
the little pot into the house and there he put some of the fire to the
piece of bark. The fibers burst into flame and then started to burn at
a steady pace giving off light around it. The family could not believe
what they were seeing. What a clever young man thought Catherine, and
she looked at her daughter. We will see, she thought.
The next day Karlek told Leonid that he was going to look for
some special wood. When he returned with fresh green wood everyone
gathered around to see what he was going to do with the large branches.
He soon had the wood set in three piles. By this time it was dark and
they would have to wait until the next day to see what he was going to
do.
When the next day came he was up and ready to start his little
task. Ivanya looked over at him and said, "Today we are going to start
school. It is time for you to join us." Without
saying anything else she put on her clothes and told Karlek that they
would eat and then go to the school house.
Shortly after their meal they went to the large building where
all of the people had gathered on the day of no work.
Seated in front, facing the benches was the man who had led the
meeting. He welcomed Karlek and had each of the young people tell him
their name. He was asked to tell about his home, family and why he had
come to their village. Karlek was glad, now, that he had learned as
much of their language as he did for this made them feel that he cared
for them.
He told them of the village and the river that ran next to it. He
told them of the forest where the great bird lived. He told of his
parents and his grandfather. He did not tell them of his dream. Leonid
told him that it would be better if the people did not know what he was
looking for and why.
The leader told Karlek where to sit so that
he would be with others more his size. Next to him sat a boy that was
about the same age. He was bigger than Karlek and his eyes seemed to
always be laughing. "I'm Nicholi," the boy said. "What do you do at
your village when the darkness comes?" asked Nicholi. Karlek answered,
"The dark does not always bother us and many of us go out and play when
the wind has gone. Some of the men go hunting for the little animal
with the big feet. It is white and very good to eat and to make
pouches." he said. " Most of the time we listen to the stories of our
people who came before. We learn much from these stories."
The other boy laughed and said to Karlek, "Here you will find
that this is the time when they send us to school. The little ones go
to school all year long, except for the great feast of light. The older
girls help their mothers and the old people of the village that can no
longer get their own food. I am a hunter. I am the best of the boys and
so they do what I tell them."
Karlek said to the boy, "why are you in the same part of the
school that I am in, if you are so smart." Nicholi stood up quickly and
grabbed Karlek by his new covering, made by Kathrine.
 As he was about to hit Karlek he saw him pull out the little bone
knife with the funny handle that had pictures of animals and fish on
its front and back. The knife did not look like it could hurt anyone
but he did not know what to do. He knew if he backed down he would no
longer be the leader of the older boys. The girls, especially Ivanya,
would laugh at him and he would become very lonely.
He dropped the front of the garment and said loudly, "I bet you
can"t even cut a piece of wood with that little thing."
Karlek knew that he had to let the other boy keep his pride. His
father had told him, many times, "If you always let the other person
have a way out he will show you his thanks when you least expect it.
This is how you make a friend of one who has no friends."
Karlek turned to the other and said that he was probably right.
The other boy could do nothing but look at this new one who was smart
enough to make him look bad in front of everyone.
The rest of the day was much harder for the newcomer. He had a
great deal of trouble keeping up with the words in the book and the
others laughed at the way he said the words. It was not to make him
feel bad, because they all liked him, since he had stood up to Nicholi.
There was much kidding and imitating his attempts to read. Karlek
joined in the laughter. Their teacher saw this and was much relieved
that this native would at least try to learn their ways. Perhaps he
could learn enough to become civilized.

CHAPTER 12
At the end of thirty days he had learned enough to start reading
the history of the people of this village. This was a new and exciting
time for him. He had never known others outside of his village. He
remembered the stories that his father had told him of grandfathers
seeing the big ships and the men who came from those ships. He
wondered if these were the same tribe that his grandfather had seen.
Each night after he had eaten he went to his pile of wood and
started to carve little bowls. The difference in these bowls was that
they were very small at the top and were rounded in the body so that
they sat flat on the table. After they were cleaned out he made several
small holes in a close set pattern around the bowl in two lines. The
first line was at the top of the large rounded part and the second line
was nearer the neck of the bowl. At the top of each bowl he had

a small hole on each side. He put a piece of the wicking material in

each bowl. He had tied a small pebble to the wick so that it hung
straight down. He put a small twig, with the wick tied to it, across
the bowl and then poured the hot fat into the bowl, coming up to the
first set of holes. He was careful to make sure that the holes were not
covered.
After he had made several of the bowls he had found the large
piece of wood that he was saving for the last bowl. This he made in the
same way and when all were done he called the family to the table.
They had been watching for many days and were curious about what
was being done. He told Ivanya to get a lighting stick that they used
to start fires. When she brought it to him he carefully lit the wick
and they saw light coming from the holes in the bowl. He lit the wick
in the big bowl and they were surprised to see how much light it gave
off in the room.
Karlek was proud of what he had done and he

could see that they were pleased. He told them that they would not have
to use torches, which could start fires in the room. Now each one had
their own light so that they could move about when it was dark and not
cause the others to wake up.
He also told them that the little lights
could be carried with them when they went to visit another and again no
torch would have to be used. After each one got their light and they
put all of them on the table the room was lighter than it had ever
been.
There were two lights left and the next day he took them to
school and gave one to the teacher and one to Nicholi. The teacher
smiled and thanked the boy. Nicholi had heard about the lights from
Ivanya, who told everyone about this wonderful new thing that made the
room like the day. He did not understand why Karlek would give him one
of these precious lights after the way that he had treated the
newcomer. Karlek had

passed ahead of Nicholi in school and this made Nicholi even more
bitter toward the young man who Ivanya seemed to like.
Karlek knew what he was doing. He knew that the boy was not very
well liked by anyone and that he had no friends. Most of the people
their age had made friends easily with Karlek.
One day after school was over he called to Nicholi, "Let me show
you how we can make some of these to trade for furs." Nicholi was
confused, as usual. On one hand he knew that no one liked him, but he
was worried that all of the others would take his leadership away from
him by turning to this stranger.
Karlek knew what was going on in the other boys mind. After all
didn't he go through the same thing when he was back home and everyone
teased him and said that he was different. After the big bird came it
was different; then he was the leader. Now he knew that the other boy
had to be the leader but he could help him and make him a friend, a
valuable friend.
Karlek said, "If others come here to trade we could start our own
trading business and make some money, and get things that will help us
to be on our own." Nicholi thought for a few moments. He knew that this
was a good idea and was angry because he did not think to do this
himself. He also knew that this was a chance for him to not always be
the dumb one in the village. He said to Karlek, "What do you
want me to do, and how will we split the profits?" Karlek quickly said,
"You will help me make the lights and we will trade them to the
villagers. Do others come to th 4343 4343 4343 4343 4343 4343 4343 4343
4343
4343
4343
4444
4444
 4545¤ 4545 4545 4545 4545 4545µ 4545§ 4545 4545 4545 4545 4545 4545
4545 4545 4545- 4545 4545 4545! 4545" 4545# 4545$ 4545% 4545& 4545'
4545( 4545) 4545* 4545+ 4545, 4545- 4545. 4545/ 45450 45451 45452 45453
45454 45455 45456 45457 45458 45459 4545: 4545; 4545< 4545= 4545> 4545?
4545@ 4545A 4545B 4545C 4545D 4545E 4545F 4545G 4545H 4545I 4545J 4545K
4545L 4545M 4545N 4545O 4545P 4545Q 4545R 4545S 4545T 4545U 4545V 4545W
4545X 4545Y 4545Z 4545[ 4545\ 4545] 4545^ 4545_ 4545` 4545a 4545b 4545c
4545d 4545e 4545f 4545g 4545h 4545i 4545j 4545k 4545l 4545m 4545n 4545o
4545p 4545q 4545r 4545s 4545t 4545u 4545v 4545w 4545x 4545y 4545z 4545{
4545| 4545~ 4545ýÿÿÿ 4545€ 4545e village?" Nicholi told him that they
were near the open sea and that down from the lake there was a trail
that led to the open waters. "This is where our people came when they
came to settle the land. When the long days come you will be able to
see the ocean. Once in a while there are some ships that come here to
trade bringing foods and goods. Many people know that we are here in
this land." said Nicholi.
Karlek was silent thinking about all of this and how he could put it to
use.
Suddenly he remembered the great bird and the words of the
council. He knew that he would have to go back when the year was over
and the long days had come.
He also thought of the mountain. He knew what he would call it
now. His people had a word. It was DENALI, the "high one."
Karlek asked Nicholi what did they call this land. Nicholi
answered, "Our people call it, "ALAYEKSHA." This is a word that some
tribes from the place where are grandfathers landed many years ago gave
to us. They had landed to the north of us and on the coast with a nice
bay. We have heard the story of how they landed and tried to make
friends with the people in a village. Our people left and headed out to
sea and there was a great wave that picked up their ship and tossed it
away from the village. When the storm stopped the ships went. There was
no more village. Everything had been swept out to the open sea"
Somehow Karlek remembered he had heard part of this story before
but he could not remember when or where. Perhaps he had heard the story
from the other tribes that went back and forth on the river at his
village. Maybe he had heard the story from Leonid. The story tugged at
him and he made up his mind to find out where he had heard it and why
it seemed to mean so much to him. Karlek and Nicholi agreed
that they would split the everything they got after the trading was
done. Nicholi would keep the profits until it was time for Karlek to
return to his people.
For some reason going back bothered Karlek for he felt happy and
loved in this village. How strange it was for him to know that he was
wanted in both villages and that he was going to have to make a choice
soon. But there was no choice for he had given his word to his parents
and the leaders of the village. He also knew that on the way back he
would go to the mountain and something would happen to him while he was
at "Denali."
For now there was much to do each day. He had all of the usual
chores and schooling to do but also he had to teach Nicholi how to make
the lamps. To his surprise he found that Nicholi was very good with the
knife and one day he said to him, "Here is a extra knife that I had
made before I came here. I brought it to give to a friend. I want you
to have it and to know that we will always be friends."
Nicholi was astounded. No one had ever called him a friend, and
certainly no one ever had given him something out of friendship.
Happily he went over to the other boy and grabbed him in a hug that
tore the breath out of Karlek. "Stop! your squeezing the life out of
me, you big bear." The boys sat down and laughed. "When you come back
after your trip home I will have all of our goods and monies. Nicholi
said. " What I can make while you are gone will still be half yours,
and when you get back we will start our own company and go to sea and
trade along the coast with other villages. There are many different
kinds of peoples along the coast to the south, as well as some of my
people. Come let us get to work. We must make a boat load of these so
that we can be rich."
For the next several weeks the two were always seen working on
the lamps. The rest of the villagers all wanted one or two of the
little ones and at least one of the big one's.
Along with all of this Karlek realized that he had to learn how
to count money and to read the currency of other countries. Leonid and
Kathrine were proud of what the boy had done since he was here. He was
liked by everyone, especially their daughter, Ivanya, who seemed always
to be around when Karlek was alone. She helped him with his studies and
the language, which he now spoke almost as well as the rest of the
villagers. She knew that he was something special and that he was to be
hers.
Karlek knew little about girls, except that
they were weak and could not paddle a dugout canoe or shoot arrows and
hit anything. In fact Karlek was not sure why he always had that
certain feeling when he and Ivanya lay down for the evening or when
they washed up and had to change their clothes. He only knew he liked
the feeling and that he would tell it to no one.
One day as the light again started to come and they had a few
hours of light he told Nicholi that there was another thing that he
would show him how to make and they could get much in trade for them.
Nicholi knew by now that whenever Karlek said anything it was
true. A few minutes later the two boys started to look for fallen
trees. When they had found one that was large and fresh Karlek told
Nicholi that they would have to take all of the branches off so that
they could make a large trading boat out of the trunk. Nicholi first
laughed and then looked at Karlek and knew that he was serious.
After a short time they came across a newly fallen tree that
seemed to suit Karlek's purpose. The boys worked all day and finally
got the branches from the largest part of the tree. They knew to save
the branches for paddles.
"This tree is big enough to make two dugouts." Nicholi said, "Why
two when we will both be needed to paddle one this big?" "Yes," said
Karlek "but we may be able to trade it for things to help us make more
money. Maybe someone from another village will get it from us."
It was long and tedious work and many times Nicholi thought that
this time Karlek had made a mistake. The burning out of the inside of
just one of the boats took eight days of light. The inside had to be
finished. After that they had to scrape all of the rough bark from the
wood and smooth it down. Then they had to make paddles, and finally
they had to get some large skins to make a tight covering so that
nothing would get wet from the ocean spray.
By the time that this done most of the day was in light.
Karlek knew that he would be going back to
his village to tell them of all that he had learned and to tell them of
the mountain. There was one other thing that he had to tell them; but
before he could he had to talk to Leonid.
 Karlek and Nicholi had made many of the lights and they had done
well with them, but Karlek told Nicholi to make many more, of all
sizes, while he was gone. The boy did not question his friend. He was
the only one that knew of Karlek's plan.

CHAPTER 13
The traders decided to leave earlier than usual so that they
could take Karlek to the mountain. Karlek was beside himself. He had
always carried his dream and now he was to make it a reality. This was
what his grandfather could not do, but he would see it through his eyes
for his grandfather.
The morning that they were to leave all of the villagers came to
say goodbye to this stranger who had become one of them. There were
presents for him and for his parents. Ivanya came to him and gave him a
long piece of wool knitted with bright colors. He knew that this was a
neck cover. His eyes misted as he looked at the girl who had grown even
more beautiful during the year. He could feel her warmth and it warmed
him.
Nicholi was the last to come over to him. He grabbed his friend
in a bear-like hug and in his eyes were tears. He whispered in Karlek's
ear and then went back to where he was working on the other boat.
Karlek waved to the people as the men went around the lake and
headed to the north. The ground was still frozen and they were able to
make good time.
This trip was different for this time they had dogs with them to
pull the sleds. Leonid laughed and said, "The people will be so glad to
get you back we will not have enough room for all the goods that they
will have for us." They all laughed so loud that the dogs turned and
looked at the men.
By the end of the second day they were again following the river
which helped guide them back to his village a year ago. A year that was
almost a lifetime to the boy from the north country. He had learned to
do things that made him feel that he could do anything, go anywhere and
see all that there was to see in the world.
The third night Karlek told Leonid what he
had been thinking about. They discussed the matter until the darkness
came. Karlek told him that he now felt as if he were part of Leonid's
family. He was at peace in the village. He also told him that he knew
the world was bigger than when he had lived at his village and that he
wanted to see more of it as well as make his way.
Leonid had known this for some time as he had watched the boy and
the villagers spend time together. He realized that the boy had grown,
not only in body, but also in his grasp of things around him. He knew
that this was a special person who had a special gift of seeing what
was to come, and he had seen how everyone let Karlek be a part of their
lives. How Nicholi had not only accepted Karlek, but let him make the
decision for all of the young people. He also saw how Ivanya looked at
the boy. He remembered that it was the way that Kathrine and he had
looked at each other before their marriage. He was glad that she liked
this boy.
What the feelings of the boy towards his daughter that he did not
know. That night when the boy told him that he wanted to live with them
and learn more of the world around them he was not surprised. Leonid
told him, "If your family will let you we will have you with us for as
long as you like, but you will have to do what you are told." Karlek
assured him that he would do all that Leonid asked of him as long as he
could still go to school. He knew that he still had much to learn.
The following day the party turned a little to the east and
seemed to follow an animal trail. They were going up but it was very
slight.
That day just before the darkness came he saw it again. The
mountain towered above the other mountains near it. Now it seemed to
have two peaks. There were no clouds around it this time and he was
amazed at the size of the mountain. It was larger than he had ever
imagined. He had never been this close. As the darkness came he watched
the mountain, as if
expecting it to move, until he could see it no more.
Later that night they told him that they would be at the base of
the giant in two days. The boy was so excited that he could not sleep
that night and when the next day came a violent snow storm hit their
little camp. There was nothing to do but stay under cover. The men
smoked their pipes and Karlek slept and dreamt
The next day the group continued the trip to the mountain. The
ground was much different than the land where his family or Leonid's
lived. The ground was soft and slippery. The storm had made it
difficult for them to travel with any speed and they decided to make
camp earlier that day. The group was now going steadily up and there
were many high mountains that seemed to surround them as they went
forward.
In the middle of the day Karlek looked over to his right and saw
a mountain of ice and dirt. He was surprised to see such a mountain,
and
asked Leonid about the sight. Leonid told him that other tribes told
them that ice mountain was there long before they had come to the land.
The tribe called themselves "Matsu's" and had been there for several
hundred years. They said that the rocks and ice were joined by the ice
god. It had stayed the same over the years to show the power of the ice
god.
In a short time they came to a river and it was decided that they
would cross there and camp for the day. Denali was much clearer now and
Karlek knew that tomorrow he would be there. That night he slept a
deep sleep. The dream returned and on the coming day he would see the
girl on the mountain.
The day dawned bright and clear. There was a hint of frost but it
soon gave way to the warmth of the sun. Karlek looked out at the
mountain and saw that it once again had it's ring on, as he called the
cloud band that circled the middle of the mountain.
The camp was soon cleared and the dogs harnessed to their sleds.
They were moving in a northwesterly direction, away from the river and
between two low lying glaciers of mud and ice. The ice god had been
here too, thought the boy. By nightfall they had gotten close enough
so that Karlek could make out all of it's features. It was more
beautiful than he had imagined. Giant trees surrounded the lower parts
and seemed to reach up into the clouds. Melting snow and ice formed
waterfalls tumbling down in cascading torrents.
That night he slept lightly, wondering if the girl of the
mountain would be there tomorrow. Soon he was in a deep sleep, dreaming
the dream of his grandfather.
Shortly after daybreak the boy left the traders, telling them
that he would meet them on the other side of the mountain. They were
laughing with him telling him to look out for the girl, because she
might be a bear.
Karlek climbed the base part of the mountain always going to the
side away from the sun, though it was now light for most of the day and
well into the evening. As he climbed he looked for familiar signs from
the dream. On he went not seeing the spot that he looked for; the spot
where the girl was standing.
As he rounded a large rock he looked up and there standing
several feet away he saw a creature unlike any he had ever seen. The
animal was a dirty white with long curved bones on it's head. Was this
an animal like the bear, that would charge him? He did not think so for
it stood looking at him and when he took a step forward it headed for
higher ground.
The land at this spot of the mountain had many colors. Small
clumps of bushes were dark green. Clumped grass was soft to walk on.
Bright red and orange plants grew up from the dark parts of the ground.
Trees seemed to come out of the mountain, growing on outcroppings.
As he continued his trek, Karlek felt that he was walking with
his grandfather. They were as one and he was living the dead one's
dream. The boy was humbled by the experience. He knew that he would
never be the same and that he must follow his grandfather's way. He
must look for more and build a life of his own. It was strange that all
of these feelings seemed to be the ones that he had spoken to Leonid
about.
The sun had started it's journey to the night and he knew that he
would only have a few hours of light left before he had to meet the
others. He quickened his pace though walking across the ice and the
dirt and rocks did not let him move as fast as he would have liked.
After about three hours Karlek knew that he would not meet up
with the others before dark. He was not afraid of staying alone. He
had his knife and a spear and some dried meat of the one they called
"deer." There was always plenty of water to drink.
The boy started to move a little faster, hoping to be around the
mountain by the time it was dark. He thought that if he made it to the
other side he would be able to see their fires and guide himself there
at night. Karlek noticed that there were more openings in
the rocks, like fingers reaching out to him. He said to himself that
this might be a quicker way to the other side and so he went up the one
that looked to go deeper through the mountain.
After a while Karlek decided that he had wasted enough time and
went back to where the opening began. He again moved towards the east
side of the mountain. He noticed that the tops of the other mountains
were also going away and that the land appeared to be getting more
level. He realized that he must be coming to the edge of the mountain
and would now be going to the other side. He felt that would find the
others before dark.
As he rounded a large outcropping he heard the nearby growl of a
bear. Quickly he loosened
his knife and pushed into a small hole on the side of the mountain,
hoping that the animal would not smell him. Again he heard the cry.
This time it was closer. He felt that this would be his true test of
his manhood.
He moved away from the tiny crevice and out to the side of the
rock. He got himself in a position so that the charging animal would
take the full spear if he got close enough. He had heard of this tactic
from his father who told him that it was the way that his grandfather
fought the giant animal.
As he rounded the rock he again heard the growl of the animal;
but this time it was farther away. He moved silently to the front of
the rock and came to the level place where the beast had stopped. As he
looked up he saw the giant animal moving off into a higher place in the
mountain. For the first time Karlek noticed that the new animal was
still nearby, the one that was a dirty white in color with the long
curved bones. The animal made no move as he went toward it, but stood
and looked up to a new place in the mountain.
There he saw "the rock," the rock of his dreams, where the girl
had stood. He looked back at the animal but it was gone. He caught
sight of it, again, as it scrambled up the side to the rock. There it
stood with it's head held high. Karlek made a quick camp for
himself and gathered small twigs and some dry branches. He dug a small
hole in the ground and with his dried moss started a small fire. He
knew the fire would keep the animals away.
Taking some of the clean snow he let it melt in his hands and
drank it until his thirst was quenched. He ate some of the dried meat.
He thought of how he had gotten the fire to start with his little
rocks and the moss. That was something that his father had taught him.
Something his grandfather had told his father was a gift from
grandfather's mother back before grandfather had come to the other side
of the "great" mountains around their village. He laughed to himself.
The villagers called them great mountains but they were not even close
to what he was now surrounded by. He lay down with his head on some
leaves and branches and went to sleep.
The next morning he was up and moving before the frost was off of
the ground. Soon he saw a bit of smoke below him and further on to the
north. He knew that this was the group he had left the day before.
Moving as quickly as he could he started toward them. Soon he saw that
they had put out the fire and were moving away.
With the dogs the men made much better time than could Karlek. He
knew that he would catch up with them that night and so he moved on
always to the north.
After it was dark the boy moved slowly forward not sure of where
the traders were in this vast plain. Several hours passed before he
came to their camp. There was much questions to be answered and Karlek
was busy as the men fed him between questions. Koshivi, one of the
traders, said, "Karlek did you see your girl?" The men laughed. "No"
said the boy, "but I saw the rock where she had stood. I also saw a new
animal, one with long curved bones coming out of it's head."
Leonid said to the boy, "We have seen this animal but it was
always to far for us to get close enough to kill. How close did you
get to it, Karlek?" The boy answered, "It was about the length of two
spears away. It turned up to the rock where the girl lives. When it
got to the rock it turned and looked at me with it's head held high. It
was great I tell you. I will get some of those animals and will make
some new things to trade as well as the skin and the meat."
The next four days were filled with many sights for the boy. He
had never seen this type of land before. It gently sloped down and was
covered with many small rivers.
On the fifth day Karlek began to notice many familiar sights, and
knew that his trip was coming to an end. His year was over. Now came
the challenge of the future, if there was to be one.

CHAPTER 15

On the fifth day the party arrived at the village shortly before
midday. The traders had been seen by the villagers and by the time
they got to the village everyone was gathered to meet Karlek and the
traders. Everyone was excited and happy. The traders met with old
friends from past years. Karlek ran to his parents. He knew that this
was going to be a difficult time and for now he wanted them to be
happy.
That night Natchusek and Liamuk walked along the river. They had
noticed differences in Karlek and they needed to talk about those
differences. "The boy has grown so much and has filled out. He is no
longer the thin one we sent to the traders home." said Liamuk. "There
seems to be something troubling the boy." said Natchusek. "He is used
to the world of the white men and he has seen what is out on the other
side of the mountain. It seems like he has learned much. Did
you see how the traders treated him, like one of their own." said the
father. Liamuk said to her husband, "It was a mistake to send him away
with those men. You can see that he is not comfortable with those
around here. The boys that he played with are like children next to
him." They continued their talk and without any answers they went to
bed.
The morning dawned bright and clear. The air was warm and the
night had been very short. The hunters of the village had left early to
try and get one last bit of skin for the traders.
Karlek had not gone with them. He had an idea and wanted to see
if it would work. He harnessed up several of the dogs and filled the
smallest sled with his spears and his bow and arrows. He went to his
father and told him that he was going to hunt and bring back some
skins. Natchusek was pleased that his son was doing the work of the
men of the village. He was also concerned that he was doing it like the
traders. Karlek left the village and started back the way that they
had come. In his mind he saw the white furred animal. He knew that this
skin was worth many times over what the brown and grey skins would
bring. He knew where the animal went and he guessed that there were
more up on the mountain. He knew, also, that this was the home of the
bear.
Because the night had all but disappeared, and the sled was much
lighter he was able to reach the mountain in just over three days. He
rested that night, made his little fire and cooked one of the little
animals that he had brought, wrapped in leaves and branches. It was the
food of both villages.
Ivanya had showed him other ways that the animal could be fixed.
He thought of the girl and how beautiful she was, much like the girl on
the rock. Soon he had finished his food, fed the dogs and was fast
asleep.
The morning came quickly and he once more fed the dogs. He knew
that he would be away from them for a day or so and that they would not
attack each other if they were not hungry.
As he climbed the mountain he felt the air turn much cooler. He
had not brought any heavy clothes with him for it was warm when he left
the village. Soon he was in the rocks where he saw white animals. He
knew that the skins would be valuable, but the head bones were what he
wanted the most. He had ideas for them that would help Nicholi and
himself. There were things to be made and that meant things to be sold.
By the time the sun had reached the middle of the sky he had
climbed into the clouds that surrounded the mountain.
After an hour or so, he found himself above the clouds. He was
closer to the top than he ever thought possible. He started to the rock
of his dreams and then he saw it!
The great bird was flying in slow circles
above the rock. He quickened his pace and it seemed as if the bird
noticed for he came lower toward the boy. Karlek stopped and the bird
came and landed a few feet from him. Was this a sign, he wondered? He
sat down and waited to see what the bird would do. It's great white
head shown in the sunlight and the yellow beak almost seemed to be
smiling at him.
As if he had read the boys, mind the bird let out a shrill cry
and rose into the air and over a group of rocks to his right.
Quickly Karlek scrambled toward the rocks, being as silent as he
could, and watching the great bird overhead.
Suddenly he heard the movement of something ahead and to his
right. Quickly he strung his bow and moved in the direction of the
sound. Suddenly one of the giant white animal came bounding out of the
rocks and started to run to the higher ground. Karlek let fly the arrow
and the animal dropped.
Karlek notched another arrow to the bow as another of the animals
started out of the rocks,
and again he dropped it with a single arrow.
If he were going to get the animals back to the sled he would
have to start now. He loaded the smallest of the two onto his shoulders
and started down the trail, back to his camp. The great bird cried out
once again and this time the young man looked up and waved. With
another cry the bird soared off toward the village.
After he had gotten both of the animals down he started to skin
the largest one. He was amazed at the softness of the fur. When he had
gotten off all of the fur, he cut off a piece of the meat, put a green
branch through it and placed it over his fire. He would see if it was
alright to eat.
While the meat was cooking he turned his attention to the head
bone . They were long and curved, coming to a point after curving back
near the part that attached to the head. He would see what he could
make with these strange shapes. Soon the meat was cooked and he
tasted it. He was delighted with the flavor. It was sweet and soft,
easy to chew and had a nice smell.
Returning quickly to his village Karlek showed the skins and the
head bones to the traders and the rest of the village. All of the men
were in wonder of this boy turned hunter.
Again Karlek showed that he was a remarkable young man. No one
had ever been able to get the animal that was covered with the soft
white fur. The traders told the villagers that they had chased this
animal several times but it was always able to get away. The villagers
had never seen the animal and the fur amazed them.
Karlek's parents now knew that he could not stay in the village.
He had a special calling and he must find out what it was, not stay
here. They decided to talk to the boy and tell him that he was free to
leave with the traders.
Natchusek called a meeting of the men of the village. After the
meeting it was agreed that the boy could do more for the village if he
was free to find himself. They knew that if they were to need him they
could find him and he would help them. He would still return each year.
Natchusek and Liamuk had a long talk with
Leonid about the boy and his time away from them. The other man told
them how Karlek had learned quickly and how the other young people
seemed to look to him as their leader. He told them of Nicholi and his
relationship with the other young people and his special relationship
with Karlek. Finally he told them of Ivanya, his daughter, and her
fondness for the young man. He said to the parents, "There is much for
the boy to learn and much for him to see. I think that he will do
something that is very special. He is a natural leader who everyone
likes. He is careful not to hurt anyone and to see what he can do for
others."
Leonid told them of the light pots that he had made, and how he
had been able, with Nicholi, to trade for many things. They had opened
a little store hut with all of the things that they had received as
well as new things that they had made. Then he told them about the big
boats that the boys had made. He told them that the boys were trading
with the other villages and the
strangers that came to the village.
There was a sadness in the Karlek's parents house the next day.
The leaders of the village had agreed that he could go if he would
return once each year to tell them of his progress, and now he was
called to the council to see if he agreed. Karlek's parents told this
to Leonid and then they called the young man to them.
Natchusek said to Karlek, "You have grown past the rites of
manhood in this village. We are proud of you, your mother and I, but we
also know that you cannot live here. You have a special calling that
pulls you to another part of the land. You are much like your
grandfather was even before I was born. He was to be a builder of
cities; but you will do more than even he wanted to do. We are sad that
you are to leave, but this is in your eyes and in your heart. We have
talked to the council and have prayed to the god who watches over us to
get the answer. Go and build a life, but you must come back at least
once each year, as the council requests. Be there if you are needed by
the village."
The boy looked with tears in his eyes and said to his parents,
"My heart is full of sadness and happiness at the same time. I did not
know how to tell you of my feelings. I have already talked to Leonid
and he says that I can stay with his family as long as I go to school
and follow his rules."
The parents nodded and his father said, "He has also told us of
these things. Do well and make the whole village proud of you."
Natchusek also told the boy that he would have to have two names as was
the custom of the light skinned people. "You will use the name `Tanana'
which is the name of our river. In that way we will always be with you
and you with us."
For the next few weeks the traders and the villagers worked to
complete the trading; and the young men of the village spent much time
with Karlek. They listened to stories of his other world.
The time was approaching when the sun started to give way to
darkness, a few minutes more each day.
The day before they were to leave the women of the village
prepared a great feast of fish and greens from the plants that had the
little berries on them.
It was during this last day that Karlek took his canoe and went
across the river. He walked deep into the forest to a favorite rock
that he used when he wanted be alone and think. He needed a sign that
he was making the right decision. He would be giving up much by
leaving. He knew that he would become the chief of the village if he
stayed.
He soon fell asleep and he dreamt of many things. His mind was in
a whirl. He saw his grandfather with some other people who were older
than grandfather. They were all smiling at him. From behind them came
a girl, who walked toward him. The girl was Ivanya.
The boy awoke from the dream and started back to the others. As
the canoe glided through the water a giant fish jumped in front of him
and looked directly at him as it fell back into the

water. It was the largest fish he had ever seen, almost as long as the
canoe and it was bright red. He remembered the story that was told of
how his grandfather had gone out to sea and found the giant fish that
had threatened his village. This was his sign.
That night everyone said their goodbye's to the boy and the
traders. The next morning they were packed and ready to leave. Karlek
spent some time with his parents and promised, again, that he would be
back at least once a year.
The traders called to him so that they could make much time while
it was still light. As they left Karlek found that he was not the only
one leaving the village. Eilliak, a pretty girl whose parents had died
from a disease, had fallen in love with Gorki, one of the young single
traders. She had agreed to go back and live with him, as his wife. With
waves and shouts the two groups rapidly distanced themselves as the
traders headed back to the little village of Knik.

CHAPTER 15
Karlek and Nicholi had prospered. They had made many items that
the people up and down the coast wanted. They also were able to buy
things from the Russian traders that came to the villages. They had
found the village of Yakutat. The village was populated with the
Tlingit tribe and they seemed to get on well with the few Russians that
lived there and went after the small animal in the sea, with the
beautiful fur.
When Karlek first saw the little animal it was swimming on it's
back. He soon discovered that all of the animals, which they called
"otter", did the same.
There were only six or seven of the Russians
there and when the boys came the first time they were treated like they
were chieftain's from a lost tribe.
 The two boys had taken a month to get there and they were anxious
to trade for pelts and for some of the indian jewelry. The people who
lived there were impressed by the bone-headed spears that the young men
had to trade as well as the knife with the rounded handle and the blade
that was long and curved from the center out.
Nicholi showed it's use and many of the people wanted one. They
did not have enough to go around. That night in meeting with the indian
chief, Yakunate, it was agreed that they would be allowed to build a
trading post here and that on the next voyage they would make sure that
they had plenty of knives and lanterns for the whole village.
As the two men paddled back to their village Nicholi said, "When
we go back we will take both boats and tie some of our small boats to
them. We can bring much more to trade and then I will stay there and
establish the trading post, and scout the area below. I think that we
should try and make more places to trade to the south. Each time we see
one of the big sailing ships it's always going to the south and never
to the north." Karlek thought for some time while they paddled back
to their home. Then he said, "We have three villages that we trade with
in the north now and probably you're right; but I will need someone to
help in making the goods and in going to the north to trade. This may
be the time to hire someone. Is there any person in the village our age
who you would hire?" Nicholi thought for a moment and replied, "There
isn't anyone I want."
Karlek thought for a moment and then it came to him. "You
remember when we went to village of my people we saw some of the boys
carving totem poles and making boats?" The other man nodded. "There
were two or three that had asked about work in Knik. They wanted to
leave and start on their own. Let's go back there when we get home.
We can trade for some of the jewelry of my people. We can take an
extra long sled with more dogs in case we trade for a boat or two. If
we get the boats we can put them on the sled and the rest of the stuff
in the boats. If you see someone who might be what we want. We'll sit
with him and offer him his food, a place to stay and his own boat to
cover the north trading posts. As soon as he starts to make money for
us we can start paying him and let him live where and with whom he
wants."
Nicholi liked the idea. They agreed that it was time for Karlek's
annual visit. Little did they know that this would be the last visit
that either of them would make to the Tanana River. It would also be
the last time that he would see his parents alive. Now there was work
to be done and money to be made.
Karlek had finished his schooling but continued to live with
Leonid and his family while he was getting the business going. During
this time he came to know the ways of the people and, the people
themselves. Now that he was no longer a stranger and somewhat of a
novelty, the people warmed to this likeable young man.
Ivanya knew that Karlek liked her but she did not know what her
parents would say if they decided to get married. He was a native and
she was Russian. He was not of their faith nor did he share all of
their customs. She decided to go and talk to the priest of the village.
He had spent much time with Karlek when he was not teaching him and had
gotten to know him.
After talking to the priest Ivanya felt relief spread through
her. The man had told her that in this land there were very few
eligible men and that Karlek was certainly the smartest and the most
honest boy in the village. The man told her that one day he would be a
great man, who would be admired by all. The priest also told her that
he would marry them if the boy wanted to and her parents agreed. She
had to get Karlek
to want her forever.
Little did she know that for months Karlek shared the same
thoughts about her and that he had already seen the priest before his
last trip home. The boy had told his parents about the girl. He did not
know that Leonid and Natchusek had talked of this very thing before
Karlek had left the village for good.
The two boys returned from a trip to the north coast villages and
had done very well. Some of the Russians they had met traded gold for
their goods. Karlek knew that this was money and that they could use it
to buy from other traders without losing their goods. The boys decided
to save the money in case they went to a trading place where they
needed the gold coins to buy things.
Karlek told Nicholi that it was time for his visit to his parents
and asked the young man to come and meet the rest of the villagers.
Nicholi was thrilled for he felt that now Karlek had truly accepted him.

After the two men returned from the visit Karlek told Ivanya's
parents that he needed to talk to them alone. They looked at each other
and broke out laughing. "The answer is yes!" We have known that this
day was coming from the first time you came to our house. " When you
went back to your home, Leonid spoke to your father and got his
permission for you to marry Ivanya, if you wanted." said Ivanya's
mother.
Leonid turned to the young man and said, "Karlek we already love
you and we always will. You are like one of us and if Ivanya wants to
marry you, and we think she does, you will have our blessings." Karlek
was caught off guard and all he could do was to stand there and blush.
The marriage was a good one and the village had received him as one of
their own. He made a trip to his village and brought Ivanya with him so
that all could meet her and see what a fine wife he had taken. He left
with the promise to return soon. The two of them had returned every
year for the last thirteen years.
As the boys paddled to Knik, Karlek had the seeds of an idea.
"Nicholi what would you think of bringing Rangak into the business? He
will be finished with school when we get back. He has shown an interest
in the trading and he may be a good trader. He also likes working with
you when you are carving out the boats. Has he done work that would
please you? said Karlek.
Nicholi laughed his deep and jolly laugh and said, "He is a good
worker, not great but good. He reminds me of you fifteen years ago. He
has asked me many questions about the business so I know that he is
interested. My children have no interest, though my son may be a hunter
who can bring skins to us to buy. Why don't I talk to him when we get
back, then if he is really interested we can sit with him and make him
a proposal. Perhaps we can use two other men to work with us and
since Rangak lives at home we do not have to feed and shelter him.
That's your problem!"
The boys got back home by the time that the
sun had started it's turn to darkness. They knew that this was the time
for them to set their plans in motion and get ready for the next
trading season.
"I think that we have time to get to my village" said Karlek. " We
can see if we can find someone to come to work for us when the long day
comes again. He can make some spears and knives during the dark time.
That will make him feel a part of the business. Also I think that I can
get some more of the white furred animals both for meat for our
families and for the fur itself. I think that those furs are worth a
great deal and if we have them they will be good to take to the new
trading post.
While you are finding the right boy and deal for some large boats
to take back with us, I'll go to the mountain for the white animal."
Nicholi laughed and said, "You are still drawn to the mountain.
You go there every chance you get. Alright let's do what you say, but
I'll
go to the village first while you try and get the skins and the meat.
Then you can come to the village and see your parents and the others
and see if I have picked a good worker."
The boys spent a few days at home and then set out to make their
plans a reality. Their wives knew that they would not be gone long and
that they will them for the winter.
Nicholi talked to Rangak and told him of their offer. The boy
jumped with joy at the news that he could come into the business.
Nicholi laughed as he told Karlek. They decided that they would take
Rangak with them to the village. The boy was happy for now he would
also meet his other grandparents for the first time.
The trip to the village was swift. The land was solid and yet
soft for the dogs. The sleds that they used were different than those
of the deep winter. The runners were wider so that they would be able
to pull heavy loads without bogging down.
Nicholi and Rangak went ahead to the village while Karlek headed
to the mountain, his mountain. It had never left him, nor had the
dream. Now he knew the mountain and he was certain that the mountain
knew him as well. Every time he went there a feeling of peace come
over him.
The mountain also had been good to him, and that he had been able
to get many skins from the bear. He had not seen the white animal on
his last two trips, but this time he was going to climb to where they
always seem to be headed. This time he would get two skins and much
meat.
After seeing to his dogs and setting up his camp, Karlek again
looked at the rock up there standing out for him to see. Each time he
looked he had expected to see the girl of the dream, but she was never
there. Looking up at the rock he saw to his amazement the giant bird
sitting there and looking down at him. Karlek knew that the bird was
his friend and he waved to it. The bird rose awkwardly into the sky
flew to him and settled next to him.
Karlek was happy to see the bird. It confirmed his reason for
being here at Denali.
Suddenly the eagle gave a cry and took off into the sky, turning
sharply to the front of the mountain. Karlek looked in the direction of
the bird and saw several of the white animals. Darkness was
settling in and the man decided that he would start early in the
morning. If he could get more than two of the animals they would make
more money than they had planned on. Life was good on the mountain.
Karlek was active the next two days and by the end of the second
day he killed five of the animals and had skinned them and wrapped the
meat in bark. After he finished he headed to the village to see his
parents and to see how Rangak was doing.
Karlek arrived at the village shortly after the middle of the
light time. He first went to
see his parents and was shocked to see how they had aged. They looked
old and weak, but they still had grins for him as well as hugs.
They told him about the fine grandson they had and how happy they
were that he had Nicholi bring him to them. The three of them talked
for most of the day and well into the night. Karlek could see that they
were not going to live for many more years.
The next day Nicholi told him that he had watched two young men
working on a boat that was very long and had high sides. The two of
them went to see this boat. Karlek was sure that Nicholi had picked one
of the boys to come to work for them. When they got to the edge of the
water where the boys were working Karlek knew that they had a problem.
The boys looked exactly alike and he knew that they could not take one
without the other.
They looked at the boat and told the boys how well they had done.
"Would one of you like to come to work for us in Knik?" Nicholi asked.
Both boys laughed and the one who was working in the boat said, "We do
not go anywhere without the other. Would you take us both."
The two men went back to their camp in the village to talk things
over. "How can we feed both of them?" asked Nicholi. "They can both
stay together," Karlek said. "I've got an idea" We can use both of
them and open up another trading post. Do you remember one of the
people in Yukatat telling us of the big town on one of the islands
several suns below them. They said it was called `Nova Arkhangelsk'.
The boys can stay together we can have them work the north coast. You
take Yukatat and I will move my family to this new town.
We will be able to get more gold and perhaps our goods will be
new to them. You know that our lanterns are wanted by everyone. The
furs that I have gotten on this trip will get us off to a good start in
these new places.
We can all meet back at Knik when the sun is at its highest point
each year." They agreed on the idea and went to the boys with it to see
if they would follow this plan. The boys were delighted.
In a few weeks all was in readiness for their trip back to Knik.
Karlek said his goodbye's to the leaders of the village with the
promise to be back at the same time next year.
He went to his parents to say his farewell. Natchusek said to
his son, "You have followed your grandfather and your heart. We are
proud of you, but you must remember that the best thing you have is
your honesty. Never try to cheat anyone out of anything. What you did
for the boys is good, and because of this you will prosper."
"Father, you and mother need to come to live with us. Ivanya
loves you and the children will be able to help you both." said Karlek.
His father replied, "We will think on it and let you know on your next
trip." With that Karlek and Nicholi left and headed back to Knik with
their sleds piled high with skins and other goods to trade. They also
had the new boats with the high sides and the two boys who were to work
for them.
 CHAPTER 13
Life was good in Sitka, Rangak decided. The town was the capitol
of Russian America. He had been here for the past twelve years and now
was twenty eight years old. He had plenty of money and a fine job as
principal trader for the Kani Trading Kompany, which was founded by his
father and uncle Nicholi. The two older men left most of the work to
him now. They were primarily interested in buying not trading. The town
had become an important trade center for the China trade ships and the
sailing vessels of the northwest coast that pulled in to refit
themselves or to sell to the local people. When news of a ship's coming
reached the town it quickly spread to the forests and along the coast
of the island named for the man who started the settlement and the
trading, Alelsandr Andreevich Baranov. These were the Baranov Islands.
It was for this that the two men now turned their attention. If a
ship had goods which

Nicholi or Karlek thought could be profitable they would buy the entire
cargo. Sometimes they would even buy the ships. In this way Kani
Kompany controlled the trading and the sales of most of the goods along
the coast.
Kani Kompany had trading posts that stretched from the town of
Nome in the north to the new settlement, named Ketchikan, in the south.
It was up to Rangak to get the goods into the trading posts that were
set up along the coast and to the new one that was inland near a large
mountain range. The natives called the mountains Kluane and the trading
post was set up there next to a large lake.
The rumor had started that there was gold in the area of the
mountains and people were making the hard journey overland.
Since most of the travelers did not come prepared for such a
trip, the Kani company supplied all of their needs, for a handsome
profit. The post agent would trade only for furs.
The rest of the purchasing was done in gold.
Rangak was aware of the growing business and the role he was to
play when the older ones were gone. For now it was up to him to expand
and yet control Kani Kompany. He was also at an age where he felt that
it was time to settle down. He had to start looking around; but before
he was ready to do that he must make a trip to the trading post at
Ketchikan. The area had started to see a great many foreigners, from
the land called America, coming up the coast and there was talk that
the ruler of that country, a man they called President, wanted to buy
the whole of Russia Amerika.
Rangak booked passage on the next boat that travelled south with
the promise that he would be dropped at the town. When he arrived he
was shocked at the amount of building that had gone on since the last
time he was here, four years ago. There were many more people than
before, and most of them were Russian he noted

with pleasure.
 He had no use for the " Yankees" as they were called. They were
loud and always looking for a fight. There had been many shootings and
it always seemed that Russians and not Yankees were the ones that died.
The Tlingit indian name for the small fish camp was Kitschk-Hin,
"thundering wings of an eagle." The Russians called it Ketchikan.
After spending several weeks in Ketchikan, Rangak returned to
Yakutat. He reported to the two older men of what was happening there
as well as the news of what was happening in the rest of the land to
the south.
He told them of the settlement called Vancouver, that was down
the coast in the territory of Canada. It was in a well protected bay
and was a trading post that many ships and overland travelers stopped
to buy their supplies before heading north.
Rangak had other startling news. The United States of America was
trying to buy all of the land that was Mother Russia's Aleyska.
He also told him of the high price for the otter skins as well as
the white skinned animal called mountain goat.
When Karlek heard this he became excited. He had not visited the
village of his people since his mother and father died over eleven
years ago.
He turned to Nicholi and said, "Can you run everything here. I
will go to the mountain, Denali, and also to the village of my people.
I want to see if there are still the white animals there. I'll take
three sleds along with our best hunters and some of the new things
called "guns." We may be able to get a great many skins." Nicholi was
in agreement but added that he should take the hunters from Knik since
it would cost less. Karlek laughed, finally Nicholi was being more
practical than Karlek.
The next day the men again sent Rangak, this time to Vancouver to
see if he could set up a Kani Kompany trading post there and also see
what he could find out about the United States of America.

The day after Rangak left Karlek left for the little town of
Knik where it all began. As he paddled he remembered the first time he
had met the traders and all of the events of the past twenty five
years. He thought of his parents, of Leonid and his family, and of
Ivanya. Life had been good to him.
He also thought of the dream, the mountain and the bird. It had
been a long time since he had seen the great one in the sky and thought
that it was dead by now. His course was clear. He would first take the
hunters to the camp at the base of the mountain and then he would go on
to the village to see who was still left there from his youth.
Arriving in Knik he went to Leonid's house. The old man now in
his seventies, and his wife were delighted that he came to be with
them. They stayed up most of the night talking about the things
that had happened since his last trip there over four years ago. He
told them of the business and of the new trading posts as well as
Rangak's trip to the town of Vancouver.
There was little darkness at this time of the year and the
hunting party left in the morning. They made a quick trip to the
mountain and Karlek showed them where to get the white animal, and the
bear. He also told them to stay away from the rock, his rock, and above
all not to harm the eagle if it should come to the mountain. He told
them the eagle would guide them to the place where the white furred
animals hid. He showed them how he wanted the meat stored in bark
and tied with the muscles of the animals. He promised them a bonus if
they fill the two sleds and have more for him to load when he got back
in a week. Then he was off to his village.
The trip was short. When he got there he was told of a terrible
sickness that killed more than half the village. There were only a
handful of those he had known before. They had a big celebration on his
first night back, with the older ones telling the younger how an eagle
came to sit by Karlek when he was a boy. They told of how Karlek was
able to see things that others could not, and that he went away and
studied the ways of the outsiders and had become one of them. When
he heard that he realized that it was true, he did not fit in here. He
had left this life and now could not be a part of their ways. The ways
of his father.
He quickly made the trip back to Denali, the mountain, and when
he arrived at the camp he found that everything was gone. He was
puzzled by this for he had picked men who had roots to their village
and were trustworthy.
He decided to rest and then head back to Knik in the early part
of the day.
When he woke up the next day he packed all his remaining supplies
and headed down to the trail that led to Knik. As he rounded a group of
rocks that had fallen, he stopped in his tracks. There on the top rock
was the eagle!
He moved away from the dogs and waved to the giant bird. Slowly
it rose to the sky, but
instead of coming to him it flew to another set of rocks ahead of him.
Karlek thought that the bird was playing with him and so he did not
follow the eagle; instead he started back down the trail. With a long
cry the bird came back and hovered over him. It gently set down next to
him just as it had done in the past. He looked at the bird and tried to
figure out what the bird wanted.
As if the eagle could read his thoughts it flew out in front of
the sled and stopped, waiting for the man to catch up. Then Karlek knew
what the eagle wanted. It was to follow to some other place on the
mountain. Pushing forward he soon saw a new trail and in a few hours he
came upon the rest of the men and their work.
Gorki, said to him, "Just as we started to climb the mountain the
great bird came and we did as you said and the bird led us to this
spot. See the results. What kind of bird is this who hunts for us?"
The sleds were packed with the furs that would bring huge profits for
the Kani
Trading Kompany. The men looked tired from the work.
Karlek was overwhelmed by the sight of ten white furs and seven
brown furs of the bear. All of the meat was bound and packed on one
sled with the furs on the other. The supplies were sitting, waiting to
go on Karlek's sled.
It was a joyous trip back to the town of Knik. Little did Karlek
know that this was not to be his last trip to the mountain. He felt he
would never see the bird again. His mind was occupied with the trip
back and what lay ahead for Kani Traders. He knew his next step; but he
needed Nicholi's and Ivanya's approval.
When the party arrived back, Nicholi rushed to meet him and to
see what he had been able to bring back. After paying the men he and
Karlek went to their little store, now too small for all of the goods
that they had for sale.
Nicholi looked at his friend and knew that there was something on
his mind. "Well let's have it, what's going on in that brain of yours.
I can see it all over your ugly face." They both laughed and Karlek
said to his friend. Now is the time for us to see just how good a
business can get. How much can we sell? We don't need the money but
something is driving me forward. I have a plan but I must first talk to
Ivanya. If she says yes then I will talk to you about it."
The man nodded to him and told him that he would talk whenever he
was ready to tell him the plan.
It was a bold move that Karlek proposed to his wife that night.
He knew that she was comfortable where they were now, and the children
were starting their own lives. He told her of his idea to start a
trading post along the coast down below them in one of the large
cities. They would be able to come back and visit or the children could
come to see them. The new sailing boats were fast and could make the
trip to the Kalifornya city by a great bay in less than three weeks. He
saw a great future in the area.
Gold had been found a few years earlier and there was talk of the
United States buying Alyesk. If this happened before they opened their
store it could mean many difficulties later on when they might try and
start their business in that country.
Ivanya listened to all he said and then turning to look him full
in the face said,
"Are you sure that you can do it. You are not as young as you once were
and this is a new country with different laws and different people."
The man answered, "If you are with me I can do anything." Ivanya,
looked at him slowly moving her eyes to his hands and face and then
said, "If the children want to come they must be allowed too, and if
they want to work in the business they are to have that chance. You
must also realize that they will not have the same kinds of people to
live with and to marry." As she said this he broke out laughing and
then, thinking of what she said she laughed also.
Karlek said, "Who knows maybe our daughter will meet a Tlingit or
a Tananan boy just like you did. She knew that he was teasing her but
in such a way as to make her feel good all over.
"Alright," she said. "When do we go?" "I told Nicholi that I
would talk to him after I talked to you and then only if you said yes.
He and I will talk it over tomorrow and see how long everything will
take. If he says yes I will go first, and take our son, Kolosh, with
me. He wants to get into the business and this will be the best way.
Ivanya agreed and the rest of the night was spent in showing her
that he was not so old.
The next day Nicholi and Karlek walked down to the pier at the
edge of town, where they unloaded their boats, which now included a
couple of sailing boats. Karlek told his friend of his idea and how
Nicholi would have to make all the decisions for the north and inland
part of the business.
He would handle the islands, Vancouver and everything to the
south.
Plans were made and the two sailing boats were loaded with
supplies and goods for sale or trade. They knew that the first shipment
could make or break them. With this in mind Karlek took many of the
lanterns that everyone still wanted and the furs that he had gotten on
the last trip. He also took half of the gold the two men had saved, and
his son Kolosh.
When the day finally came the two men spent much time together
talking of the past and of the future. Ivanya sat with them but said
nothing. The ships were loaded and the tide was good, the sun was
bright and the weather warm the day Karlek and his son started on this
new adventure. This was a new land and it was considered even a part of
Mother Russia. If all worked out they would have the largest business
of it's kind in the new world. If it didn't work they would come back
to Sitka and they would still be the same company.

CHAPTER 17

The business had prospered in the ten years since they came to
San Francisco. The city was not like the little towns and villages of
the north. Here the pace is faster and decisions are made quickly.
Gold had been found at John Sutter's mill.
John Augustus Sutter had purchased the Ross Colony in 1841, Just one
year after Karlek and his son, Kolosh, came to the city to set up their
business.
The year was 1848. James Marshall was working the tail traces of
a saw mill on January twenty-forth when he found the gold and rushed to
report to his employer, John Sutter.
Fur trappers had come to the area as early as 1814; but they had
since headed to the northwest where the land were filled with animals
of all sizes and shapes. Within a few months of the gold discovery came
one of the largest migrations in history.
Fortunately for Karlek and the Kani Trading Kompany there was
quite a need for the little lanterns and the curved knives that he had
made so many years before.
The furs that would come each month were sold to the european
markets as quickly as they were unloaded from Kani ships.
The ships now carried goods for other companies as well and one
could see the Kani Kompany flag in all parts of the world. They also
carried new goods from Mother Russia.
By 1850 the family was settled and the business was prospering.
They had now opened trading stores, as they were called, in the towns
of Spanish California called San Pedro and San Diego. This last one was
close to the country called Mexico, and it was here that Karlek found
new treasures to buy and sell.
Ivanya flourished in the new land and most of the women of the
Russian colony could be expected at their large home during the week.

The time was not without tragedy. Two of

Karlek's and Ivanya's children died shortly after coming to the land.
Nicholi had died a year ago. Leonid had been dead for three years.
Rangak had married a woman from the Canadian area. They had two
children, a boy and a girl; but the girl died before she was able to
see her grandparents.
It was decided that Rangak would now be responsible for the
northern operation. He would receive one-forth of the profits. One-
forth would go to Nicholi's widow, Mushika, until she died and then
Rangak would receive one-half of everything that the company earned.
Kolosh had become a valuable member of the business and now
handled all of the business outside of San Francisco. Karlek was
content to run the trading store here in the fast-paced city they now
called home.
He also had started a new business; a bank for the Russians who
looked for a place to put their savings. Many of them worked in the
mines or did much of the manual labor at the docks.
 A new problem faced the owners of the business. Everyone knew
that Mother Russia was going to sell the lands to the north and all of
the settlements along the coast to the United States. California had
become a state near the end of last year. The Chinese had jobs on the
railroad or as cooks or laundrymen. People were looking to get away
from the foreign names and were buying from people and companies that
sounded more like American's.
Karlek was now at a time of his life where he wanted to spend
more time with Ivanya and visit all of their company holdings, which
included, beside the stores and ships,land. Karlek had bought large
sections of land in California. They both knew that there was much land
that was available in the northern territories. They also knew that
they needed to get more land in Alaska, as it was called by the white
men. Before he did all of this, however, he sent for Rangak and Kolosh.
He talked over his new idea with Ivanya, who was now showing her
age and was moving much slower and with some difficulty. When the two
brothers arrived he told them first of their mothers condition and then
of the plans for he and Ivanya to visit their villages back in Alaska.
Karlek talked at length, with the two, about the conditions in
this wild country that seemed to have no law. He told them of his fear
that as outsiders they would be easy prey for some who would like to
take their business from them.
His thoughts lay in the future. Both boys were married and fine
families. Karlek and Ivanya wanted to see all of their grandchildren
and great grandchildren before it was too late.
Rangak looked at his father and said, "What is the real reason
that we're here? You could say all of this in a letter. You've got
something planned and I know that means new adventures and money."
Karlek laughed at his son's words. He realized that he had not
only his blood but the
blood of his great grandfather.
The older man spoke. "We are going to change the name of our
company, and if you want you may change your last name to the name of
the new company. It will make it easier for you to get along in this
country."
The two brothers looked at each other and then back to their
father. Karlek asked Ivanya to come into the room for the final part of
the discussion. "Your mother feels that since you are running most of
the business you should have a say in the matter. We need to know how
you feel about this idea. It will change our very lives and since you
will be able to change your names, if you like."
Kolosh looked at his father and said, "You have made all of the
big decisions for the company for over forty years and they have been
good ones. I have no problem with a new name for the reasons you said,
but it must be a name that will be easily said."
Rangak said, "I can see some benefits from such a change, but
won't it hurt the business because people will have to learn a new
name, something that is much different than they now know?"
Karlek looked at his wife and smiled. "The boys are as cautious as
you and they seem to think things through. I have chosen the name
`Caine'. As you see there is not too much difference in the sound of the
name but it is spelled 6464‚ 6464ƒ 6464„ 6464… 6464† 6464‡ 6464ˆ 6464‰
6464Š 6464‹ 6464Œ 6464 6464Ž 6464 6464 6464‘ 6464’ 6464“ 6464” 6464•
6464– 6464— 6464˜ 6464™ 6464š 6464› 6464œ 6464 6464ž 6464Ÿ 6464 6464¡
6464¢ 6464£ 6464¤ 6464¥ 6464¦ 6464§ 6464¨ 6464© 6464ª 6464« 6464¬ 6464
6464® 6464¯ 6464° 6464± 6464² 6464³ 6464´ 6464µ 6464¶ 6464· 6464¸ 6464¹
6565º 6565» 6565¼ 6565½ 6565¾ 6565¿ 6565À 6565Á 6565Â 6565Ã 6565Ä 6565Å
6565Æ 6565Ç 6565È 6565É 6565Ê 6565Ë 6565Ì 6565Í 6565Î 6565Ï 6565Ð 6565Ñ
6565Ò 6565Ó 6565Ô 6565Õ 6565Ö 6565× 6565Ø 6565Ù 6565Ú 6565Û 6565Ü 6565Ý
6565Þ 6565ß 6565à 6565á 6565â 6565ã 6565ä 6565å 6565æ 6565ç 6565è 6565é
6565 6565ë 6565ì 6565í 6565î 6565ï 6565ð 6565ñ 6565ò 6565ó 6565ô 6565õ
6565ö 6565÷ 6565ø 6565ù 6565ú 6565û 6565ü 6565ý 6565ÿ 6565ýÿÿÿ656565
the English way. That will make us look like we have been around for a
long time.
" "What do you boys think of your father's idea?" asked Ivanya.
The brothers talked among themselves and with their parents, trying to
find out if the present name would be of any value.
Rangak said, "I think that we should keep the name `Kani' in Alaska. We
do most of our business with our own people. The name let's us hold to
our roots. Down here it makes sense but the tribes know us and trust
us. It could cause them to deal with others and we would be the
losers."
The chinese cook served dinner and then they talked well into the
night. Finally Ivanya said, "I am tired and it sounds like you are too.
Let's talk more in the morning over breakfast."
The next day it was agreed that Alaska would keep the name
Kani and all of the land below Vancouver would change to Caine. The
shipping lines, which were now the company's most profitable venture
would be called "The Caine Shipping Company." All of the ships would
have names of the towns and villages of Alaska, except for the ones
that would be named for the family. The first name to be chosen was
"The Ivanya Caine."
The brothers left after a few days with the promise that their
parents would visit them soon. Karlek and Ivanya would go north in the
month of June and spend time with Rangak and his family and visit all
of the places that had meant so much to them in the past.
The two older ones decided that after they visited Alaska they
would go to San Diego to visit the rest of the family and the newest
granddaughter. This would also give them a chance to spend time with
Kolosh's wife who they had only met once. She was a pretty woman, very
blond with soft blue eyes that made Ivanya think of the summer skies in
Alaska. Her name was Barbara. There were two children, Piotr the
boy, and the baby, Karla who looked like her mother except that she had
darkened skin; almost a cross between the parents.
Karlek had a reason for being there in the summer. He had heard
that the weather never got cold and that the people of Mexico made
goods that could be purchased for much less than goods made in America.
If he could get them to work for him they could make the things that he
could sell at a better price. Then he could sell for less than his
competitors.
There was another reason that Karlek was anxious to make the
journeys. Ivanya was aging rapidly. He could see that he would live
longer than she would. He loved her and often wondered how he would
live without her; or if he even wanted to live after she was gone.
The two of them planned the trip for the coming summer, giving
careful thought to what they would do when each was no longer alive. It
was decided that if Ivanya died while they were in Alaska she would be
buried in the village of Knik. If not they would be buried together on
a hill overlooking the bay of San Francisco, in the Russian Cemetery.
The next day they went to look for the land that would be their home
for eternity.
One of the things that Ivanya had wanted Karlek to do for some
time now, was to hire a woman to work in the main store. San Francisco
was booming and many couples had come to make their mark in the west.
Caine Company was the biggest store around and now it carried clothes
for women. Ivanya thought that if the women had other women to talk to
and buy from they would buy more and feel more comfortable rather than
dealing with only men.
Karlek had listened to this argument for several years, but now
he gave in and hired a young woman whose husband was a Methodist
preacher. Her name was Susan Ashton.
As usual Ivanya was right. The women of the city and the
surrounding area flocked to the store and soon there was need for
another woman. This time Ivanya did the hiring and she hired a young
spanish girl who had been left in San Francisco by her family.
When Ivanya first met her she was full of dirt and looked as if
she had not ever had a bath. After cleaning her up and getting her some
new clothes she was just what Ivanya wanted. Someone who could speak
both English and Spanish. The girl, named Elana, was a solid worker
and always seemed to be doing little things that brought more business
to the company.
One day when Karlek and Elana were in the store, alone, Karlek
asked her if she knew of the town called Pueblo San Diego. In an
instant her eyes lit up and she started to speak of her life before her
parents had brought her to San Francisco.
She told the older man that she was
born there and that she would go back some day as a person of
influence. She would show the "peons" that she had made something of
herself and that she would not need a dowry when she got married.
Karlek marveled at the young girl who became so animated. In the
back of his mind an idea was taking shape. He would sleep on it for a
while and then when he had it worked out he would talk to his wife and
his son Kolosh.
Several days passed and Karlek wrote to his son, Kolosh,
detailing his thoughts about the use of the girl in his business as a
trader with the Mexicans. He told how she had been creative and worked
well with everyone. Since they had talked of opening a work place in
the little town of Tijuana, she would be just the person to help Kolosh
and see that they got what they contracted for both in quality and
quantity. As the business grew she could take over the management of a
new store and still help in the purchasing of goods from the country to
the south.
After the letter was sent to his son, Karlek told Ivanya of his
idea and what he had written to Kolosh. She smiled her shy smile and
said, "Old man you have come a long way. I am glad that you see the
value in Elana, but do not forget what Susan can do as well. Perhaps
she should run our store here, at least while we take our trip."
She was usually right thought Karlek and why not; Susan was a
capable person and she got along well with the customers, even the men.
She had brought great wealth to the Tanana's. Now she will see what she
can do running the business. In the back of his mind he had
another one of his ideas. This may be the time to start planning for
the future. If he moved to San Diego, Susan could run the business. He
knew that the company would be in good and honest hands. He thought
back to Nicholi and how he knew right away that he could be trusted.
Everyone else that had worked for them were also trustworthy. The
God had ben good to the "Kani" company. He really had to learn
more about this God that Susan was always talking about.
 The next day dawned bright and clear. It was one of those
mornings where there was no fog. You could see for miles in any
direction. Karlek rose early and went to a small restaurant for
breakfast. He did not want to wake his wife. She would need her rest
for the trip they were about to take, back to where it all began.
As he was drinking the strong coffee these people seemed to like,
his mind wandered back to the mountain, Denali. He remembered how he
had seen it the first time. He remembered the great bird, called
"eagle." He thought of the dream and the beautiful lady with the sunset
hair on the rock. He thought of his grandfather and wondered what he
would think of all that had happened to him. Karlek was sure that he
would approve.
His thoughts turned once more to his wife of so many years. She
had made him what he was and he knew that he was going to lose her
soon. They
had lived a good life together and he would always have his dreams, and
his past.
Karlek got to the store earlier than usual. This was the time to
talk to Susan about the running of the store and about the profits she
would make for both of them. Karlek knew that her loyalty was important
and that if she could make more she would as long as it was the right
way. Her poor husband was having a rough time trying to get the
little church started and the Mission Society was talking of closing it
down. Karlek and Ivanya had gone there one sunday morning and when they
had gotten home they discussed what had happened.
Karlek remembered the first church he had gone to as a boy coming
to live with Leonid, Katherine and the little girl, Ivanya.
This was not the same. The prayers had some of the same meanings
but the message was different. He had not figured it out and they had
stayed up late trying to understand what they had heard and felt.
When Susan was not busy Karlek called her
into the office and told her that they would like her to run the
business while they took their trip to visit the children and the grand
children the following spring and summer. Susan was to receive ten
percent of the profits of the business over the time that they were
gone. He told her that if she was comfortable with the arrangement and
they moved to live in San Diego she would have complete charge, getting
ten percent of all the profits, plus her salary. She would have
complete authority over the business. Susan told the man that she
would tell him tomorrow. She must first talk to her husband and also to
God. Karlek smiled. Did she really think that this God of hers would
take time to talk with her?
The next day Susan said that she would do it as long as she could
run the business without interference. The older man agreed knowing
that the rules were already in place.
The following spring plans were made to board the "Umlak Caine,"
one of the newer ships of the Caine Line. They would take with them
some presents for the family and also some things for the people of
Knik and Sitka, hopefully to give to someone from their past life.
It was at this time that Elana was sent to work in the San Diego
store. Kolosh was delighted to have her to help just as his father
suggested. It would give him a chance to see if they could open other
branches in towns just above San Diego.
A Spanish missionary named Junipero Sierra opened several
missions stretching up almost to San Francisco. Around some of these
missions towns were growing. He had heard of a sleepy fishing village
with a great harbor, called San Pedro, and of a large town called La
Ciuade de Los Angeles further up and a little inland. It was said that
this was a place where many fruits and vegetables grew.
In late May of 1877 the two older ones left for the North. It was
to be an adventure that
neither would ever forget. Times were changing and there were strong
currents of nationalism forming in the area. Karlek knew that the
freedom of the north would soon be challenged by civilization.

CHAPTER 18

Alaska was still an unorganized territory. Karlek could not

understand the name "Seward's Folly", that the Americans used to talk
about this land of great wealth and peace. The United States Army
seemed to be responsible for all of the law in the area and since most
of the people lived near the water there were no terrible uprisings.
Plans were being made to make the land into a federal territory, but
for now the natives and the white settlers lived with a fragile peace.
This was the Alaska that the two older people came back to in
1877. Karlek and Ivanya first went to see the friends that were still
left in Sitka. While they were there talk was of an uprising to oust or
kill all of the white settlers in the area. The whites were vastly
outnumbered by the natives and when the army pulled out to help quell
the uprisings in Idaho

the situation became desperate. The settlers called on the United

States for help but got none. In desperation they called on the British
who were garrisoned at Vancouver.
Karlek and Ivanya saw all of the changes that had already taken
place. They were sad for what they had loved about the land was being
taken from the people who had carved out their lives in this cold but
friendly world.
Telling their friends that they would return at the end of the
summer, the two left for the north to see if they could find any of
their old friends in Knik.
Karlek kept a watchful eye on his wife for her health was failing
rapidly. There was much to do and to see and he knew that she would
want to get it all in before it was time to leave this world and go to
the land of the spirit gods.
 As they approached Knik they saw that the little stopping off
place called Anchorage had indeed grown into a large town and had big
docks
along it's waterfront.
Karlek the businessman laughed as he turned to his wife and said,
"See what we have missed. We could have all of the business right here
and never had to leave." She smiled her gentle shy smile and said,
"Karlek, you dumb bear. Look at what you have done and the lands that
you have traded with in the past twenty years since we moved to San
Francisco. If you could have done all that from here you would be a
god. You are not, so be thankful that you have been like your
grandfather and found the road to wisdom as well as wealth. What we
have is because you were able to see into the future like your
grandfather, Rangak. You have built a business larger than anyone else
from Alaska. You have helped people from all races, and have raised
two fine boys who are part of your business. Now you stand here and say
that you could have done this from Anchorage. Old man you are crazy."
she laughed at the last part and he laughed with her.
She was always giving him the credit for everything and he knew
that none of this would have happened if he had not met her almost
sixty years ago and fallen in love with this gentle and wise woman who,
he knew was making her last journey with him.
He looked at his wife and tenderly took her hands in his and said
to her, "What you have said is true; but you always do not say it the
right way. Change the you to we and it makes more sense. It has been
your wisdom that has helped me to make the right decisions and to look
in the right directions. You have been the light that has never left my
sight, always leading me on to a brighter day. What I have is because
of you. Always remember what I am is what you have made me and that is
why when you ask me why I love you I tell you I love you because you
are you."
A strange mist came over their eyes as each wiped the tears of
love and joy.
Karlek and Ivanya spent a week in Knik, seeing the few friends
that were left. There was
one person who, to their surprise, was still alive. He was almost one
hundred years old but he still taught school and led the service on
Sunday, the day of no work.
The old priest, Constintine Gorashof, smiled as they came to
visit him. He made them tell all that they had done since they had left
the little town. The hours whiled away and Karlek noticed that Ivanya
was starting to nod and to lose her balance in the chair. He said to
the old man that it was time for all of them to get their rest and they
would talk again, tomorrow. The days were long and there was much time
to talk in the light; now it was time to rest.
A few days later they left by sled to visit the village where
Karlek was born. When they arrived the village was not there. This was
a great puzzle that had to be solved.
Depression settled on Karlek for the first time in his life. He
realized that he had roots to the past. They were gone, like the
village.
He despaired for some time until Ivanya said, "Let's go to the
great mountain and see if there are any answers. You have always said
that the mountain was there for you and that there was the eagle who
came to you to help you find the answers. Go and see if there are any
answers."
 They stayed that day and the next looking for clues as to what
had happened. Also they were hoping that someone would be paddling down
the river and might have the answers.
The following day the two of them set out for the mountain in the
distance. Karlek could not move as fast or for as long as head in the
past and this too angered him. He was losing his vitality and was
resentful. The journey took them five days and when they arrived the
sky was starting to darken.
The older man made a lean-to for them and spread the giant animal
robes he had brought with him so that his wife would be warm. She was
cold much of the time now.
After the meal they lay down and talked for many hours about
their life and how good it had been. This seemed to raise his spirits.
He remembered how Susan told him that when things were either good or
bad God listened to prayers. That night Karlek and prayed to the one
God for the first time, to a God he had never really known. He prayed
for the answers and he prayed for the wife who was at his side.
The next morning the man had a different feeling about him. His
depression was gone and there was now only a sadness that such an
important part of his life was gone.
He told Ivanya to get some rest and that he was going up the
mountain to the rock. It was not a hard climb but Karlek was glad that
he had left early for he had to stop and catch his breath several
times.
As he started up the last part of the outcropping that led to the
rock he heard it! Like a sound of yesteryear the cry of the giant bird
came to him loud and clear. He trembled at the sound. Was this to be
the answer to his question? He climbed up the face of the outcropping
and reached the rock. There he found what he was looking for, part of
the answer. Piled high in a large area in the center of the flat rock
ledge were clothes and utensils from the village. Much he recognized
and there were even some of the little bowls he had carved so many
years ago. On the side of the rock at the back were drawings. The
drawings told of a terrible illness that gripped the people. They had
come to this place to pray to the giant bird. Some had died here. The
bones were testament to that fact. There were no pictures of the giant
bird doing anything to help them. Only picture of the people dying as
others kept the vigil. Finally there were no more pictures on the rock.
As he started down he heard and saw the eagle heading toward him.
He knew that "his" eagle must be long dead and did not know what to
expect of this bird. The bird soared on the currents of air around that
side of the mountain
and came to rest at his feet. The bird seemed to smile at him and
Karlek was confused. He decided that he would go to the bird as he had
done so many years before and smooth the feathers.
The bird seemed to know that this was a friend and though he
ruffled himself up he settled down and let the man stroke his feathered
wing.
Karlek did not know what to think. Surely this was not the same
one that had been with him over fifty years ago. The birds did not live
that long.
Suddenly, without warning the eagle rose and circled the mountain
where the clouds began. He kept coming to one place and then would cry
his long cry. Karlek knew that he wanted him to go to that spot and not
knowing why he headed to the spot.
There on the ground was a young eagle still brown and spotted
with a broken wing. This must be one of the eagle's young, he thought.
Looking around he found some sturdy twigs and some vines from the
trees. He fashioned a crude splint so that the eaglet could lift the
whole wing.
The older bird cried out again and circled a opening in a ledge
just above Karlek. The man could see that there was a nest there and
knew that the eagle wanted him to put the young bird in the nest. This
was done and the eagle came and sat once more on the side of the nest
looking at Karlek. It was at this moment that peace again returned to
the old man. His prayers had been answered and he knew his wife would
complete the journey.
Karlek returned to the little camp at the bottom of Denali, the
great one, and told his wife about the entire experience. He noticed
that she seemed stronger and there was a glint in her eyes again. He
made up his mind that he would need to keep praying to this God who
could make things happen so quickly.
Returning to the Tanana River they discovered that some of the
families had returned. One of the men said that they had a vision three
nights before and they left the
place that they had found in the valley and came back to keep the
village alive. Karlek was overjoyed. It was three nights before that he
had the encounter with the two eagles.
The trip back to Knik took five days and when they had gotten
back there was a note waiting for them from Rangak telling them that he
would be there to bring them to his home at the beginning of July,in
six days. The date on the letter showed that it had been sent over four
weeks ago.
They had another two days before he was to arrive. This gave
Ivanya time to rest and time for both of them to visit once more with
the old priest who had meant so much to them.
On the second of July Rangak showed up at the village with his
son, now fourteen years old. The boy was handsome and had many of the
features of his grandfather which pleased Karlek though he tried not to
show this pleasure.
The boy's parents had named him James Karl after his two
grandfathers.
Rangak, too was starting to show his years, but in a way that
seemed to have given him more maturity. He explained to them that they
would be traveling part of the way on flat land that came between two
large ranges of mountains. This time of year the land was clean and
soft. The dogs had no trouble on the paths that seemed to be almost new
in their appearance.
The four of them left the next day after Rangak had gotten some
supplies from their little store in Anchorage. He also sold a great
many furs and "ulu's", the little knives that they had been making for
over fifty years.
Rangak told his father that this was a new land that they were
going to, one that belonged to the English, though it was mostly
indian. The area was starting to get settlers looking for gold, silver
and copper. He told his mother that they were a rough bunch who drank a
lot of the white man's whiskey and made lots of noise, but they were
honest with him at his trading post.
He told them about the post. "We have had to make it larger
several times and it is still too small. People come to stay overnight
and so we have had to add places for the travellers to sleep. The
little lights that we have made for so many years are still in demand,
as are the food bowls that you taught us to make. When people cannot
take it anymore and want to leave, we buy what they have to sell and
this gives us goods to trade and sell to newcomers. As you know each
year I come down to Anchorage and meet one of our ships and pick up
what we will need for the next year. This is how I send the monies back
to you."
The father heard this and was pleased. He turned to James and
asked, "Are you going to come into the family business?" The boy
thought for a few minutes and said, "I want to go into the business but
there is another place that I think you should be looking at to open a
trading post. One of the things that seemed to be needed is fresh
foods and meats. When I am old enough I am going to the United States
and get some land and start, what the American's call a ranch.
The old man laughed and said "Rangak he is certainly one of us.
He already has an eye for the future and also the wandering urge. You
are teaching him well."
Rangak laughed and said, " He seems to teach us as well. He is
very good at trading for gold and though there is very little he knows
how to trade for it. He is one of the reasons that we made such a good
profit last year." The old man asked, "How much of the profit came from
his work?" Probably one hundred and fifty dollars, father." "If that is
the case then we shall set aside ten percent of that money for him and
he now is part of the business. All the gold he trades for he will get
his percentage for his new start in America.
Tell me James where do you want to go in America?" The boy
answered, "There is a territory called the Dakota territory where they
say corn and wheat grow along with potatoes. Also there are animals
there to supply meat and fur. I think that this is where I'll have the
best chance." The two older men listened and they heard themselves at
an earlier time and in a different setting saying the same thing.

CHAPTER 19
Karlek and Ivanya had died several years earlier. They had gone
back to San Francisco and for a time Ivanya seemed to grow stronger and
Karlek had hopes that they would have a still long life together. They
were both buried in the Russian cemetery where the plot they had chosen
was shaded by a large tree.
Gold was discovered in Alaska in 1880 near the Gastineau Channel
area and the first influx of settlers since the Purchase started the
towns of Juneau, Douglas and Treadwell, near the mines.
Prospectors went into the interior to prospect the Upper Yukon
valley. It was here that they started the famous Klondike gold rush in
1896. It was here that the trading post and hotel called Kani was
located.
Rangak and Elizabeth had planned well and had prospered. James
Karl was now a young man and he had amassed a good deal of money in his
gold trading. Enough, in fact, to put together the things that he would
need to go to the Territory of the Dakotas. He had taken a wife, an
indian girl named Pohatas or Bright One. The name was good for she was
wise in ways that made the older ones marvel. She was able to get
everything in order for the trip while James went about his final
trading. The two men discussed the ways that he would send the furs
and the meats and vegetables to the trading post. It was decided that
they would use indians as guides and trappers. They would be able to do
what was needed far quicker than could the young man. It was agreed
that one trip a year James would come back home and one trip a year
Rangak would come to their home to see what else would be of value to
the business.
The trip to the new land was difficult and if the young man were
not married to Bright One there would have been problems with the
Indian bands that roamed the area, searching for the "pale faces" who
had tried to take their lands from them.
When they got to the land they found that it had become one of
the United States. This was

something that they had not even thought about back at the trading post.
Pushing southward they found an area where
the land was good and water was plentiful. The land looked much like
the where they had just come from.
Bright One said they should start their farm near the water and
put their tent near the center of the land so that they could see in
all directions. This would be the way that they would measure the lines
of their land. The river was swift and looked as if it would be good
for fishing, thought James.
They spent the next several weeks getting set up and learning the
ways of the indians in the area. The chief, Running Antelope, saw that
they had come in friendship and a trust was formed. James told the
chief of his plans to hire some of the indians to take goods back to
the trading post in the Yukon. The chief said that he would pick out
the men for him to use. The pay would go to the tribe to buy from the
white man.

The days had been long and good for the new family. The indians
helped them to build fences and pens for the animals that would feed
them during the first winter. Running Antelope showed them how to plant
wheat and how to fish for trout in the river. James knew that the
winter would come and they would not be able to hunt and fish when the
heavy snows came. Bright One took most of the fish and prepared them to
be stored in a small root cellar that she made for just such a time.
The indian women came to trust the bright smiling young woman from
another tribe.
Running Antelope told James that he must go to the capitol and
register his land or other white men would come and take it from him.
He was worried about leaving his wife alone but the indian assured him
that they would see that she was not bothered. The next day
James made a map showing the boundaries of his land. After it was done
he prepared to walk to the city. Running Antelope laughed at him and
said that the distance was too

great for him to walk there and back before the cold weather set
in. The chief told his son to get one of the chief's ponies and take it
to James. The boy was to go with him to see that no harm came to him.
He was told that this was his brother and that meant that he also was a
son of the chief.
The next day the two men started our for the capitol. The trip
was straight south and for the first few days the ride was painful for
the young man from Alaska. He had never ridden a horse and it was hard
to learn to sit with out feeling every bounce. The young indian,
Sitting Bear, laughed as he watched his new friend. Finally on the
third day he showed him how to use the blanket to take the pressure off
the body.
After a two week ride they reached the capitol, Boise City. This
was a new and strange sight to the men. James Karl had heard about San
Francisco from his father and his grandfather but he had never seen so
many buildings and people in one place. He was afraid that he would not
be able

to answer the questions about the land. These people may be too smart
for him.
They rested on the outskirts of the town for a day and then he
went to the office where he was to record his map. It was almost too
easy, he thought. James wanted to see what the settlers who were
going inland were buying. He also wanted to buy some things for them to
use back at the farm which was now called a ranch. It seems that if you
raise cattle it's a ranch. If you raise crops it is a farm. He had
laughed and said what do they call his place for he was raising cattle
and crops. It would be called The Kani Farm & Ranch Co.
When he returned to his home he was surprised to see that there
were many logs cut and being shaped into a large cabin. A stone
fireplace was already in place and he could see that it had already
been used. He wondered how she had managed all of the things that had
happened while he was gone.
The answer came quickly as three men and an

older woman came from behind the logs with Bright One. The men had long
beards and he could see that two of them were his age, while one was
much older, about his father's age.
Bright One saw him and came running. "James these people, the
Smith's, came by right after you left. They had some trouble with
Indians on the other side of the mountains. Running Antelope said that
they were indians that were fighting the soldiers and were killing all
of the whites who came through their lands.
The two young men had their wives killed and when they got here
they were tired and hungry. I talked to them and then to Running
Antelope who also talked to them. He told them that we were all friends
in this valley and they must follow the rules that you had set with the
indians.
Mr. Smith said that they were going to the Washington Territory
and asked if they could stay with their wagons for the winter. Running
Antelope told them that they could camp on the other side of the river.
Mr. Smith saw that we did not have any place but the tent and
went and talked to his sons and the indians. A few days later they were
bringing in these logs and building the fireplace. Karl we are going to
have a house!" She exclaimed. " Now you can make your mark." she said.
The days passed quickly, the cabin was finally finished and furs
were hung over the windows and on the floor. It was not difficult for
Karl, as he was now called by everyone, to make a table and some
benches. He had bought some pots and shovels and hoes while he was at
the capitol. Now he was ready to start the ranch and farm.
The weather changed his mind. It was turning colder and the days
were getting shorter. He had hoped to hunt for some of the buffalo so
that he could have some furs to send to his father. He also wanted to
send him other things to sell.
 He had seen the indian women making beautiful blankets and he
wondered if they would sell some to him. He approached the chief to ask
him how to approach the women about the blankets. The chief said that
he would talk to the women and see if they would sell any of the
blankets. Karl told him that this would be a way for the indians to
make some of the white man's gold.
Three days later the indian came back to the log house. Walking
behind him were three of the indian women. A meeting was held and it
was agreed that the Kani Kompany would buy all the blankets the women
could supply for two dollars, gold. The women said that they would have
them ready for the spring so that they could take them to the main
trading post.
Karl had another idea and the next day he went to the older Smith
and asked if one of his boys would take a message to California for
him. It was to go to San Francisco and San Diego. If the boy could
leave now he would beat the snows on the way there and could start back
from the companies southern store and arrive at the beginning of the
spring. The older man asked his sons if they were interested and Paul,
the tallest one said he would.
Karl bought four of the blankets from the women and had the boy
take them to the two stores of the company. He gave the young man fifty
dollars in gold for his expenses and told him to find out how many they
would like for their stores at three dollars each. The boy left the
next day. The elder Smith reminded the boy of the kindness shown by the
young man from Alaska and the indians that lived nearby.
Pohatas had made a fine wife for Karl. She ran the home and
helped with the things that they needed for themselves. She also
changed her name
to Polly. She said that it sounded like she was a "white eye." Karl
laughed. "You and I look as much like a white eye as does Running
Antelope, or me for that matter."
She smiled her shy smile and gave him a kiss.
"Go to work, you fool. How many pelts and skins have you gotten this
week?" He smiled at her and went about his work.
They had been here for two years and they were doing well. His
father bought thirty of the blankets for the store in the Yukon. James
Karl sent twenty-five to the store in San Francisco.
Susan would sell all they sent.
San Diego was a different matter. The indians in Mexico could
make them as cheap as the indians of Idaho so there was no sense in
sending them so far south.
For his part Karl was buying the Ulu's, the little knives that
worked so well for cutting and skinning. Karl was also sending his
first shipment of meat. He had waited until the first cold came so that
the meat would last. He salted the meat and tied it in large cloth
bags.
The indians built some sleds that were pulled by horses. They
could carry four or five quarters on each sled. Each took two extra
horses. Sitting Bear was in charge of taking goods to the trading post
in the Yukon. He did some of the trading for things that could be used
in their village.
On the other side of the river where the Smith's still lived a
small settlement started to grow. The little town was called
Grangeville and the towns people were growing wheat and potatoes. The
towns people started to form a government and
set up a school. Modern times were coming to the area.
 One day shortly before spring old Mathias Smith came to Karl with
a request. The people of the town wanted to elect their first mayor and
the only one that they wanted was Karl. Smith was the spiritual leader
of the community and he was sent to ask young Karl.
Karl knew that if he were to take the job it would interfere with
the everyday operation of the business. He and Polly had two children
and she was spending much time teaching them the ways of past, both her
heritage and that of James Karl. She also made sure that they were able
to see all of the good qualities of the indians that were their
friends, and the whites who were always there for them.
Karl talked over the situation with Polly who always seemed to
have the right answers. He remembered that his mother and his
grandmother were also women of decision. Polly listened carefully to
his words and then went to see Mr. Smith. She had
started going to church with her children. Sometimes Karl went also.
She talked at great length with the older women and then talked to
people in the town. She was well liked and respected, always there to
help.
A few nights later when the children were asleep she and Karl
talked again. It was decided that if he became Mayor he would have to
have someone come into the business with them. They first talked about
one of the Smith boys; but Karl felt that they would not be able to
handle the responsibility to them as well as to the other stores in the
Caine Companies.
Karl looked at his wife and said, "I have a feeling that the one
that would work out the best would be Sitting Bear. He is honest and
knows the ways of the business and the routes to the north. He has
always been interested in what we do and how we have built such a big
business. The old chief is still in good health and Sitting Bear could
be the one to run things with us until our children are big enough to
take over."
This was the first time that the thought of their children taking
over had come up. Polly had secretly wanted their daughter, Alexis to
become a teacher. She was bright and curious about everything. Even
though she was only five years old she already was showing the signs of
having her mothers wisdom. Other children, some even older, came to her
to settle their arguments or give them advice.
Joshua, the older one, was now eight and was looking more like
his father each day. He went to school and then did the chores around
the house which had grown to six rooms. He had even taken one of the
summer trips to the Yukon and helped with the animals on the way. Polly
had always hoped that he would go into the business and now it sounded
as if that would happen.
It was decided, that night, he would be the mayor and the next
day they went to the old chief to ask if they could talk to Sitting
Bear about coming to work for them. The chief agreed with the promise
that if he should be needed back on the reservation he would be allowed
to come at once. There was no hesitation with their answer and the
chief called his son to the tent.
He spoke privately to the boy for some minutes and then asked
Karl to explain what he wanted of the young man. Karl outlined what he
wanted Sitting Bear to do and for how long. He agreed that if he was
needed back on the reservation he would be able to leave at once. He
would work until such time as the children would take over the
business, and then would receive a special payment each month for the
rest of his life. His pay would be twenty-five dollars a month and ten
percent of all new business he brought to the company.
All of this was overwhelming to the young man and he needed time
to think this through. He wanted to talk to his new bride, Little Bird,
and hear what she thought. He told them that he would have answer for
them in two moons.
The answer came and the work began. Sitting
Bear had much to learn about the ways of the white man in business. He
saw that there were things that could be done to make the company even
bigger. He had some ideas that he would like to try and told Karl that
he thought he could bring in more business. First he had to know all of
the resources of the Kani and Caine companies. He did not want to waste
time on things that they had tried and did not work.

CHAPTER 20

The year was 1912 and the state had gone for Woodrow Wilson. Karl
had been elected to the state legislature and was gone for several
weeks at a time when they were in session. He was now forty-eight years
old. His children were grown and the boy Joshua or Joe as he was now
called was a young man of twenty-two. His younger sister, Alexis, was
away at school in the city of Boston, on the east coast of the United
States.
Sitting Bear had done well with the business. He had brought the
lumber business to the Caine Company. Just to the east of the city of
Grangeville there were large stands of timber which could be cut and
sawed and sold for great profit in other countries. The Caine Shipping
Company handled all of the shipping throughout the world. It appeared
as if the wood would never end.
At the same time in the same region new mines for gold were
opened and the company hired miners

to work for them, outfitting them and buying the gold from them at a
fair price. The indians continued to make the blankets and also to melt
the gold into jewelry which sold for great profit. Everyone was
getting rich.
The trading post in the Yukon became a town called Whitehorse and
had a large population for the area. Rangak was now seventy years old
and Elizabeth had died a year earlier. He too had hired one of the
local indians to help him in the trading post. He had taught him to
read, write and count money, as well as how to trade his way. He soon
found out that Running Wolf, the indian, was a better trader than he
was.
 One day he called in the indian to sit and talk with him. He told
him that he wanted Running Wolf to take over the management of the
business. He would pay him thirty dollars a month plus twenty-five
percent of the profits. Running Wolf agreed. A few weeks later the
older man packed his things took his money and gold and headed for his

son James Karl and his family. He wanted to make sure that he would
still deal with the store in the North. Rangak also wanted to go and
see his brother, Kolosh, one last time and to feel the warm air again.
The trip to the business in Idaho was made easy by the fact that he was
travelling with the indians who had just brought a shipment into the
north.
His grandson, Joshua, he would never call him Joe, was the leader
and when he heard that grandfather Rangak was coming back with him he
was very happy. His grandfather had always told him stories of the
family. He had told him of the great mountain of his great grandfather
,and the family before him. He listened eagerly about the eagle who was
friends with the family. He had seen eagles around where they had lived
but none had ever come to the village.
He knew that his father would be pleased to see grandfather for
he had often suggested that he move to their home.
When the little party arrived back at Grangeville with the goods
from the north and the
special passenger a great feast was held. Rangak had been there many
times before on his annual trip but this was special to all, for this
was to be his home.
Only James Karl was not there. He was at the state capitol. There
were big things happening. The railroad now had over two thousand miles
of track in the state and people were coming far too fast for the old
timers.
There was trouble in Europe and people were afraid of large
amounts of foreigners coming to the state.
There were a few miles of paved roads in the capitol and now cars
were making their appearance. Lighting was by gas and the new
electric lights were also seen in the city. Idaho was growing and many
resented the fact. Karl was not one of them for he could see that this
could only help his business as well as others. He had opened a store
here in the capitol and had one of the Smith boys running the business.
All the boy had to do was to sell and order. He had a bank to make
deposits, and monies were held out for salaries and special expenses.
Soon Karl bought the building where the store was and added some
sleeping quarters for himself, over the store. This was for the times
he had to be in the capitol.
Several days later Karl returned to Grangeville to find that his
father had come to live with them. He was overjoyed and somewhat
boastful of all that he had accomplished.
The older one could see that in him and one day when they were
talking said to the younger man, "It must make you very proud to think
that you have all of this because of your grandfather and grandmother.
Just think what it would be like if we still lived in one of the little
villages in Alaska. We would still be trading for skins and bowls. We
owe a lot to our ancestors and it is only right that we always remember
who we are and how we got to where we are at this time." Karl knew that
he had just learned a lesson in humility and hoped he was smart enough
to use it. He said to his father, "I only hope that when I am older I
will be able to see all of the things you see. That my
children will learn from me as I still learn from you." The son gave
the father a gentle hug and there were tears in his eyes.
A month later a letter came for Rangak from his brother Kolosh.
He told him how much he was looking forward to his coming. He had much
to show him and to talk to him about. The train came right to their
town and he would meet him when he got there as soon as he knew when he
was coming. Rangak had never seen a train. In fact he had never
seen a picture of one. Was it safe? How fast did it go? How does it
stop? There was a fear of this new and huge machine when James Karl
showed him a picture.
Karl explained away all of his questions and then told him that
it would get him there in less than ten days. The trip by horse and
stage would take a month. The old man agreed to go on the "Iron Horse,"
as it was known to the indians. Karl would take him to the station at
the capitol. He wanted to show the other store to his father and also
the mines that they owned.
Money was no longer any problem for the family. They had all they
could ever spend, and yet to anyone who knew them they had not changed
from when they came to the area. Polly was still the one the women came
to with their problems. The indians always came to the Tanana's before
talking with anyone else. No one was jealous of their success and
everyone wished them good fortune. Karl had represented them well,
first as their Mayor then as a State Representative and now as a State
Senator.
There were those who wanted him to be the next governor but he had
always cut them off.
Three weeks later the two men left for the state capitol. Rangak
boarded a train that was to take him to San Francisco and then to San
Diego.
It would be good to stop in San Francisco and see the graves of
his parents. He would visit the store there and the docks where the
boats were kept when they were not at sea.
When he arrived at the city he was amazed to see how new it
looked. He had not heard of the
devastating earthquake and fire a few years earlier. He marvelled at
the largeness and the grandeur of the city.
He felt that he did not belong. Money was not the problem, he had
plenty of that. The people were so different. It seemed as if everyone
was in a hurry.
He rested for a day and then went to the Russian Cemetery, to the
graves of his parents. As he sat there and looked at their markers he
wondered if they could know of the success that they had brought to the
family. He was glad that these were his parents. He had seen so many
who did not have the upbringing that he and his brother had. His eyes
misted and the thought that he would be joining them soon brought forth
feelings of sadness and joy. He wondered how soon it would be.
That afternoon he went to the docks to see what their little
ships now looked like. He was shocked. All up and down two rows of
docks were ships with "Caine" as part of their name. There were sailing
ships and ships with big tubes coming
from the center of them.
He saw a man going on to one of the ships and asked him about the
tubes. The man looked surprised and then laughed and told him that the
ships were powered by steam engines.
The older man went to the offices of the Caine Shipping Company
and asked to see the person who ran the business. A tall good looking
man came out of the office in the back of the room and introduced
himself as Jacob Ashton. The name Ashton rang a bell in Rangak's
memory. "My name is Rangak Tanana. I think that I am one of the owners
of this company."
"Mr. Tanana, I am the son of Susan Ashton. Your father and mother
gave her the business to manage here in San Francisco many years ago.
She trained me to manage the shipping lines. My sister manages the
three stores here, and my older brother handles every thing to the
north. He is the one that ships to you in the Yukon."
The old man remembered that he had met the other brother, Matthew
Ashton, several times on his trips to Anchorage to pick up goods and
send down the money for the year. He wondered where all the money was
now.
As if sensing his questions, Jacob said, "I suppose that you
would like to see all of the records of your holdings. Mother still
keeps all of the books and we'll go to see her. She will be happy to
know that you are still alive. Why are you here, sir?" the younger man
asked."
I have stopped trading in the Yukon and turned the business over
to one of the men who had worked for me. He will still deal only with
the Caine boats. Everything will still be the same. I am going to San
Diego to see my brother. After that I will go to live with my son and
his family in the state of Idaho. The companies seem to be doing well
and it is time for the old to step aside for the new."
Jacob smiled at the last statement. There was something on his
mind and now was a good time for him to bring it up to the owner. He
had talked it over with his mother and his brother and sister. "
"Mr. Tanana," he said. "There is an idea that I have had and this
is the time to talk it over with you. I think it would be a good idea
if your family changed it's name from Tanana. It is a good name but
with the sentiments of the people in the country we could do better if
the owners had American names."
The old man was furious. What right had this person, who worked
for the company, who worked for him, to propose such an idea. The man
was too angry to say anything, and Jacob could see that he had better
leave the matter alone. He had picked a name for them but this was not
the time to bring it up. He asked the older man to come to his
mother's to see what the companies were doing.
Along the way, riding in silence in the younger man's car, Jacob
made sure to pass all the three stores. Each had a large sign with the
name of the Caine Company in bright gold letters on a light blue
background with a picture of a great mountain in the center.
Rangak smiled at this. It was good that the old scenes of the
family never die. He knew that he should go back, once more to see the
mountain of his family. He had been there three times in his life and
he always had a feeling of belonging.
Rangak was starting to lose his anger as they approached a large
house sitting on top of a hill, with a brick road leading to the front.
Susan, looking younger than her years met him at the door with a hug.
She was like a little girl with a new doll. Her eyes twinkled and the
laugh lines in her face gave her a look of a happy
person.
"Well Rangak" I see that you found Jacob. You must have seen the
boat docks. What do you think of your `little' fleet of ships? I hope
that it has met with your approval. Did you get to see the old store,
and the new ones? Was there anything you didn't like? God has been
good to all of us."
Jacob laughed and said, "Slow down. You are going too fast for
me. I'm not leaving this minute or even this day. Everything looks
wonderful. You have done a good job; but that's why mother picked you.
She always said that you could run the business better than father. He
finally agreed with her. The stores are very nice. How did you come up
with the mountain drawing?" "When Kolosh was here a couple of years ago
he came up with the idea. He said that it represented the spirit of the
family." she told the man. "He has put it on the other stores and it is
part of the flags of the shipping lines. You see we have become very
civilized and people see the picture and they are reminded of the
company that has always been here for them and honest. I think your
great grandfather would have been proud of all of this."
Rangak listened to all of this and then he spoke. "Your son tells
me that with all of this we should change our last name. Has he told
you of this silly idea?"
Susan looked at him seeing the hurt and also the confusion in his
face. "Rangak, we are older than many others. You are older than I and
you have spent your life in the north where there is very little change
going on these days. There are many more people there than twenty years
ago. But the world is turning around the United States. With all that
is happening in other countries it would be well to have a name that
shows that this is an American company. That people can identify with.
It is hard to identify with Tanana without thinking of the Orient. I
know that this is the name of your family and has been for hundreds of
years, but times have changed and so have the places we do business
with all over the world. We need to be American all the way through."
Rangak sat and listened to all of this and was trying to work it
out in his mind. Why was the name so wrong? The people in the north had
trusted this name since the early 1800's. What would he call himself?
What would others call him? He was afraid that he would even forget a
new name. He did not know what name would still bring honor to the
family.
"I suppose you have picked out a name for
the family, Susan." The woman sat quietly. She could see the anguish in
his eyes, the tears, the sadness. "I could not come up with one that
seemed to do justice to the family, but Jacob has."
she said. "Tell him Jacob." his mother said. "I think that I
have a name that will keep the reputation of the company as well as
it's link to both the past and the future." the younger man said. I
would change the name to `Caine'. This would allow everyone to still do
business using the name as always, but when people looked at the names
of the owners and principals they would see Caine, a good old `Yankee'
name."
The older man sat and thought in silence. The air in the room was
heavy and the feelings were unlike any other any of them had ever
experienced.
Finally Rangak spoke. "How long does it take for one of our ships
to get to Anchorage?" "We can do it with good winds in two weeks." The
man answered with a quizzical look. "How long does it take for one of
the ships to get to San Diego?" Rangak again asked. "We can get one of
our steam ships there in four days."
Rangak smiled at them and then he said. "I want you to get me to
Anchorage and have a ship wait for me. I am going to the mountain. It
has always given our family the answers. I will go to find the eagle
and the answer."
 The boy was lost in this strange request, but Susan knew what the
man was looking for and that this would help him to find the way to his
heart.

CHAPTER 21

The trip to Anchorage and Knik was uneventful, however Rangak

found out that the United States government was about to build a large
port and a railway head in the camp known as Ship Creek Landing. He
wondered what would happen when people came and there was a need for
supplies and housing. He knew that the project was still a year away.
Age had not dulled the old man's mind and even now was thinking of new
ways to make money.
After landing, Rangak found a wagon and horses for his trip to
the great mountain. Stopping at the home of his father and mother he
soon found out that there was nobody left who remembered the family.
He made his way north and to the little mining settlement of Wasilla
and to Teeland's store. He had met old Teeland before and now stopped
to spend the night and catch up on lost time.
Several days later he arrived at the Trapper Creek trading post.
This was where all of his
family had always started their journey to the western side of the
mountain. Here were the trails of the first Rangak and Karlek. This was
the way of the family. The way to knowledge.
He remembered the story of how the great bird came and landed by
his grandfather. He had heard the story of how his father had also seen
the bird; how it guided him to the last of the village people. He knew
that he must camp at the same spot. He wondered if he could find it and
if the girl would be on the rock. Who was she and what did she look
like.
The man continued through the passes and the lowlands between the
giant mountain. He was afraid of the mountain, of it's power. He had
never seen anything as large and forbidding as Denali. After a
journey of three days he came to the place where he knew the bird had
been and where his father had stayed.
Making camp in the bright sunlight of the long days, he marvelled
at the clear picture before him. He had always heard that part of the
mountain had a cloud ring around it so that you could not see
all of the giant. Today was different. Different from his other visits
so long ago. He could see for miles in every direction. Looking up as
he slowly made his way to the north he came upon the rock ledge that he
had always known was there but had never been able to find. There was
the place where the woman was to be seen. He saw nothing.
Settling down for some rest he decided that this is where he was
to find the answer. As the hours slipped by he dozed in the sun.
Suddenly he was jolted from his nap by the shrill cry of an eagle. As
he looked up he saw the giant bird circling the rock,landing on it and
then slowly rising to the sky. Rangak knew that he must climb to the
rock. That here was the truth that he needed to find.
Slowly the old man went up as the eagle stayed up near the rock.
After three hours of climbing he reached the rock and sat down to see
what he was supposed to see up on this wide ledge. He looked at the
ground and at the sides of the cliff. Still he could see nothing that
looked different. He started to think that he had come up to this place
for nothing. With the rushing of wind the giant eagle slowly landed
next to the shaken man. The eagle looked up at Rangak as if he knew
him. Rangak remembered how his grandfather had patted the eagle and he
bent down to stroke the feathers. The eagle ruffled his feathers and
looked as if he were smiling at the older man.
Moving away from the man the eagle hopped out in front and turned
to the man as if to ask him to follow him. Rangak was puzzled but moved
behind the bird toward the far edge of the rock.
When he was almost at the edge he saw a small hole in the rock.
Getting down on his knees he looked in and saw a shiny object. Reaching
in he pulled it out and saw that other things were attached to it.
There was an early knife that the family had designed and which they
still made good money on. Also there was a small pouch which he opened
and found some gold dust.
The thing that interested him the most was the paper-like
material that he pulled out and looked at. It had many pictures and
signs on it and it seemed to be telling a story.
The older man was tired and climbed down to his campsite. After
eating his meal he started to try and understand the story behind the
drawings. Slowly he realized that this was the story of his family
from the time they had come to this land until his father had left. He
was curious why his father did not take this record with him and then
he understood.
When he had come up here looking for the rest of their village he
had missed the hole where he had found the picture map. Everything on
the map pointed to the south and every thing seemed to be going
forward. This was too much to try and understand now. He was tired and
went to sleep.
The next morning he awoke feeling better than he had in a long
time. He prepared to go back, though he still did not have an answer.
Suddenly he saw the eagle again spinning his

way around the side of the mountain soaring on the currents, like a
ship on the sea; always going forward with the winds. He thought about
all of this and just as he was to leave he heard the cry of the giant
bird once more as it came to land at his feet. He knew that this was a
sign, but of what? Was this the end of the past and the beginning of a
new future?
He knew now what course he must follow. Rangak slowly turned to
look at the eagle once more and then knowing what he must do headed
back down the mountain.
 CHAPTER 22

When Rangak arrived back at Susan's house he sent a telegram to

everyone who must share in the decision; Kolosh, Piotr, James Karl and
Joshua.
When Susan heard who was coming she said, "I see that the old ways
still last. No woman."
At the end of the second week everyone had arrived. Jacob took
them on a tour of San Francisco. They also spent much time seeing to
the business, properties, books and paperwork dealing with the Caine
Company and it's holdings.
Rangak could see that the others were getting restless for he had
not told them anything yet as to why he wanted them to come here. He
asked Susan if she would mind having all of them to dinner as well as
Jacob. He wanted to discuss this in as pleasant an atmosphere as
possible without any other distractions.
Susan was happy to this, and set about calling the various hotels
to prepare the dishes that she was sure they would all like. She asked
that everything be delivered by six that evening.
That night was one that was to change the destiny of all who were
concerned. Rangak brought the subject of changing their names to an
`Americanized' version. He had Jacob explain what would be the
advantage and to answer all of the questions that were put to him.
Susan was proud of this man who had become almost one of the family of
those whom he was talking to, and she could see that they listened to
what he had to say.
When Jacob was finished Kolosh looked at the two older sons and
said, "Well let's hear what you have to say. It will affect you the
most."
Piotr spoke first. "I think that it's a great idea. People down
where we live can hardly say my name and think I am a half-caste
Chinaman. I have wanted to change my name to Peter for a long time. It
would also help in the business. As for the name Caine, we use it every
day in our business and it would make others feel that we belong."

James Karl was very quiet for a moment and then spoke softly. "There is
a conflict in me about this. We have a proud name that has become known
as a name of honesty and fairness in our part of the country. The
stores in Alaska still use the old name, Kani, and people believe in
that name and what it stands for. I am in politics and people know
me by the name Tanana. If I want to continue in politics I may have a
hard time explaining why my name had to be changed. Joshua, here, is
already called Joe so he has no problem and it would be easy for him to
make the change. I think that my father would be very sad to have such
a thing happen though he sees it as good for the company and it's
growth. Perhaps there is another way to please us all. I have some
ideas, but I need to work them out. I will do that tonight, but for now
let us hear the rest and at breakfast I will tell you what I have come
up with overnight."
Jacob and Susan had never met James Karl before but they could
see that he was the one who
would carry the rest. He had a way about him that made others listen
and respect him. They could see why he was such a force in the politics
of Idaho. They had read his name in the papers when the state was
mentioned. Now they had met the person and they were impressed and glad
that he had come.
The following day they all met in the garden of the house. James
Karl had them all sit and face him so that they would all be part of
the discussion. "I have an idea that may work for all of us." he said.
For our boys there is no problem. They have been born in this
country and they are more like the people of their area then of the old
family. We have been teaching them the ways of the business and they
know that our way can never change if we are to continue to prosper.
Jacob is like one of us and I have no worries with him running the
shipping lines. In fact as has always been the custom of our
grandfathers and our fathers he should own a part of the lines and
share in its profits just as his mother did so many years ago.
As for our parents, they should not have to change their names
for these are the names that people have grown to know and respect. A
solution may be to set up a permanent monthly amount of money to be
paid to each of them as a profit. Their names would appear as investors
in the various holdings, but not as policy makers. We would all know
that in truth they would still make all of the decisions."
Susan was glad that this man had come. She saw that he was the
one that the future of Caine Companies rested with. She felt a soft
glow of pride as he spoke of her son, much the same as I
85858585858585858585858585858585 8585
8585
8585
8686
8686
878
7¤87878787878787878787µ8787§878787878787878787878787878787878787-8787-
8787 8787!8787"8787#8787$8787%8787&8787'8787(8787)8787*8787+8787,8787-
8787.8787/878708787187872878738787487875878768787787878878798787:8787;
8787
<8787=8787>8787?8
787
@8787A8787B8787C8787D8787E8787F8787G8787H8787I8787J8787K8787L8787M8787N
8787O8787P8787Q8787R8787S8787T8787U8787V8787W8787X8787Y8787Z8787[878
7\8787]
8787
^8787_8787`8787a8787b8787c8787d8787e8787f8787g8787h8787i8787j8787k8787l
8787m8787n8787o8787p8787q8787r8787s8787u8787ýÿÿÿv8787w8787x8787y8787z87
87{8787|8787}8787~87878787€8787vanya had spoken to Karlek about her in
the old days, so many years ago.
Rangak also saw the wisdom in his son's words and it was he that
was to make the change easier for everyone. "James Karl, again you know
the right things to say and do. You are more like your grandfather than
like me. To make this easier I want you to take over all of my
holdings. You will give the money that I will need to live on and to
do some things that I have always wanted to do. I will be out of the
business and will make none of the decisions. You have shown yourself
to be of great wisdom and strength in all matters. You are honest and
just and so it is only right that you take over now. I am getting too
old to handle all of this anyway."
James Karl and the others were stunned. This was the man who had
taken over most of the work to keep the business growing.
Kolosh sat and thought for a moment, then said, "Well Piotr are
you ready also to take the reins of the business and keep it running as
the family has for almost hundred years?"
The boy was quiet for several minutes. The time seemed endless
and the breaths of everyone could be heard. Finally he stood up and
turned to his father. There were tears in his eyes as he spoke. "You
and mother have always given me a sense of what is right and wrong. If
I could only do half as well as you and uncle Rangak have done I would
consider myself a great success. If you trust me with all of this I
will try to never let you down."
There was much crying and handshaking and Susan was being crushed
in the hugs of the two older men.
The rest of the day was taken up with matters of the present
companies and which one's to keep and which to sell or disband. Joe and
Peter, the names for the two boys, Joshua and Piotr, spent the better
part of a week planning how they would meet and when. It was decide
that they would meet each summer in San Diego and each winter in a
place that they could easily get to despite the weather.
All agreed that Susan's son was the head of the shipping lines
and that he would get what was promised. Each of the two older men
would get Twenty-five hundred dollars each month. If they needed more
all they had to do was to ask.
Rangak and Kolosh decided that they would take a trip together
and spend their days catching up on the past. They planned to see the
rest of the
United States and then go to Europe. Then they would return and go to
the Orient and Russia, where the family had begun.
Jacob made all of the arrangements for all of the trips except to
the Orient. There were war clouds gathering in the world and he felt
better about waiting until the two men got back before planning the
rest of the trip.
They would take trains to all parts of the United States where a
train would go and then they would take river boats to the other
places. When they had finished the East coast it would be early
in 1915 and they would spend four months in Europe returning on the May
trip of the Cunard liner Lusitania.

CHAPTER 23

James Karl was narrowly defeated for governor of his state by

Moses Alexander. Grangeville became the county seat of Idaho County.
The man returned to full time management of the Caine holdings and his
family. Joe had taken the Caine name and had moved to a little town in
Texas. It was here that he brought his father one day in the spring of
1917.
It had been a year since his grandfather and uncle Kolosh had
died in the sinking of the Lusitania. The family was wrapped in grief
and the thoughts were still painful. The once bubbling Susan had become
solitary and morose, according to Jacob who had come to the funeral in
San Francisco's Russian cemetery. He was buried, along with Uncle
Kolosh, next to their parents. Two generations of the family lay in the
ground overlooking the bay.
Joe met his father at the train station. It was a reunion of two
men not just father and son. They were more than that. They were the
last of a breed of men that had built an empire known for honesty and
not for greed.
Brownsville, Texas was the last stop on the eastern side of the
state. It is bordered by the Rio Grande River on it's south side, along
with the sleepy town of Matamoros, Mexico. This and the port less than
twenty miles away brought the young man to the town.
He saw this as a gateway to the eastern side of Mexico and also
to the giant port of New Orleans. It also made the Island of Cuba a
short trip. Cuba had sugar and tobacco. The best cigars in the world
came from the little island.
The river could be navigated by small boats and that opened up
the entire Texas-Mexican border to the traders of the Caine company.
From there it would be a short trip to start other stores and
business's in the south and then to the east.
Joe already had bought the town newspaper, paying a fair price
and keeping all of the staff on the payroll. The people of the town
never forgot this and they bought what they needed from the big store
with the picture of a mountain and an eagle on the front over the
doors.
There were other things that made the area
 one that the young man saw as a spot to start operations in the
southeast, where he saw the next big explosion of industry. Peter had
the western part of the United States under the Caine Company banner.
Growing in abundance in the area were sweet oranges. The area was
a mecca for fishing and that meant the sales to the middle and northern
parts of the country. He also knew that cattle could be shipped by rail
to the city and then be slaughtered and shipped to the south and east
in better condition than coming from the far west. It was here that he
built the company's first slaughter house.
All of this was secondary to the real reason for setting up of
the southeastern empire of Caine Company.
OIL was on Joe's mind. He had heard about the discovery of oil at
Spindletop in 1901, as well as the thousands who were flocking to the
area looking for the "black gold". Here was the reason for trading
posts, to help the person looking for goods to do their prospecting.
This was just like the gold rush he had heard about in Alaska and in
California.
The older man saw what his son had seen and was pleased with what
he had done. "Joshua, you have done well. You have carried on the
spirit of the Tanana's. Your grandfather would be proud of you. Do you
have good people working for you? Are you fair with everyone?" Joe
laughed and said, "To you I am still the little boy, Joshua. We will
visit what we have here and then you will be the judge of your own
questions. Also there is someone that I want you to meet."
For the next two days the two men roamed the area including a
visit to Matamoros. It was here that Joe showed his father their new
factory. Here were made the little knives that the family had

sold for generations. Now Joe had developed another knife that was very
slender and strong."This knife is for cutting out the good parts of the
fish. The part that is called the fillet. I cannot make them as fast as
the orders come in. The labor is much less here than in Brownsville and
it has given me an inside track to other goods. I am sending Pete new
designs in blankets and in jewelry."
The father saw that the boy had indeed taken up the company reins
and had allowed them to prosper while still doing good.
"I should not be surprised at all of this. I remember when you
took that first trip to your grandfather's store. Even then you were
seeing new things and new ways for our company to grow. There is much
trouble in Mexico with the bandits and the government is all mixed up.
How do you get on with all of these groups?"
The boy answered, with a smile. " It is simple father, I treat
everyone the same and I tell the bandits the story of the mountain and
the eagle and of our family. They see the truth and the wisdom of our
ancestors and they respect us for that. The townspeople have seen or
heard how I treat the people in Brownsville and know that I treat them
the same way. The government down here is happy because I have put
people to work and the people are happy for the same reason."
James was proud of this young man now only twenty-six years old
but wiser than most people twice his age.
On the fifth day of their visit, James asked his son when he was
coming home to see his mother and his sister. It seems that his sister
had started several schools in the little towns and was now looked on
as the head of all the schools in the area. The rumor was that she
would be going to the capitol as the first woman and youngest school
superintendent in the state. His mother was still working with the
women in town but also others come to her for advice and she has become
known as, "the wise woman of Idaho." More than most men she was trusted
by indians and whites alike.
Joe was happy to hear all of this for that would make his next
task that much easier. "Father, there is someone I want you to meet, a
girl." James laughed, "I was wondering when you were going to show me
this`person' you wanted me to meet. I didn't think it was a man." Joe
smiled shyly and said, "I have invited her to have dinner with us
tonight. Her name is Maria Antonia de la Vegas, and she is different
that any of the Mexican woman that you have ever seen."
The rest of the day the two men spent walking and talking until
the sun started to set. "I think we had better get ready to meet your
young lady, but what about her parents?" Joe said that they would meet
them tomorrow, if tonight went well. This last statement puzzled James
but he held his thoughts to himself.
The Brownsville Hotel was the best place to eat. The great dining
room had large comfortable chairs. The room was lit by a giant
chandelier and mirrors gave the room additional brilliance.
Between each panel of glass hung large maroon velvet swages from the
ceiling to the floor. It was into this setting the two men came.
The head waiter smiled at Joe and guided the two men to a private
booth near the back of the room. It was here that James Karl first saw
the girl that was to become his future daughter-in-law.
Maria Antonia de la Vegas was strikingly beautiful. Tall and with
a molded face and body she gave the appearance of a lady stepping from
a painting of the great masters. Her face was without a blemish and her
coloring was striking, with just a slight hint of darkness. Her eyes
were the bluest that James Karl had ever seen and her blond hair
cascaded down her shoulders. Her gown was the same color as the swages
in the room and made of a soft velvet that rustled as she stood. Her
eyes sparkled and a smile parted her lips.
"Father I have the honor to present Señorita Maria Antonia de la
Vegas of Monterrey Mexico. Maria this is my father, James Karl Tanana."
The food and the wine were excellent and James found that it was
easy to talk to this young lady who was much like his own Polly, wise
and kind, with a good sense of humor.
He had never seen a Mexican with such coloring and when he told
this to the young lady she explained that her family had come from
Castile, a part of Spain, and had settled in Mexico City. There were
many more who looked like her in color and hair. The young lady spoke
with a soft and almost melodious voice. There was a lilt to her words
that made James Karl think of the little birds of spring. Her look was
one of happiness, and when she looked at Joe anyone could see she was
deeply in love with the young man. James was sure that Polly would
approve but first there would have to be a meeting of the two of them.
Where it should be he did not know, but it had to be before a wedding.
He thought for a moment and then said to the two of them. "It would be
good if Señorita Vegas would meet your mother and sister and see where
your roots are before you make too many more plans. Also we should meet
her family." Maria answered, "We had also thought that this should
happen, Mr. Tanana. Tomorrow we would like you to come to our `casa' to
meet with my father and my mother. My sisters will be there but my
brothers will not for they are all working on some of our ranches."
The next day Joe and his father got into Joe's buggy and headed
south across the border. James wondered where the girl was and asked
his son. "She was escorted to their casa early this morning so that all
would be ready for us, when we get there.
The ride was bumpy and dusty. The road was not as good as the
trails back home and James felt that it would have been better on
horseback.
After travelling for about four hours they came to a small town
called Lineras. They stopped at a "cantina" for lunch. James Karl was
surprised to find that most of people seemed to know his son; and even
more surprised to find that his son spoke
their language. The father was impressed with what the boy had
accomplished in such a short time. After lunch the boy went to
the barn next store and brought out oats for the car. He put some extra
in the rear of the buggy. He told his father it was for the return
trip. When his father asked why he did not pay for it he was told that
he had brought the oats and that they had let him store them in the
barn. In return he would bring them foodstuffs from Brownsville when
needed. A wise young man indeed thought the father.
After riding for another three hours they came to a city that
took the breath away from the older man. It's size was immense,
spreading out in all directions.
Monterrey was big. It looked bigger than San Francisco, bigger
than Denver and certainly bigger than anything in Idaho.
Travelling along the eastern side of the city they came to a
tree-lined road that seemed to lead to some low hills. Ten minutes
later they came to
"Hacienda de la Vegas."
"Well, I guess we're here," said the young man. James was
breathless. In front of him was a wall ten feet high stretching at
least two hundred feet and in the center a huge wooden door carved with
doves and flowers and freshly painted in striking colors. The wall was
a brilliant white and seemed to turn and go around, for how far he had
no idea.
"I had the same look when I first saw it, but wait 'till you see
the inside." As if those were the secret words the huge gate opened and
the two men drove in.
James had always thought that Susan Ashton's house and the
governors mansion in his home state were the biggest and most beautiful
homes he had ever seen, but this topped all that he could imagine.
Sprawling in front of them was a house with a wide front porch over one
hundred feet long. Gardens of dazzling flowers were seen everywhere.
A fountain of tile sat in the center of the gardens with a walk way of
brick that led to the front of
the snow white house. The wall kept going around and out of sight on
both sides. It too was sparkling white on it's inside. Even the air
felt soft and there was a gentle breeze that stirred the roses and
carried their fragrance to the two men.
The front door opened and standing in the center was Maria,
dressed in a white gown that reached to the floor. In her hair was a
brilliant red flower unlike any that James Karl had ever seen. If she
was beautiful last night she was even more beautiful now, with the
sunlight sending rays of gold through her hair.
The two men started towards the house when a horseman came
charging by and without stopping pulled the hat from Joe's head. Riding
to the front door, he threw it to the girl. Joe turned to his father
and said, "That was Miguel, one of her brothers. He was not supposed to
be here, but I guess that the fact of your coming was too much for the
rest of the family not to come back so that they could see if you are
good enough for the
them." He laughed as he said this and James Karl laughed also.
The father and son continued to the front porch and were greeted
by Maria and her brother, Miguel.
The two men were taken to their rooms so that they could change and
get the dust from their bodies.
Hot baths were waiting and when James Karl got out of his bath he
found a change of clothes laid out and the dirty ones gone.
There were fresh oils for the body and when he tried them he
found that they eased his tired muscles. Before getting dressed he lay
down to relax and think about the meeting with Maria's family.
It was dark when there was a knock at the door and James Karl
woke with a start. He had fallen asleep and was not ready to go down to
meet the family. He called to the person who knocked and was relieved
to find that it was his son who came in laughing and said, "I see you
have already found the Mexican custom of `siesta'."
The two men descended the long staircase into
the lighted foyer. A tall fair man about the age of James Karl came
forward. "Good evening señor Tanana, I am Juan Carlos de la Vegas,
Maria's father. This is my wife Carlotta de la Vegas. Our home is
yours. We are honored that you would accept our invitation."
The man's english was perfect. Much better than his own, thought
James Karl. "Come let me show you around. The women always have much to
talk about and my son Miguel and your son seem to find things to keep
them out of mischief. Dinner will be served shortly and then I would
imagine you will have many questions as will I."
The two men strolled first through the gardens lit with small
lanterns that gave off sweet smells. Juan Carlos then took the other
man to the back where the stables were.
James had loved horses since he had come to Idaho. He had two on
his small ranch and took great care with them so that they were always
well groomed and ready to ride.
When they got to the stables he was awe struck. There were over
one dozen of the finest looking Palomino horses he had ever seen. Each
was groomed to perfection. The stables were immaculate and there was
none of the smells usually associated with large stables.
The Mexican smiled at the way his guest was appreciating what he
saw. "Tomorrow will be a special day and you will honor me by riding
out to one of my holdings?" "Of course." James Karl said. "Nothing
would give me more pleasure than to ride one of those horses. How in
the world did you get such a fine match?" Asked James Karl. The other
answered in a soft and gentle tone. "These are horses that I have bred.
There have been many but I have only kept the ones that would match up
with the others. Soon I had five mares and one perfect stallion, `El
Grande Palomino' who sired most of these. This is his son." The man
said pointing to the great horse in front of him. James gasped and
said, "This animal is beautiful only I see by the teeth he is older."
"You have a good eye for horses, my friend, the other man said with a
smile. This is El Grande. He lives with his children but he is no
longer used for breeding, only for riding. Tomorrow, if you wish, you
will ride him and I his son."
Dinner was what James Karl expected. The food was authentic foods
from Mexico and the wine was from Spain. In good humor the family asked
him questions that when he had finished answering told his life
history. Juan Carlos was interested in the story of the mountain and
the eagle. He said that there were many strange stories that had come
out of this country and from the gypsies of his native Spain that were
similar but never proved.
At this point Juan Carlos asked him the question he had been
dreading for many years. "Señor Tanana have you visited the mountain?
Have you seen the eagle?" James replied, "No señor Vegas, I have never
gone back to Alaska. I have told myself that this must be done, but
there was never a right time. I think that now the right time has come
and when I get back to Idaho I shall go to `Denali'."
The following day the two men rode for hours on the horses seeing
all of the land. James was surprised when the other man told him that
they had been riding the entire time on Vegas land.
The orange trees, the cattle ranch and the cotton farms were seen
and talked about. He learned that this was a small part of what the
family owned. They had vineyards in Spain, gold and silver mines in
Mexico and several other ranches and farms that produced food and
cattle.
It was nearing dark when they returned. Maria greeted them with a
look at her father that made James wonder what was happening. The two
of them talked for some time while James waited at the stable. He was
puzzled but knew better than to ask what was going on between them.
Dinner was a gala occasion, with lights, Spanish guitars and
trumpets. The silver and the glasses were of a kind that the two
Americans had never seen before.
Toward the end of the dinner the two young people stood and
walked to the head of the table where Señor de la Vegas was seated. One
stood on each side of him and turning to look at each other the boy
said to the girl; "Maria this is the time that I declare my love for
you in public. Your father has talked to you today and told you of my
intentions. I know that you have feelings for me and so I ask you, with
your father and mother's permission, will you marry me?"
The girl, blushing with a beauty that none of those present had ever
seen, sighed and looking at Joseph and at her father said, "It is good
that you have honored me by requesting my hand in the ways of our
people. You have showed that you care for the things that I care for.
Now what I care for the most is you. If my parents and yours agree then
we will be married for I love you."
Everyone looked at James. "So you think that you have
surprised me Joe. I have a surprise for you. Before we left your place
I went to the hotel and called your mother and told her about
Maria and the look in your eyes when you said her name and when you
looked at her in the restaurant. I told your mother, who is wiser than
both of us, that you have found the right girl. I told her that it
would be fine with me but I need to know how she would feel. Her answer
was `I do not have to marry her. We have raised our son to make his own
decisions. Why should we try and make this, his most important of all
decisions.' As usual your mother showed her great wisdom. It will be
easy to love Maria as a daughter. Her father and I have much in common
and already I treasure his wisdom. You have our blessing."
The boy moved closer to the girl and, taking from his pocket, he
placed a ring on her finger.
Everyone applauded and the talk at the table became filled with song
and laughter.
After the meal was over the two older men went out to the garden
to smoke a cigar. Juan Carlos said, "It is our custom to post the bans
on the door of our church. These must be posted for a
period of time. This is good for it is only right that we should travel
to your home so that the women can meet each other. We can also plan
the ceremony as to the time and the place. It will give me a chance to
see your wonderful country. We might find some mutual interests."
The next day it was agreed that the party would leave in a week
and travel by train from Brownsville to Boise City, and from there to
Grangeville by car.
It was that night that James made the decision to go to Denali
immediately. He packed his things the next day and told Juan Carlos of
his plan. Juan Carlos saddled up the golden horse and told him to take
it to town where he would have a train ready to take him to Mexicali.
From there a car would drive him to his cousins in San Diego. "Via con
dios, amigo." Juan Carlos said as they parted.
When James reached Monterrey he called Peter and told him that he
would be there in three days and needed to be on a train to San
Francisco that same day. He was to call Jacob Ashton and have
their fastest ship ready to take him to Anchorage as soon as he
arrived. He was to contact their representative in Anchorage and
arrange for the supplies that he would need and the transportation so
that he could get to Denali. He would explain everything when he got to
San Diego. He told Peter that this would be the most important trip of
his life and asked the other man to pray for him. James knew that
deep down all answers must come from where it all began. He had to find
those answers and also peace within himself. He must go to the mountain
to be close to his roots. And also closer to God.

CHAPTER 24
It did not fit into his mind. It was too big. The mountain
stretched over the land and to the sky. He came to the place where he
could see the rock. That was the place where the eagle was to be seen.
It was late in the afternoon but the sun was still high in the sky. He
had been told that it was the time when all was warm and light was
always there.
The days had been clear and bright and he had first seen the
mountain two days before he ever got to its base on the east side. He
remembered the stories of his father and his grandfather, Rangak.
Nothing could prepare him for the face to face meeting with this part
of the family's history.
As the day went on James Karl found a place to camp. It looked
as if others had camped there sometime before. He pitched his tent,
tied down his horse and pack horse and gave them some oats to eat while
they grazed on the small wisps of grass nearby.
As he looked around he suddenly felt the presence of something
that he could not see, or touch. As if someone had him by the arm he
moved in a jerky way about one hundred yards to his right. He looked
up at the rock jutting out and at the mountain rising to the sky. He
was startled! There on the rock for a fleeting second he saw a woman,
at least he thought it was a woman. The hold was loosened on him and he
sank to the ground. Was he losing his mind he wondered? What had pulled
him to this spot. The animals were moving in a manner that was
different, as if they too saw something and were trying to shy away.
The man lay there for a few moments and then looking up once more
and seeing nothing he moved back to his tent. Hastily he checked the
horses who had calmed down and were grazing once more. He was very
tired. He did not know why but he was tired. He made a small fire,
fixed some food, ate quickly and lay down in the tent to rest and think.
It was still light when James Karl awoke. He
was surprised that the light was still so bright. When he came out of
the tent he looked at where the sun was last and he saw that it was on
the other side of him. He looked at his watch and discovered that he
had slept for fifteen hours.
After he had tended his animals he started the climb to the rock.
He had to find the path that led to the rock. He went first to the
right and then the center and then to the left. He could not see
anything that looked like a path and decided that he would get some of
his rope and start to climb, in hopes of finding the old trail.
Gathering up the rope and a small axe he started back to the base
of Denali when he heard it! The shrill cry was unmistakable. He had
heard eagles back in his home state and he knew their sounds. Excitedly
he searched the sky but saw nothing but brilliant blue. Again the cry
came forth and he looked in the direction of the
rock face half way up the huge mountain. There on the rock was the
giant bird. It was the largest
eagle that he had ever seen.
The bird seemed to look down at him and then slowly rose from
the rock and sailed down to meet him. The giant eagle did not land but
moved toward a break in the mountain almost around to the other side.
The man followed and in an hour he found the trail up toward the rock.
The bird gave it's shrill cry and kept circling upward.
Slowly James Karl made his way between the rocks and up the
narrow trail that seemed to disappear and then reappear.
He had not heard the cry of the eagle for some time and was
worried that he had taken a wrong turn; but there was no place to turn.
He was tired and he sat down on a small ledge to rest and drink from
his water bag. He looked around the tiny ledge and suddenly a shiny
object buried in the dirt near the back of the ledge caught his
attention. He reached over and pulled the object out of the dirt.
Looking at it closely he saw that it was a small curved knife. It
was just like the one that the family had been making and selling for
over almost two hundred years. Could it have been one that belonged to
one of his ancestors?
Pulling it to him, wiped it clean on his pants and saw that it
had drawings on the curved handle. On the left front it had a small
moose. In the foreground were larger moose and to the right were two
bears. On the back side there were two fish; one facing to the right
and one facing to the left. The handle was made of the horns of what he
had taken to be a moose or deer.
The blade was a crude hammered metal that seemed to be very old
and very rough. The handle fit in the middle and the blade curved to
the sides. He put it in the bag at his side. At that moment he heard
the cry of the eagle and looking up he saw the bird sitting on a rock
up and to his right. He gathered himself together and started the climb
to the spot where the eagle had landed.
On he went for what seemed like hours and suddenly he knew that
he was close to the rock. He moved forward with renewed strength and in
a short time reached the flat rock. The air was cool and clear. James
Karl looked out over the land that his father and grandfather and their
fathers had looked upon. It was a sight that he would never forget.
Beautiful lakes, green plains and more mountains almost as big as this
one. He sat down, drank some water and waited. What he was waiting for
he had no idea but he knew that he had to wait. Was it to see the
beautiful woman of the mountain or was it to wait for the eagle? Or was
it to just sit and think.
James Karl Tanana had always been in control of his life. He
always knew what he was going to do and how he was going to do it. For
the first time in his life he did not know what he was to do next.
He sat and thought of the things that were to happen. The girl who was
to be his daughter-in-law; the son who had taken over so well, the wife
who he loved so much and was so wise. His life had been a good one. He
had worked hard, followed the code of his father and his father's
father.
Now he was at a time in his life when the baton of leadership
will fall to his son, Joseph. Perhaps this is why he was here. Here he
might find the answers to all the questions of the future. His father
and his grandfather had always said that this is the place where all of
the questions they had were answered.
As he lay back, thinking, he heard the sound of the air being
moved and looking up he saw the giant eagle circling the rocky ledge.
With a long glide the bird came to a landing on the rock about twenty
feet from James. The eagle cocked his head to the side and slowly
approached the man. When he was about ten feet away he unfurled his
large wings and hopped to the man. James stood up and then remembered
the story of how his great great grandfather had stroked the wings of
the eagle in front of the town. How everyone said that if he could do
that he must have special powers and insight.
James moved slowly to the bird, who shivered slightly. Coming up
to the bird he reached out and running his hands over the feathers he
brushed them down and back. He thought they are so soft and light.
The eagle stood there and looked into the man's eyes. The man
wondered what the eagle saw and what was the message of the bird.
The bird turned and hopped away a short distance, turned and
looked at the man as if to say, "follow me." James Karl followed the
bird to the far end of the rock and then scraped the dirt with it's
talons. James Karl went to the spot and taking his small axe he started
to clear the ground.
Suddenly the ground gave way and he found himself looking down
into a small hole that was filled with strange objects. He found what
appeared to be hooks made out of bone, little bowls that had holes in
them and some kind of wax-like material in their bottom. He also found
another of the small knives, but this one had a name carved in the
side. It was in Cyrillic and he could not read it. He also found a
note that was also written in words he could not understand. He
gathered up the objects
and put them in his bag. He knew that they were for him and that the
giant bird had been waiting for him. Could the bird be like him, a
descendant of the ones who came before.
He moved back toward the place where he had come up to the rock.
The eagle jumped in front of him and steered him to an opening in the
wall of the rock that was part of the mountain.
On the wall, inside, was a series of pictures that told a story.
He could tell that they had been made at different times. He started to
read the story. He soon saw that it was the story of his family. Each
one who had come to the mountain had put on the wall their story of
their part of the family.
This was a family tree like no other. It seemed to show all of
his ancestors and also the big questions that brought them to the
mountain.
In each case there was a picture of a woman on top of the rock.
Was this the woman that he had a fleeting glimpse of as he first saw
the rock? As he reached the end of the story on the rock he realized
that now it was his turn to continue. He now knew why he had to come
here at this time.
He knew that he could come back and would, but this was a special
time. He took out his knife and set about putting his part of the story
into the rock.
It seemed like hours before he finished his task. He sat back and
looked at the story from beginning to end. It was good. His family
still lived on the side of the mountain; their mountain. All the
while the eagle had stayed at the far end of the rock. James finished
his final carving into the rock and the eagle rose to the sky giving
off his shrill cry and disappeared. The sky was still bright and the
ledge was aglow from the sun.
The man shouldered his bag and the rope, put his knife into it's
sheath and started back down the side of the mountain. As he went down
he looked back and there he saw the woman. She was beautiful, even from
a distance. He could see the bright red and the golden hues of her
hair.
He looked away and then back and she had
disappeared. He wondered why his mind was playing tricks with him. He
said to himself that he would try sort all of this out when he reached
the bottom and got to his campsite. Now was not the time.
After fixing his dinner James Karl sat by the warm fire and
reflected on the extraordinary day that had gone by. The air was cool
though the sky was clear and bright. It was light without sun. He
looked at his watch and found, to his surprise, that it was two o'clock
in the morning.
James Karl was not tired. His mind was spinning from the events
of the day. He thought about what he had seen and what he had done. He
had climbed the mountain to the rock of the eagle and the lady. Where
were they both at this time. He thought about the future, his family
and his son's new family.
When he awoke he was hungry. He looked at his watch and again was
surprised to see that it was eleven in the morning. He quickly gathered
his goods, gave the horses some more oats and packed up to start back
to Anchorage. He new that when he got there he would make arrangements
to get a train at Vancouver and travel to Boise City. There was much to
be done and much to talk about with Polly. He hoped that the wedding
party and he would catch up to each other in the capitol.
With a final look he mounted his horse and leading the other pack
animal he started back to Anchorage. As he looked once more behind him
he saw the eagle soaring high in the sky and could hear it's faint cry
as it soared closer and closer to the top of the mountain. He wondered
what was at the top and vowed that he would find out.
The trip to Anchorage was short and the boat was waiting to take
him to Seattle where it had been decided that he would make better
time. It was only a little more than one day from there to Boise City.

CHAPTER 25

It was decided that the wedding would take place in the State
Capitol. Senator William Edgar Borah, the senior senator from Idaho
would perform the ceremony. The governor, Moses Alexander, would host
the wedding party in the capitol building. The entire legislature
along with the town of Grangeville and friends from all over were
invited. Susan Ashton and her son Jacob were coming. Peter and his
family were also making the trip. The great name in the Northwest for
the past three decades had been Theodore Roosevelt. When news came that
the former president would be there, this was the icing on the cake for
the Tanana family.
Señor de la Vegas was impressed and asked if he also could invite
some of the people the family had known in Mexico and Spain. James Karl
laughed and told him to invite as many as he wished. Boise City had 373
hotel rooms and he had reserved all of them. The entire family was
coming from Mexico. Among the honored guests was Mexico's new president
Venustiano Carranza, who was said to be a friend of the de la Vegas,
and of the United States. The religious part of the wedding ceremony
was to be done by Mexico's highest ranking churchman, Cardinal
Cardenas. The church was feeling anti-religious persecution from within
and had suspended all religious ceremonies within the country. For the
Cardinal to come here was a great honor for the de la Vegas family.
James and Polly were constantly busy with all of the preparations
and that left the task of entertaining the visitors from Mexico to Joe.
Joe went to the village of his indian friends and asked if there
were to be any ceremonies that he could bring his new bride-to-be and
her parents to see. Big Buck, long a playmate and friend of Joe's said
that they were to have the dance of the harvest in the next three
nights and he would see if he could get permission for the party to
come. The next day Big Buck came to see Joe and told him that not
only were they welcome to come to the ceremony but they were invited to
stay for the
feast afterward. Big Buck said that they would prepare a surprise for
the visitors; one that they would never forget. Joe grinned at his
friend for he knew that there would be mischief afoot.
One thing that James did was to get his two best ponies saddled
so that he and his new friend could ride the plains. They spent the day
riding toward the mountains. By noon they had reached a river and
stopped for lunch that had been prepared by Polly.
James Karl brought out two fishing rods and spent a short time
teaching his friend to cast the line. Then they dug into the soft dirt
of the river bank and picked out some of the large red wriggling worms.
Fastening them to the small hooks they cast them out into the quiet
pools of the river. By the third cast they had each caught a good sized
trout. Juan Carlos was beside himself. It was as if a small child had
been given the toy of his dreams.
After they had eaten lunch and prepared a large quantity of trout
to take back for dinner, James turned to his friend and told him of his
trip to the mountain. He told him of all that had happened and of the
thought that he had of climbing to the top of the great peak. Juan
Carlos said, "my friend that's something to dream about but at our age
is it possible? Has anyone ever climbed to the top?" The other man
answered. "I read in the paper that in 1913 three men climbed to the
top and took pictures to prove their claim. Mr. Harper, one of the
three, will be at the wedding. He is a friend of President Roosevelt
and the President has invited him as one of his party. This will be the
time that I will be able to find out if there is a way to the top."
Juan Carlos said, "but I should like to go with you. As I told
you when you first came to see me and told me of the mountain, I too
would like to see this source of the story of your family. Perhaps you
would be so kind as to take me on this adventure."James Karl thought a
minute and then said, "We have become more than friends, we are family
now and it's only right that you do this with me. We will make our
plans after the wedding and a talk with Mr. Harper.
Now it is time to head back. Polly worries when I am out riding
after dark. I guess she thinks a bear will eat me" Both men laughed,
mounted their horse and headed back to the ranch.
Returning to the ranch James settled into a hot bath and settled
down to read the paper. The news from Europe was bad. The war was
spreading and the Germans had used a terrible new weapon, poison gas.
They had gone on the defensive forcing the French and the English to
attack them, which caused severe casualties in and around the historic
Flemish town of Ypres.
It was only a matter of time and the Americans would be pulled
into the conflict, he felt. The only hope was that since the war was so
far away there would be no chance of American lives being lost. Soon
they would have to find a way to have peace. No one could keep on with
this kind of bloody fighting for much longer.
He thought of how lucky he was that his son was here and that he
had so much responsibility with the company. Soon he would turn all of
his part of the company over to the boy and do what his father had
done. He and Polly would take the trips that they had always talked
about and see the places that they had heard and read about while they
were building this part of their nation.
The wedding was one that had never been rivaled in the state of
Idaho. Some said it was the most lavish wedding, equaling the state
weddings of Europe. Dashing army officers from Mexico and Spain in
brilliant gold braided uniforms mingled with American officers in their
dress uniforms. The Sioux indian nation was represented by seven chiefs
in flowing ceremonial headdress and bright leather clothes. Diplomats
from Mexico, Spain, Canada, Alaska and the United States were there.
Susan Ashton never looked finer. Her son Jacob was there with his new
bride.
The presents filled an entire room of the capitol building.
President Roosevelt and Senator Borah gave long, and for the most part
boring, toasts to the bride and groom. The governor used the occasion
to show off the state by planning a tour of Idaho by special rail cars
furnished by his friend Pullman.
Jacob Ashton gave the newly weds a trip to the island of Hawaii,
leaving from Seattle and returning to San Francisco. The fall of 1916
had never been brighter for everyone who attended the wedding.
After a two month honeymoon the couple returned to Brownsville.
Joe had some ideas he wanted to look into for the business and while he
was gone Maria was to stay with her parents. After talking
with the ship's captain Joe now more sure than ever that the southern
part of the United States was to be the next booming area. He decided
to take a trip through the south to see for himself what could be done
in the way of building
the companies fortunes.
Joe spent several days around Mississippi and Louisiana trying to
see what there was that would work for the company. It did not take him
long to discover the uses of the Mississippi River and of the vast
amounts of cotton grown in the region.
He made inquiries as to the cost of some of the cotton farms and
even went so far as to buy three that were next to each other in
Mississippi. The families that owned them were glad to get the money
and left as soon as they could get packed, leaving Joe to find someone
to manage the three farms.
Franklin Strickland had been a farmer and a school teacher. When
things went bad in the area he lost his job teaching and had to sell
his farm. He heard that the new man from Texas bought three farms
nearby and was looking for someone to take over the management of all
three. Franklin's wife, Dolly took care of the little cabin that they
had moved into when they lost the farm. In her spare time she put up
jelly and peanut butter to sell at the local fairs to bring in some
money while her
husband farmed for wages.
When Franklin heard where the man from Texas was staying he went
to him and applied for the job. Joe was impressed with the man's
straight forward honesty and offered it to him. He would move onto the
large farm, take over the big house and rent out the houses on the
other two farms to the people who came to work for the Caine Farms. He
wanted to keep as many of the negroes who had been working there on the
farms. He knew they would have a hard time finding other work. It was
the way of the Tanana family. He continued to follow the system that
had worked so well for the family in the past and gave Franklin a
salary and ten percent of the profits. He also raised the pay to the
workers to seventy-five cents a day.
After a week putting in supplies, he went on to Florida. He was
amazed to find the tropical weather and the vast amount of crops and
fruit that was growing in the area. Here was a place that had much to
offer the Caine company.
Travelling north he came to Savannah, Georgia, a place different
from the other ports of the south. Its brick and cobblestone streets
were clean and bright. The houses were large and bright. Lush growth
seemed everywhere and the harbor was magnificent. He knew that this
would be the place to headquarter the southern part of the Caine
Companies. He telegraphed his father and asked if Jacob Ashton could
come here to look over the port and see if it would be of interest for
the company.
Atlanta, Georgia, a place of trees and parks, large homes and
stately mansions. A hub of business and pleasure. This is what the
young man found when he arrived. His mind was full with all that he had
seen in the past two months of his travels. Now it was time to return
to his wife and Texas.
The war was on his mind and he wondered how long it would be
before it ended or the U.S. was brought into the action.
Upon returning home he went to Casa de la Vegas to pick up his
wife and to see the rest of
the family. He had thoughts about having one of his brothers-in-law run
the operations in Texas while he got everything going in the south.
Driving the long tree lined road to the house his heart started to
pound. A fear unlike anything he had ever felt grabbed him.
The beautiful house now lay in partial ruin. As he hurried to the
front door he heard the sound of a gun being cocked. He called to his
wife and the door was flung open by Riccardo, one of Maria's brothers.
"What's happened? Where's Maria? Who did this? Is everyone OK?"
Riccardo calmed him down and told him that they had been attacked by a
large band of "banditos". Everyone was alright. Maria was upstairs
resting. Without waiting to hear more he rushed up the stairs and into
her room. She woke with a start as the door was flung open. Her look
of fear turned to one of relief and joy. "Oh Joseph I'm so glad you're
back. It has been terrible. They have killed many people who were
working for my father. He has taken my mother and the younger children
to be with your family. I
stayed here so that when you came back I would be the first to tell
you..." What do you have to tell me that is worth risking your life."
"You are going to be a father." Joe was stunned. "How is this possible?
When did it happen?"
The girl laughed and told him that it must have happened on their
way back from the islands, and that he would have to figure out how it
happened. For now they must pack and prepare to leave this place for
their home in Texas.
He asked Riccardo to come along, that he had plans that would
include him and since there was nothing for him here he could be of
great use to the Caine company. It did not take long for the party to
gather up all that they could carry in the trucks and the car. Maria
drove the car while Joe and Ricci, as he was called by the family, each
drove a truck with supplies and goods.
Two days later they were on their way back to Brownsville and the
start of life again.
After they got back Joe settled Maria in
the house and called his father to let everyone know that he was back
and that Maria and her brother were safe in Texas with him. He also
talked to his father at great length about the South and of putting
Riccardo in charge of that operation. His father approved.
After the call Joe and Ricci talked for many hours. Joe told him
of what he had seen and what he wanted to do. He also told him that he
would like him to become part of the family business. He would be paid
a salary and get a percentage of all of the profits of his part of the
operation. He could become a very rich man.
Riccardo knew that this was a generous offer but he thought of
his father and what decision he would have him make. He decided to ask
for enough time to go to talk to his father before giving Joe the
answer. It was agreed that he would return in six weeks with an answer.
The new year of 1917 would have come and the new baby would be near as
well. Joe was feeling good about the coming year. He knew that the
company would grow and prosper. He also knew that he was making the
right moves to make the Caine company a world power. Even now they were
getting ready to load their first shipment of cotton from Savannah to
Great Britain.

CHAPTER 26
The two men had reached Seattle in the middle of March 1917.
James and Juan Carlos almost looked like they could be brothers. They
were dark in coloring with greying hair and about the same height.
From there they boarded one of the Caine ships for the trip to
Anchorage. Before leaving, however, they were to meet with the famous
Walter Harper, the conqueror of Denali or Mount McKinley as it was
known to the people of the "lower states."
They spent the better part of a week going over his maps and
diagrams. He told them about the clothes that they would need and he
said that there was only one store in Anchorage that would have
everything they needed. James asked the name of the store and the other
man replied, "It is a different type. Not a department store but rather
a trading post. Over the front there is a large picture of the mountain
and of an eagle sitting on a rock ledge. The store is called, `Kani
Kompany'. Have either of you ever heard of it?" James with a
straight face told the man that is where he had always shopped in
Anchorage and he new the owners quite well.
After Harper left, James broke into a laugh that came from deep
in his stomach. Juan Carlos asked him why he was laughing and the other
man said that he would tell him at dinner that night.
Later while they were eating James told him the rest of the story
of the family and how that store got it's name. During this time Juan
Carlos began to see that this family had monies which rivaled his own
and that his daughter and the new child would be well taken care of in
the future.
Final plans were made and they boarded their ship for the trip to
Anchorage. It was only a weeks trip and they soon reached the booming
town. One of the many wooden buildings said, "hotel and bath--$2.50 per
day--cash only!" They went into the building and secured a room for two
nights.
After a short rest and a hot bath, they went to dinner. The days
were light from about 8:30 AM until 6 PM.

Finishing dinner they walked over to a nearby saloon and spent

some time talking about the adventure they were about to start the day
after tomorrow. A short time later they were back in their room. Sleep
came easy that night and both men spent the night with their own
dreams.
Putting away a large breakfast the two started out to the find
the Kani Kompany Trading Post.
They were told that it was at the intersection of 4th street and G
street. This was only a few blocks from the center of the town.
After arriving at the store James asked for the manager and told
him all of the things that they would need. He also asked where they
could get a team of dogs and a sled to carry one man and their
equipment. After purchasing all of the things from the store that they
would need, James identified himself to the manager.
Juan Carlos got another surprise. The manager asked for no money.
James later explained to his friend that this was where and how it all
began. One trading post started by his great-great grandfather, Karlek
and his best friend Nicholi. Everything had come from this, and from
the mountain.
The next day brought snow and the two men went over and picked up
their dogs and sled. Juan Carlos had seen snow in Spain but it was so
long ago that he had forgotten how cold it could get. James placed the
equipment near the front of the sled then piled in food for the dogs.
After that he made an area of furs and had Juan Carlos get in and then
covered him up with more furs.
For James this was truly a return to the past. He remembered
making the trips with his father using the sleds. The trip was much
like the one that his great-grandfather would take when he went to
visit the village of his grandfather.
The two men traveled north for two days until they reached a
small building called Sheep Creek Lodge. Before they bedded down for
the night James fed the dogs and loosened their harness' while still
leaving them in their traces. After eating a hearty meal they went to
their room knowing that tomorrow should bring them to the turning point
that would carry them to the western side of the great mountain. James
was hoping that the next day would be clear so that his friend could
see the immense size of the mountain.
Waking early the men ate a large breakfast and went about
preparing the dogs for the days run. It was still dark when they left
but the trail was clearly one that had been use a great deal and was
easy to follow. Daylight came quickly and with it the sight of the
giant snow clad peak standing by itself, a giant among giants.
By late afternoon they had almost reached the glacier area below
the mountain. Here as before the air was still and crisp and the men
continued on for another hour. At last they had come to the place where
James had stayed on his last trip. He took a quick glance at the rock
hoping to see the eagle, or the woman. The light was poor and nothing
was to be seen. They pitched their tent, fed the dogs, gathered snow
and forced it against the bottom of the tent to keep out the cold air.
A small campfire warmed the two men as they ate their meal in darkness.
They talked of tomorrow and the next several days and then turned into
the tent for some sleep.
It was hard for James to sleep that night. Many thoughts kept
running through his head. Foremost among the thoughts was the climb to
the top. Where would they begin and how long would it take. The men had
Harper's maps but it only showed the trail from above the tree line.
How were they to get to that point? Soon sleep overcame him and he
drifted off into the world of dreams.
The next day they fed the dogs an extra portion and spaced them
so that they could not attack each other. James led the way to the rock
and remembering the location of the path started the climb to the rocky
outcropping.
Because of the heavy packs the men carried, climbing was slow and
loose snow made the going treacherous. By mid morning they had covered
less than half the distance to the ledge. There was no sign of the
eagle or anything else for that matter.
Juan Carlos had been quiet the entire day and when they finally
reached the rocky ledge just as dark settled in, James looked at him
and asked, "My friend, is something bothering you? Is the climb too
difficult?" The other answered, "No it is none of those things. I am
overwhelmed by the size of all of this. Never in my life have I
imagined such a mountain. I have seen the mountains of my native Espana
but there is nothing like this. I shall treasure this time with you and
the mountain for the rest of my life." James smiled and quietly looked
at his friend who had the same feelings about this mountain as his own.
The next morning as they were about to get out of the tent they
heard the shrill cry of the eagle. James got out of the tent first so
as not to startle the bird, but it was nowhere to be seen.
For the next several minutes the two men busied themselves with
breakfast. After the meal they checked their packs and looking at the
crude map that Harper had given them they started for the next place
they would stop for the night. As they moved upward they again heard
the cry of the bird. This time they stopped and James looked up into
the tree-line where he saw a large nest. Taking out his spy glass he
looked carefully at the nest but could see nothing.
The two men continued upward again, but this time James directed
them toward the area where they had seen the nest.
It was shortly after noon when they reached the tree-line the air
was much crisper and the breathing was more difficult. Both men needed
a short rest and decided to make this their lunch stop.
While they were warming their food the sound of large wings came
to them and there was the eagle gliding into the area where they were
sitting. James cautioned his friend not to move until he had
approached the bird and patted it's feathers. The eagle landed a short
distance away and looking up to the nest made an unusual sound, almost
as if it were singing.
James went directly to the bird, moving slowly so as not to
frighten the huge eagle. As he came up to the eagle the bird gave him
that same look as it had once before, as if it were laughing at James.
The man smiled at the bird and ruffled the feathers at the great one's
neck. Quietly he called his friend over. "Let's see if my friend here
will let you smooth his feathers. Remember to move your hand slowly
and to the back so that the feathers will be smoothed down." The other
man nodded and as James talked to the eagle Juan Carlos moved slowly to
where they both were standing. The eagle started to ruffle his feathers
and the smiling look gave way to one that James had never seen before.
Juan Carlos suddenly started to talk in a very soft voice to the
bird. As he did so he continued to move closer to the huge bird and
then reached out and stroked the black feathers in a slow deliberate
way as if he had always done this. The eagle relaxed and the funny
smiling look returned to his face.
James was amazed and happy. He knew now above
all other things that if the eagle could trust this man then he also
would be able to trust Juan Carlos.
This was the sign that he had needed to put the next part of the
family fortunes to work. Now, however, they must finish what they had
come to do. It was as if each was now bonded to the other until they
reached the top.
The eagle stayed near them for the rest of the day and they found
that he was leading them up a narrow pathway between two crevices in
one large rocky side of the mountain.
The air suddenly turned much colder and they saw clouds where
there had only been blue sky. It did not take any time for them to
figure out that there was a storm heading their way. They quickly set
up their tent on a ledge, banked the bottom to keep out the cold wind
and made a small fire on a piece of tin that they sat in the middle of
the tent. As the dark closed in they once more heard the cry of the
eagle as it went down the mountain to.......
That night the wind was strong but the two men were able to sleep
warmly thanks to the little fire and the 105105‚105105ƒ105105„105105…
105105†105105‡105105ˆ105105‰105105Š105105‹105105Œ105105105105Ž105105
105105105105‘105105’105105“105105”105105•105105–105105—
105105˜105105™105105š105105›105105œ105105
105105ž105105Ÿ105105105105¡105105¢10510
5£10
5105
¤10
5105
¥10
5105
¦105105§105105¨105105©105105ª105105«10
5105¬105105105105®105105¯105105°105105±105105²105105³105105
´10
5105
µ105105¶105105·105105¸105105¹105105º105105»10
5105
¼105105½105105¾105105¿105105À105105Á105105Â105105Ã105105Ä105105Å105105Æ
105105Ç105105È105105É105105Ê105105Ë105105Ì105105Í105105Î105105Ï105105Ð1
05105Ñ105105Ò105105Ó105105Ô105105Õ105105Ö105105×105105Ø105105Ù105105Ú105
105Û105105Ü105105Ý105105Þ105105ß105105à105105á105105â105105ã105105ä1051
05å105105æ105105ç105105è105105é105105105105ë105105ì105105í105105î105105
ï105105ð105105ñ105105ò105105ó105105ô105105ö105105ýÿÿÿ÷105105ø105105ù105
105ú105105û105105ü105105ý105105þ105105ÿ105105105105105sleeping bags
that they had purchased.
By eight-thirty the next morning the wind had stopped and the
little fire was made again. This time they prepared their morning meal
and even ate a little extra. Their bodies needed some extra inner
warmth.
It was full light by the time that they had finished and they
packed up their gear and set out to once more climb to their next point
on the map. It was here that they were supposed to find a small tent
that was left for others to use if they were caught out in the raw
weather.
Before they had gone more than thirty minutes they heard the
eagle again. This time the cry was one of anger. Looking around they
could see nothing. The snowfall that night had covered all of their
tracks and left them disoriented when they looked down.
Juan Carlos said. "My friend the bird does not sound happy.
Perhaps there is an animal about that could be a threat to the bird and
it's family or
maybe one of the children is misbehaving." The last part was said with
a laugh and James laughed also.
Climbing was much slower than before. The packs were still heavy
and the snow was soft and fresh which made walking much more difficult.
After about two hours they came to a sheer wall in front of them.
They both saw that there was no way that they climb that face. Just
then down with a swoop came the eagle. Flying across the face the eagle
landed on a ledge about thirty feet up and over to their right about a
hundred yards. Puzzled the two men moved toward the ledge above them
where the eagle sat.
Then they saw it! There was a slight separation in the wall of
rock. The men could attach their climbing screws and using their rope
would be able to get to the top of the rock, wherever that would be,
for they had no idea how much farther they needed to go.
For the next three days the weather was clear and the men were
able to find foot holds in the
mountain. The eagle seemed to come and go but was always there when
they needed to find another way up. They had passed the timberline
three days before and suddenly they had an angle that was not nearly as
steep as before. The packs had become somewhat lighter because of the
food that they had eaten and this made the going easier.
The next day the men looked upward but could no longer see the
peak. Were they lost? They continued the climb.
It was a wild night on the side of the mountain. It was as if the
mountain knew it was about to be conquered and was fighting back. The
wind blew with fresh intensity. The snow was frozen and stung any part
of the body it touched. The darkness was complete for there was no moon
that night.
They knew that they would reach the top the next day if they
could get out of their tent and continue. They were going to leave
their packs, their food and the rest of their supplies in the tent and
make the final climb with just the camera
that they had brought to commemorate the great event. This was what
they had waited for and now it was about to happen. The men knelt in
the snow that night and prayed.
The morning was quiet and the wind, though still blowing, was
much calmer than the night before. As James and Juan Carlos lifted the
camera, film and the little flags of Idaho and Mexico the eagle rose
almost to where they were and soaring on the currents of the wind, gave
a piercing cry shot up to a place out of sight and there gave it's
familiar cry.
James knew that they had won. The top of the peak was now within
reach. With new found strength the two men climbed to the top of the
peak. As they grinned at each other and planted their flags James
looked over his shoulder and saw that the mountain had two peaks. They
took pictures of the peaks, the flags and themselves. It was a day they
never would forget, April 6, 1917.

CHAPTER 27

It was June 3, 1918. Joe was in command of the third platoon,

ninth regiment, second Division, The indian head division. He had been
with the outfit since he was given a commission in May of 1917. He had
trained with, and fought with the men of his platoon for the past six
months. The officers over him were skeptical about this young man who
had been offered, and had taken a commission. He had no military
background. Grudgingly they admitted that he was as good as they were,
and in some areas even better. His men, would follow him to hell, even
if it was a one way trip. His expertise with a rifle was such that they
always used him in contests with other units. He rarely lost.
He had not heard much from home since the unit went overseas. His
small son, Randall Louis, was named for his grandfather and Maria's
grandfather Luis. The little one had started to walk and make sounds
that he could understand when he left.
 Maria was not happy but she understood. This country had been
good to his family and to him and he wanted to show his gratitude.
By the third of June 1918 the German spring offensive had rolled
all the way to the almost undefended area of Chateau Theirry. The
French mustered what soldiers and reservists they could. This small
contingent was augmented by U.S. Second Infantry Division along with
the Third Marine Division.
In the six day battle that was to follow the Allied forces
numbered 85,000. The importance of the battle was in effect stopping
the Germans from crossing the River Marne.
The Germans were secure in the knowledge that the Allied forces
were no match for their Imperial Army. Both the presence and the
competence of this force became a shock to the forces of the Kaiser.
It was into this battle that Joe was thrown. The headquarters of
his division was at the French town of La Voie Du Chatel, slightly more
than two

miles from the woods near Belleau.

The front lines had changed over the past three days. Joe and his
platoon were the lead
elements in the new battle area, June sixth.
The advance had been easy enough. The trenches had been cleared
of the enemy. As they slowly moved into the woods it became apparent
that this was to be no ordinary battle for his men. The Germans had set
up picket lines of barbed wire that forced the slowing of the advance.
As men got caught up on the wire, German snipers picked them off
leaving them for the hungry dogs of the area. The men as they advanced
were caught up in the stench of the battle.
On the morning of the Seventh Joe had found out why the trenches
were empty. Deep into the woods the enemy had built fortifications that
offered them protection and left the Americans in the relative open
spaces between the trees. Murderous machine gun fire crisscrossed the
area. Men were crying out all over the front.
Joe moved to a forward position, along with one of his runners,
to see if there was a way through the terrible hail of bullets and
mortars. He sent the runner back asking that a machine gun platoon be
sent up to the area. He had it in his mind that if he could divert the
enemy's fire to a certain area then he could slip his men around the
flank and surprise the enemy from the rear. It was a bold and dangerous
plan. If it failed most or all of them would be dead, wounded or
captured. If it worked the enemy line would be breached and the Allies
would be able to counter attack.
It was dark when the gunners arrived. Joe met with their platoon
leader and briefed him on his plan. The two of them went out into no-
mans land to see if there was any place to set up a fire base area. The
Germans had probes out at the same time trying to see the size of the
Allied forces in front of them. They knew that their soldiers were
better equipped than the French and were used to winning. They had been
beating the French for
sometime and there was no real fear.
It was into this scene that the two small groups found themselves
that night. The only light was that from the moon.
A faint sound came to Joe and he stopped the two of them and lay
motionless for some time. The sound was faint but grew a little louder
as each minute passed. In what seemed like hours they saw the outline
of an enemy soldier. Soon another and then another appeared. Joe
motioned to the other man to stay still, and with that he moved
silently to the other side so that the enemy was between them. To Joe
it was much like the quiet tracking of the deer.
After thirty minutes Joe was on the other side of the scouting
party. As they moved forward they now became the ones who were covered
from the rear by the two Americans who had by now joined up again. The
two men agreed that they would wait for the enemy to come back towards
them. They moved along the same route as the German's were taking so
that when it came time to capture them, or kill them they would be
closer to their own lines.
As the moon started to get lower in the sky the sound of the
enemy soldiers returning came to them. Moving several yards apart they
waited until they could see the shadows of the soldiers. In a quiet
voice that did not give off their direction, Joe called, "du soldatan,
achtung." The enemy froze in their tracks for a moment and then started
to shoot wildly. The two men had agreed that they would shoot at the
men in the front of the column so as to keep the enemy from coming
toward them in a wild rush. This way there was less chance of being hit
by the random fire of the Huns.
Two cries of pain were heard and then silence.
The two men moved quietly forward until they came to the two men that
had been hit. One was already dead, but the other had only a flesh
wound. He sat against a tree in shock. Joe turned to the other man and
said, "It's too bad they don't speak english. It would save a lot of
time and lives."
The man against the tree looked at the two officers and said in
halting pain filled words. "I speak a little english." The two were
speechless. What good fortune they thought. Joe looked at the wounded
man and started to bandage his wounds. "Call to your `komarades' and
tell them that you are alright and that they will be treated fairly if
they surrender now. Otherwise we will stay here and shoot them as they
move." The German raised his head to reveal the face of a young boy of
fourteen or fifteen. He looked at the two men and then with a shrug
called out in German. They could hear scurrying about and the two
officers fired some more shots. Another man cried out in pain. The
movements stopped and shortly a voice called out in German. Joe looked
at the boy near them and he said they would surrender if they would not
be shot. The two American officers laughed and told the man to tell
them to lay down their weapons, turn to the American lines and sit down
until it was light. They would be told what to do next at that time. He
was to warn them that if anyone tried anything they would all be shot.
The man did what he was told and they could hear the others putting
down their weapons. Joe told the other officer to go back to the
American lines and tell that he would be coming in with the wounded men
and an unknown amount of captured men. The wounded German had told them
that there twenty-two of them when they went out to the lines but he
did not know if any had slipped through back to their lines.
The machine gun officer slipped off to the left and started to
make his way back to the American lines. A short time later a machine
gun burst was heard and then nothing. Joe had the horrible thought that
the man had been killed by his own men.
Dawn came and with it fog. Joe had given the wounded man a
chocolate bar which he ate ravenously. Joe sensed that the man had not
eaten for some time and the thought came to him that maybe these men
had been cut off from supplies.
Could the Germans be stretched too thin? The german started to
stretch, his bandaged arm was starting to hurt now and he moved to keep
the pain down. Joe guessed that it was infected. One touch of the man's
arm told him that he was right. The arm was hot, too hot not to be
infected.
He turned to german and said, "I think we had better get that arm
to the hospital. Tell the men to stand up and make two lines. Have
someone with a white towel or handkerchief tie it onto a stick and move
to the front of the column. Tell them to let you know when that is
done." The man did as he was told and a few minutes later Joe heard the
men getting to their feet. It was light enough now so that he could
count his captives. One was dead, two were wounded and there were
sixteen men standing in line. That meant that there three men who were
not accounted for according to the information they had been given.
Joe told the boy to tell the men to move slowly forward and to
talk so that the American's
would be able to hear them. As they started forward Joe called to the
American lines, "Hey, it's Lt. Caine. I've got a bunch of prisoners.
Don't shoot." A shout came back, "What's your outfit and who is your
company commander?"
It was 10 AM and the prisoners had been turned over to the
intelligence people. Joe was tired and hungry, but before he could eat
or sleep he had to go to the machine gun platoon and see if the other
officer had returned. After a short time he arrived at the company and
found that Lt. Pyle was out on another mission. Three germans had been
killed trying to turn the flank where the Lt. had returned. This
accounted for the missing men.
Satisfied, Lt. Joe Caine returned to his platoon just in time to
report to the company commander, Captain Biggs. Biggs gave Joe new
orders which were to move his platoon immediately toward the southern
part of the woods nearer the town of Bouresches. The move was to be
completed before dark and each man was to be in place and the
watches set. They were to prepare for the final assault by the Allies
in this sector, hoping to drive the Huns back before they could reach
the Marne River.
Weary and hungry, Joe returned to the men with the orders and the
final instructions which were to hold the line at all costs. The
men knew what Joe had been through and when the move was completed the
platoon command post was the first order of business. After it was
secured sergeant Greenberg told Joe that the men would be able to
handle things now and he needed to get some sleep. The sergeant assured
him that he would wake him when the perimeter was secured. The young
officer needed no further encouragement. Forty-five hours of stress
and no sleep had caught up with him and he realized that he was even
too tired to eat.
It was two o'clock in the morning when the sergeant shook Joe out
of his sleep. "We've got company sir. Sounds like a scouting party from
the other side. What do you want the boys to do?" Joe thought a moment
and then said, "Tell the men to fix bayonets but to stay quiet and let
the enemy through. Maybe we can make them think that we haven't come up
yet. If a fight starts tell them to use their bayonets. The Huns won't
be able to get a fix on how many are here that way." The sergeant
grunted and moved back into the night shadows.
Dawn came and with it no sign of the enemy. Perhaps, they
thought,this won't be so bad after all.
 Just as they started to settle in to a day watch there was a
series of loud "whumps" along the line of the trenches. The earth
erupted into a cascading mass of dirt, rock, trees, stones and metal
over the small group of men huddled in the trenches. The motor fire
continued for almost fifteen minutes then all was silent. Silent except
for the groans and cry's of the wounded and dying. The full
realization of the terrible scene came when Joe left the command post
and moved down the trench from one side to another. The Germans had
been deadly accurate, as if they had known where his men were. It was
then he realized the enemy had planned this attack. They had set the
mortars the day before when they had pulled back so that they could
catch Allied groups in a deadly barrage. It took the better part of an
hour for Joe to assess the damage and the casualties. There were nine
men killed and seventeen more that were wounded, several in serious
condition. There were only twenty-two men left in fighting condition
and many of them were still in a state of shock.
Joe knew that his small group had to hold, but also the company
commander and the regiment had to know what was happening. He looked
for the one man he knew would make it if he sent him back with the
information,and the order that had to be given.
Red Cloud was a full blooded Sioux indian from the little
settlement of Benewah, about one hundred miles north of where Joe was
born. Joe had been through the town when he had taken trips to his
grandfather's place in the Yukon. Red Cloud was tall and graceful in
his movements, much like a deer or a mountain cat. He was a happy
person and the men always seemed to hang around with him. He had been a
sergeant until the day when a soldier from another outfit made the
remark about the "drunken redskin who'd scalp his mother for a hair
bag." Red Cloud became a private the next day and the man went home on
a hospital ship, thankful that he would be able to walk someday, even
though he would limp from that day forth. Joe had made arrangements
with the military police officers to turn him over to him for
punishment.
Joe and Red Cloud never stood on ceremony and when they were
alone there was no rank. From the time Joe got him out of the stockade,
Red Cloud was always watching over him to see that nothing happened to
his "paleface" friend.
Red Cloud reported to his Lieutenant and they talked briefly in
the sioux dialect. Joe explained the importance of the mission and of
the order that had to be given. "Here are our co-ordinates. Have the
artillery lay a barrage in about thirty yards
in front of us for about five minutes, then have them wait about ten
minutes and start again in the same place. We may be able to get them
as they try to move forward."
The indian knew what this meant to both the other man and to his
friend. He now knew why he was told this in the Sioux language. The
tall indian grunted, put his hand on Joe's shoulder and then went back
to his tent.
Red Cloud knew that the only chance he had was to travel in the
old ways. He removed his leggings, his shoes and socks and got out an
old pair of moccasins. He laid his jacket, helmet, cartridge belt and
rifle on his pack. Slipping his bayonet into his belt and taking a last
look at the area he loped off into the woods. He was lost from sight in
a matter of seconds.
Joe had no time to sit and wait. His first thought was to the men
still alive. With ideas he had learned from the indians back home he
quickly formed two plans. First he had the men drag the loose trees and
boards that were scattered about
and make a long covering. On top of this he had them pile dirt and
stick tree limbs so that they gave off the appearance of standing small
trees. He had them also do the same behind them so that it looked like
one continuous area. This would cover the break where the trench was
and also give protection from the next round of shells which were sure
to come, and probably too soon.
His second plan was far more dangerous. For this he called for
volunteers. Three men came forth. Arming them with machine guns he sent
them to the left to try and make the enemy think that there was now a
large force to their right. If the enemy took the bait they would
transfer most of their men to that area and the main body of Joe's
outfit would be able to attack and place the enemy in a cross fire. If
they were lucky and the huns did not figure their strength they might
kill or capture the lot of them.
It took the men about two hours to build the breast works. Just
before they were finished he called the three men who were to move
around the side of the germans. "Our best chance for all of us to get
out of this mess alive is in your hands. Pick your spots with care and
make sure that you are protected when you open fire. They will try and
turn the mortars on you as well as their own machine guns. There are
three times as many of them as there are of us and most of the enemy
will concentrate on you. I'll signal you with a whistle when to fire
and use two blasts when to stop. Good luck guys and we'll met up with
you in about two or three hours."
The men quietly gathered up all of the ammunition they could
carry and cradling their machine guns, headed into the brush to the
left of the trenches. Joe returned to the rest of his men.
Scattered firing broke out to their left and this was a surprise
for there was not any of the American's in that sector. Perhaps, he
thought, they may be shooting at themselves. He laughed to himself.
The Allies knew that this must be the final advance of the German
Army. If they crossed the Marne River, Paris was only a three day march
at the most and less than one day by truck or train.
Joe was aware of the situation that faced he and his men. Somehow
this must be the final battle and they must succeed. Joe felt the
entire war on his shoulders and he was tired, very tired.
Suddenly he was wide awake. He did not know how long he had been
sleeping but sergeant Greenberg was standing over him, with his hand
over Joe's mouth. "We got company coming in from the right. The men are
all hidden but you had better be ready. They must think that we're
gone. I think we can surprise them Lieutenant, if we let them come
through our lines." He knew the sergeant made sense but where would
they hide? The it hit him. "Greenberg, can you get the men to move
back in the trenches? If we can draw them in to the far side maybe
some of our men can slide along the top side of the trench back behind
them and then we can either kill or capture them. What do you think?"
The older man looked at the officer, thought a moment and said,
"It'll work if we can get far enough in and then let them know we are
ahead of them while some of our guys get in behind them. They'll come
after us and probably not pay attention to other sounds. We had
something like this in Cuba." The two men talked some more and then
started to move the men.
Joe took five men and one machine gun crew with him. They would
double back and catch the germans from the rear. He and the sergeant
set their watches and agreed that the sergeant would start firing from
the front in twenty-five minutes. One minute later Joe would yell for
the enemy to lay down their weapons. If they did not Joe's men would
lay down a small arms fire at the same time Greenberg's men would do
the same. If that didn't work Joe would open up with the machine gun,
shooting straight down the trench. He told the sergeant that when they
heard the machine gun open up they were to take cover and hold their
fire. The germans should move right into them and would have to
surrender, or die.
It didn't take long for the men to do as they were told. Joe and
his men started back over and about ten yards to the rear of the
trenches.
Just as they had gotten half-way back to their starting point a
german soldier suddenly stood up in the trench and looked around. He
spotted the machine gun crew and shouted to the rest of the troops.
Joe's riflemen started shooting at the germans to keep their heads down
while the machine gun was moved quickly forward to cover the rear. At
the same time Joe blew a blast on his whistle and off to the left came
the sound of machine guns firing toward the german's right flank.
The men in the trenches were confused. They heard the firing and
thought that the Americans had overrun their positions and they were
caught in a no mans land. It was death or surrender. Greenberg put the
icing on the cake as his men started firing back into the germans. In
halting english a shout came back, "Stop shooting! We surrender."
Quickly Joe grabbed the machine gun crew and told them to go on
ahead, set up on the right end
of the trench and wait for the two blasts of his whistle. When they
heard that they were to start firing out toward the enemy front in the
woods. With that he quickly gathered up the rest of the men and
returned to Greenberg's position. He was in for the surprise of his
life, for there were two columns of German soldiers with their pants
down to their ankles. "We found this worked in Cuba. They can't run
very fast without falling down." He laughed good naturedly.
A career soldier he had been in the Army since 1895. He was
looking forward to a pension and moving back to Philadelphia,
Pennsylvania. He figured he would be set when he mustered out in 1925.
He would only be forty-six years old and in good shape.
There were fifty-four of the enemy that had to be turned over to
the regimental command post and Joe did not want to lose any more of
his men. He knew that they would have to go into the woods to get the
rest of the Germans.
He was trying to think of how he was going to do this when Red
Cloud suddenly appeared with two squads of fresh replacements. When the
indian saw the German's he laughed. "I guess you scalped them in a new
way. Wait 'till they hear this back home." "You say one word and I'll
tell them some of the things you've done since we've been together. One
hand washes the other, blood brother. Any of these new men capable of
finding their way back to the regiment?" The other answered. "Two of
them are returning from the hospital. They've seen it all and could
handle the huns. You can send the walking wounded back with them. I've
also brought three medics back with me. Now if you will excuse me I
will go back and associate with the poor enlisted man." He laughed and
went to join his squad.
The big indian was right and the prisoners were sent back with
the two men who had seen action and could handle the situation. Along
with them went three of the wounded who could walk. One could carry a
rifle and could help if there was a problem.
The two new men were also told to bring
back any more men if they could. There was a large company of the enemy
in front of them and it had sounded like they were being reinforced.
The two men moved the prisoners out and with reassurance that they
would be back as soon as possible. In a moment they were swallowed up
by the woods.
It became obvious that the machine gunners were doing their job.
Through the trees to the front Joe and the others could see the germans
moving toward the machine gun emplacements. Gathering up his small
force he explained that they were going to attack the enemy from the
right side and see if they could slow them down until help could
arrive. They all knew that their job was to keep the enemy from
advancing. No one said how they were to do it, but they would fight
'till the last breath. This was for honor and to show the rest of the
world what the United States Army could do when it had to fight.
The men moved forward spread out about three yards apart. They
had fixed their bayonets and were ready to use them. The new men did
not know what they would do in the coming fight but the veterans
assured them that all they had to do was what the lieutenant said. He
always got them through. He was on their side when it came to fighting
and winning.
The platoon moved forward slowly and used as much cover as they
could find. The sun was hot now and the flies were starting to swarm
around the sweaty men. After about an hour the first group reached the
edge of woods that marked the german lines. The rest soon joined up and
they paused to wolf down some crackers and water. It was at this time
that sergeant Greenberg heard a noise coming from a large clump of
trees to their left. Taking two men they crawled to the edge and looked
into the clearing beyond the clump. There seated at a portable table
were several officers; one who seemed to be high ranking. Telling the
others to stay put he slithered back to find Joe.
"Lieutenant, it looks like we got a bunch of officers in the
woods. They are eating and looking over maps and, I guess, dispatches.
One of them
looks to be a general or some'pn. I got two men covering them and if we
move in maybe we can get them and the maps." Joe answered, "Greenberg,
I could never make it without you. If this turns out like you think
you'll get a medal and I hope a commission. Let's see what you've got."
With that the two men, along with Red Cloud, who had just peen promoted
to corporal, crawled through the woods to the little clearing.
As soon as they got there Joe recognized the insignia of the man
they thought was a general as that of a Field Marshall.
If they could capture this man and what looks like his staff the
rest might be confused enough to retreat. Quickly he sent Red Cloud
back to send up more men from the right flank and get one of the
machine gun crews from the left side and bring them back to him.
Joe outlined his plan to his sergeant. They would use the whistle
system and open up with machine gun fire from both sides and from the
middle. The enemy would think that there was a much larger force out in
front and to the sides. Just before the attack they would go in and
grab the officers and any maps and documents they had
on the table or in pouches. They would take four men from the already
shrunken platoon and march the prisoners back to the regiment. The
platoon would then spread out with one man spaced every five yards
between the machine guns. With a second blast of his whistle the
riflemen would open. He hoped that the enemy would be so confused that
they would retreat into the woods and that would give the division time
to bring up re-enforcements.
It was time and Joe, Greenberg and three of the men moved to the
edge of the compound. Quickly they advanced through the trees and into
the area of the german officers. "Hands up! Don't move or try to stand!
You are prisoners of the United States Army. Any move will result in
your being shot."
Slowly the germans stood, terror in the eyes of all but the field
marshall. He seemed somewhat amused and looking at Joe
said,"Lieutenant, what do you plan to do with us? Do you think that you
can capture us and get out of here? You are surrounded by my forces.
You are in the middle of the Third German Army. General Ludendorff,
himself, has planned this offensive. We will be in Paris in three
weeks. Drop your weapons and we will make you prisoners of war." Joe
took out his whistle and made a sharp blast. Machine guns opened up
from three directions. The german officer's face became stern. The
smirk was gone. "Gentleman, if you please, move out and follow the
sergeant to safety. If any one of you makes any move out of line you
will be shot. Now Move." The officers formed two columns as directed
and with Greenberg at the head of the column they headed to the Allied
lines, a white flag tied to the end of the field marshall's sword.
Joe quickly made two more blasts on his whistle and the small
arms fire started. He and one
of the men grabbed up the pouches and papers on the table and were
about to move back toward their lines when they heard men running
through the brush in their direction. The five Americans that were left
there quickly hid in the brush part of the woods where they could still
see the clearing.
In a matter of minutes about thirty-five germans raced into the
clearing and came to an abrupt stop. Joe quickly called out to them to
stop, drop their weapons or risk being shot. Not knowing the size of
the enemy around them the German's slowly put their weapons down and
raised their hands. They were ordered into two columns.Joe came out of
the woods and the four other American's followed at different points so
that all of the enemy were surrounded.
Taking a german bayonet and attaching to a tree limb, Joe
fastened a piece of a white cloth he had found on one of the german's.
Putting one of his men in the front and one on each side and one to the
rear he marched the troops into the open and toward the enemy lines.
This was too much for many of the germans who had now seen three
groups of their comrades captured by what was obviously superior forces
both in numbers and strategy. Many yelled out and stood with their
hands on top of their heads and moved to the open area. More soon
followed and soon there were over two hundred and fifty prisoners.
Joe called to the riflemen of his platoon and had them round up
the surrendering troops and lining them up in two's marched them back
to the regiment. Here they were told to rest.
Suddenly all was quiet. The Americans were called back to the
trench and ordered to dig in.
Red Cloud returned and Joe told him that he would have to bring up
almost a platoon of reinforcements to make up for the ones that had to
escort the prisoners. The indian laughed and said to Joe, "Looks like
another little big horn in reverse."
Several hours later the men had eaten, cleaned their weapons and
settled down for some sleep when Red Cloud arrived with the rest of the
men who had taken the germans back to the line. Also Greenberg had
several new men and the platoon was once more at full strength.
With this group was an American Major, McCombs. Joe did not know
him and was surprised to see such a high ranking officer up here near
the front lines. This area was reserved for lieutenants and sometimes a
captain, but never a high ranking officer.
The major did not waste words. "Lieutenant Caine I have orders to
take you to Allied Military
High Command. It seems as if you have captured the German High Command
field staff. I think you're about to get a medal." Joe laughed. "If any
one should get a medal it's the guys and not me, he said. They did the
work, give them the glory."
The major smiled and said, "let's go."
Back at the High Command Joe received several medals: the French
Croix de Guerre, the Belgian Cross of Valor, the British Order of the
British Empire and finally the American Distinguished
Service Cross.
It seems that the German offensive was crushed by this officer
and his platoon. Something the entire Allied force had not been able to
do for months.
Before going back to his men he got Red Cloud a promotion to
Staff Sergeant and Greenberg was to sent back and reassigned to another
outfit to help train them for battle. He would be Lieutenant Greenberg.
Several of his men were to receive promotions and commendations would
be put into their service records.
He found a telephone that was working nearby and without thinking
of the time he called America and his wife.

CHAPTER 28

The years had been good to the two families. Joe had brought
Maria's brothers into the business. Juan Carlos had increased his
holdings in Mexico and Spain and had many of his relatives working for
a new company, VCI, Vegas-Caine Industries Ltd. The modern facilities
of the Caine company's ships and rail cars, along with new parts of the
business had made this the largest company of it's kind.
One of the interesting features of the company
was that it issued no stock, nor did it buy any. The stock market was
going farther up each day and yet the families resisted. The rules of
the first Kani Kompany trading post still held. For the new managers,
they were paid a good salary and ten percent of the profits at the end
of the year.
Most of the new managers were the brothers of Maria; but Red
Cloud and Isaiah Greenberg were not.
When the war ended Red Cloud was about to go back to the
reservation when Joe decided that he

need someone of Red Clouds experience and knowledge around to help him.
In the beginning he had to teach the indian everything,including
how to read. It seems as if Red Cloud had no time to go to school on
the reservation. He was too busy hunting and fishing. Red Cloud,
himself, wanted to be able to read and to write. He had seen much and
wanted to be able to put it down on paper for the time when he got
married and would have children.
 Joe saw in this quiet man a thirst for knowledge and he was one
to nurture it and bring it out for good. He wrote his sister asking
what could be done to help the tall indian and was pleased to hear that
there was a school in Pennsylvania called Carlisle Indian School that
educated indians. Calling Red Cloud to the office one day he told
him that if he would go to the school he, Joe, would pay for all of his
expenses. Red Cloud needed to think this over for he had met a young
mexican girl from Texas and had fallen in love with her.
Joe, sensing what the problem was said to his friend, "If this
girl really loves you it seems to me that she would be willing to wait.
When you finish the school I want to make you a manager. You'll get a
good salary and each year you'll get ten percent of the profits of your
part of the company. Talk to her and see what she says."
The next day the indian told Joe that they had talked and it was
decided that he would go to the school. He trusted everything Joe told
him. More than once he had told other members of his family that, "Joe
is really one of us. He is to be trusted."
Isaiah Greenberg and Joe had kept in contact after Joe was
mustered out. The muscular sergeant turned lieutenant was a natural
leader and Joe knew that these were the type of men that would be
needed to keep the company strong.
Over the past few years Joe had assumed the role of the head of
the entire company. Peter was content to run his part of the business
but had no
real feeling for the expansion that was taking place. Joe's father was
starting to age and spent most of his time with his mother and Maria's
family.
The two men went on long hunting and fishing trips together. When
they returned there was always something new that was to be added to
the business. Isaiah had stayed in the army until 1925 and mustered
out as a Captain. Joe went to the mustering out ceremony and took Maria
and Randall with him. Red Cloud was to meet them in Philadelphia, where
the ceremony was to take place. Randall was almost nine years of
age. He had the smooth skin and complexion of his mother. His eyes were
those of his father's family going back over the centuries. His hair
was the color of the raven. He had long arms and legs. He loved to run
and to find the heaviest rocks and roll them down to make a wall where
he kept his horse.
The ceremony was emotional for all of them. The biggest surprise
came when Isaiah introduced all of them to his wife, Rebecca. He had
not told Joe that he was married. Isaiah told them that they had
married when he returned from the Great War. She was a nurse and he had
met her on the ship returning from Europe. He was in love as soon as he
saw her. They all laughed and Rebecca blushed. Holding on to her hand
was a small girl with beautiful long black hair. Her name was Joanna.
Isaiah had told his wife about the tall man from Texas whose
family talked to eagles and to mountains. He told her of his kindness
and how he had made this life possible for them. She told Maria that
they named the little girl after Joe for it was right that she should
have all of his good traits as well as the biblical person who bore
that name.
Joe's wife felt tears come to her eyes and she held the other
women closely. "Come," she said, "we are of different faiths but we
both pray to the one God. "There is a beautiful place where I sometimes
go when we come here on business and I want to be alone and talk to
God. It seems right that we should take our children there. It is time
for us to give thanks for all that we have; our children and our
husbands and above all our lives." Red Cloud had met them at the
ceremony, and the little group all went to Philadelphia's finest
restaurant. The head waiter looked at the party skepticly, but when Joe
handed him his card he motioned them to the best table.
Dinner was good and toward the end Joe turned to Isaiah and asked
what he was going to do now that he was a "free man." The other one
laughed and said that he was going to take a couple of weeks and relax
and enjoy his family. He had started this family late in life and
wanted to make up for lost time with them.
Joe looked at his friend and at Red Cloud who was grinning. He
knew Joe and what he was about to propose. After all he made the same
offer to him.
"Isaiah, after you finish playing house how would you like to
come to work for the Caine Companies? I need someone to take charge of
operations on the east coast. It has to be someone I can trust; but in
your case i'll make an
exception." They all laughed for they knew that Joe only surrounded
himself only with people he could trust.
"The pay will be good and you will receive ten percent of the
profits of your part of the operations. You will be able to live
anywhere you want from Georgia to Maine. Talk it over with your wife
and let me know after she is tired of having you messing up the house
and getting underfoot as I do, and probably every other husband." Again
they all laughed, all but Red Cloud. Joe could see in his face that he
missed Alicia and that he was anxious to return.
When the party was over and they all were about to part, Joe got
Red Cloud over to the side.
"How are you doing at Carlisle?" The indian said that now the work was
easy for him. He was now reading as good as the teachers and that he
was keeping the books for most of the other indians who went to school
there. Joe listened to the other man and then asked him when the school
year would be over. "I have three months to go to get my certificate.
Gee, with that I can pass for a white man." He said with a laugh.
"Well, you now have more education than me. I hope you can give me a
job." The two men laughed. Red Cloud said that he would be back in less
than four months. He and Alicia had been writing to each other and had
talked on the telephone several times. They had decided to get married
as soon as he returned.
"Good. We are going to give you a wedding like the town has never
seen. Start getting all your friends and relatives together and write
Alicia to do the same. Maria and I will take care of all of the
arrangements."
The next day as the three of them boarded the train back to Texas
Joe told Maria of the wedding of his friend. Maria became so excited
she started to tell Joe all that she was going to do, in Spanish. She
always did this when she got excited. Joe just sat back and laughed
and so did Randall.
Arriving back at their home Joe found his father waiting for him.
He thought that was strange since this was the time that the older men
had planned to go to the Orient.
Joe's father came right to the point. "Joe, we have to make some
serious plans for the future of the company. Most of those who have
been with the company since you were little are now retired or are
going to soon. We must think of either selling off part of the company
or finding new blood from our ranks and start to train them to take
over. You are only thirty-five years old and have made more for the
company than I ever did or for that matter any of your ancestor's. Your
son is nine years old and you do not know if he will even be interested
in the business. Peter is dying and he has no one to leave his business
interest to after he is gone. That means that if we keep it all you
will have all of the responsibility. Are you prepared to take it on?"
Joe thought for a moment and said, "Father I knew that this was
coming for some time. I have been preparing for the time when I would
have to
make this decision. I have good managers in place and have just
finished getting the east coast operations now under one person. Soon
Red Cloud will be back from school. He will handle all of the
operations in the Texas and mid-west regions. Maria's brother has done
a great job here and is ready to move to more responsibility. He could
handle all of the west coast and the fact that he speaks the language
of the people will be of a great help. That would leave me free to
oversee the entire operation."
James knew that he had made the right decision that time many
years back when he had sent Joshua on a sled to his grandfather's
trading post. It seemed so long ago and yet it was only in 1898.
This was 1925 and times were different.
Joe brought his father's attention back to him when he said.
"Before I can make any decision there is one thing I must do. It has
been on my mind for some time and now is the time for me to go to
Denali. It is only right that I go to find my
answer where my ancestor's have always found theirs."
The father smiled at his son. He had forgotten that he had done
the same many years before and that it has always been the way of the
Tanana's.
Joe called San Francisco and got in touch with Jacob Ashton.
Jacob promised to have a boat in readiness when he arrived at the end
of next week.
But before he left Jacob told him that he had something that he wanted
to talk to him about concerning the company.
Joe arrived in San Francisco on a Friday. He had said goodby to
Maria and had explained to his son where he was going and why. He told
him of his grandfather's first visit and his great grandfather's last
visit. It was the way of the family to get the answers of the important
questions of their life.
Jacob had met him at the train and took him to the Mark Hopkins
Hotel. After he had settled in his room he went to the lobby and met
Jacob for dinner. The other man was beginning to show his age. He was
greying at the temple and there was the start of a stoop to his
shoulders. His walk was not as spry as it once was. Joe could not
really understand this for there was only about twenty years
difference. He remembered that his father did not walk like that. He
was still tall and straight and had a bounce to his stride.
"Joe I'm glad you came. I was going to come to see you. My health
is bad. I have to go to live in Arizona, the doctor's say. It seems
that I have a problem with my lungs. I'm sorry but that's the way it
goes. I think that you'll have to find someone to take over my duties.
I'll stay until you find someone."
Joe was stunned and saddened by the news and he showed it on his
face. He turned to Jacob saying, "Do you have anyone working for you
who could take over your job? Is there anyone that you could train fast
enough?" The other man shook his head and said "No, there isn't anyone
who works for us."
Joe looked at Jacob and said to him, "It'll all work out, don't
know how yet but it will work out. In the meantime you need to know
that you will have a pension of Twenty-five hundred dollars per month.
Any time you need more, just ask. Tell me where you want to live and we
will buy you your house."
The two men talked of the past far into the night. The next day
Joe boarded the steamer that was to take him to Alaska, and to the
mountain.
The weather was starting to change. Light lasted for about ten
hours now and was getting shorter every day. Joe went to the Kani
Kompany store in Anchorage, both to see that it was running O.K. and to
get outfitted. Just like his father had done, and his grand-father
before him had come to this trading post. The next day Joe went out to
a local stable and rented a riding horse and a pack horse. The
stableman warned him not to be out too many weeks. The winter was
coming and he would have a hard time getting back starting next month.
Joe
thanked him and told him that he would be back in a couple of weeks.
When the man asked where he was going he said, "To the home of my
relatives, the Tanana's." The man smiled and told him the route.
The following day Joe rode into Wasilla and spent the night at
the Inn of the Silver Fox.
The next day dawned clear and cold. Joe was glad that he had the sense
to listen to the manager of the Kani Kompany store. He had gotten a
heavy parka and was glad that he had this morning. Following a hearty
breakfast he started for Sheep Creek Lodge.
He arrived before dark, ate early and went to bed and slept like a
log until morning.
Waking early Joe started out for the little
settlement of Petersville. The day was overcast and the air smelled of
snow. Toward noon the sun was starting it's downward movement. As
darkness came
Joe arrived at Trappers Creek. He had heard his father talk of this
place. The sky cleared and for the first time he saw it! He had seen
the pictures and heard the talk; but now he knew what they too
had seen with that first look.
The mountain filled his vision. He had to move his head to see
the end of the glaciers to the sides. He could see the twin peaks and
the ring of clouds around the middle like a giant belt. He started
toward the mountain almost forgetting that he was hungry. He stopped at
a way station for a hearty lunch. He wanted that to carry him until the
darkness overtook him. He would camp that night and ride to the
mountain the next day.
It was dark when he got to the three huts that made up Petersville.
Oil lights shown in two of the huts and someone called out to him to
come in and warm by the fire. He tied his horses down and fed them. He
always was one to see to his stock.
He introduced himself to the young couple who lived in the three
room cabin. They asked him to eat with them for the man had just caught
a large quantity of fish back at the Hulitna River. It was a great
dinner and after it Joe asked them how far it was to Denali. The young
couple were pleased
that he used the indian name for the great peak. He was told that he
could be at the base of the ring of mountains in front of it before it
got dark the next day.
 The next day was clear and Joe was up with first light. Thanking
the young couple he saddled the pack horse and his horse. After he had
left the young couple found three hundred dollars next to the fireplace.
It seemed every few minutes he had to stop and gaze at this
wonderful sight. He wondered how he would find his answers. By the time
darkness started to come he had reached a gap in the glaciers to the
east of the giant. He quickly set up his camp, built a fire and fed the
horses. As he fixed his dinner a feeling of peace and contentment came
over him.
Morning came and with it bright sunlight. He quickly got his
climbing gear and started to look for the gap that would lead to the
top. He had all the information his father could give him, plus the map
of his grandfather that his father had used on his first trip to Denali.

After working his way around to the area between two glaciers he
found a space that was dirt and rock. As he scanned the mountain he saw
it! There was the rock ledge where his father and all of the men of
their family had gone to trying to find the answers. With tears in his
eyes, Joshua Caine stopped to look at the rock and feel the emotions
run through his body and his mind. As reality set in he started up the
rocky surface looking for the path that would lead him to the rock.
Joe had climbed for what seemed like hours and finally stopped to
eat something. He made a small fire from some of the dried kindling and
moss that he carried with them. Some where he had heard that dried moss
was good to start fires. He made himself some soup and took some of his
bread and put it in the liquid to thicken the soup.
After eating and cleaning up the area he started back up still
looking for the way to the
rock. A sudden loud cry came to him. Was this the great bird who had
guided the others to the rock? He looked around but saw nothing. He
continued up the narrow rocky incline, which now started to get quite
steep. He paused to catch his breath. Again he heard the cry and when
he looked up he saw a great eagle soaring above him.
Joe was not one that did things impulsively, but now he did just
that. He stood up and waved his arms at the huge bird that was soaring
on the wind currents above him. The sun was starting to go down and he
had not yet gotten to the rock. There was no place for him to camp
since he was on a place where there was no level area. The eagle must
have sensed his thoughts for it slowly dropped down and landed on a
ledge to the right of the man. The bird cried out and Joe started to
pick his way toward the spot. Just as he got near the bird, it rose and
settled about two hundred yards above the ledge. Joe got to the ledge
and there he saw what appeared to be a path leading up. At last he
found it; the way to the rock. Again it was the eagle that did what it
had always done. With a cry the majestic bird rose and disappeared.
Joe moved quickly now, for the darkness would be on him in about
three hours. He moved with the strength of a man who had always been
fit and trim.
It took him about two hours to reach the rock. He called this the
"rock of his fathers." Before it was dark he had his small tent up and
his fire going. He made his meal and then looked around in the fading
light. He could see shadows but they told him nothing. Realizing that
all of this would have to wait until tomorrow he settled into his tent
to think.
A sudden noise woke him as light was starting to break over the
mountain. Looking out he saw what looked like a woman moving to the far
end of the rock. He had heard the story of the woman of the rock from
his father and his grandfather but it was just a story that they had
made up to make the
adventure more romantic. Now it was no story. Quickly he got his
clothes and boots on and scrambled out of the tent and ran to the place
where he thought he had seen the woman.
There was nothing there except a small opening in the rock. Joe
pulled himself into the hole and lighting a candle looked around. At
first he saw nothing and then he looked at the walls and saw that there
were pictures. The crude drawings showed a boat, two people, then what
looked like three children. There were other pictures of a big bird
and of a woman. Were these pictures made by his ancestors? Were these
his ancestors? Who drew the different pictures of the bird and the
woman? As he looked at the pictures he could see that they were better
and better with each drawing.
Now the man decided that it was time to see what was in the cave.
Carefully he searched each piece of ground in the small cavern. He
started at the front and worked his way around the sides and the center
and finally to the rear.
It was here that he found the small leather bag. The bag was dried
and was starting to fall apart. He gently opened the bag and found some
of the dried moss, much drier than his.
Digging around the area he found one of the ulu's that his family
had been making for over three hundred years. Strong feelings that he
had never known came over him. He was living with the past. He was part
of that past. He was looking for answers and instead he had found
questions.
Why had none of the others found this cave for many years? It was
obvious that no one had been here for longer than he had lived. His
father had never mentioned the cave.
Looking at his watch he realized that he had been in here for
over five hours, and also that he was hungry. He hadn't taken the time
to eat. As he moved to the front of the cave he realized that he had
not seen the woman who had led him here! He could find no other opening
in the solid walls, as he covered the cave's sides with detail.
Moving out of the cave he came into the light and was blinded,
momentarily, by the sun and the snow. When his eyes cleared he saw the
giant bird sitting near his tent. It looked like the bird had a grin on
his face. The white head-feathers were moving in the breeze and the
feathers on the wings ruffled with the wind. Joe often heard the story
of how his father and Maria's father had slowly approached the bird and
how his father had touched the wings and then the head. Joe slowly
approached the bird who hopped but stayed where it was as Joe came up
to it's side. He slowly reached out his hand and touched the silky
wings and then the large head. The bird looked at him and then with a
hop moved away and raised itself into the air. With a
cry the bird circled the rocky ledge that Joe was standing and then
disappeared. He could hear the final cry of the great eagle but saw
nothing.
Joe fixed his meal and then settled down by the fire to think of
the things that had happened today. He knew that this was perhaps the
most important day of his life. He still did not grasp all of the
things that had happened, but he knew that there was something else he
had to figure out before he left this place.
After he had eaten he decided that he would go back to the cave
the next day. Still he had not gotten the answers he came to find. He
knew he was calm and there was a feeling of enthusiasm and youthful
vigor that he had not felt in a long time.
He still did not know what he was going to do about the business.
He had watched the sun go down and the bite of the wind grabbed
him and chilled his body. He put the parka on and sat out by the fire
for a long time. He was looking for answers. As night closed in he
noticed that the sky was different than any he had ever seen. In the
darkness the sky had cloud-like ribbons of light green and a glowing
light red. It looked as if there were millions of stars making a belt
across the sky. He watched as the belts waved as if on a sea of black.
His mind seemed to clear of all things and he sat as if
there was nothing in him. He was part of the sky.
Sometime later he realized that he was still sitting in front of a
dwindling fire, and that something or someone else was nearby. He tried
to see in the darkness but there was nothing. He crawled into his tent
and into his sleeping bag.
There must be an answer here, he thought. What was it? Where was it?
Morning came and with it a snow storm. Joe knew that he was not
going off the ledge today. He had enough food but in order to keep warm
he had better go back into the cave. Getting his gear quickly, he
gathered up the wood that was still near his tent. After two trips
everything was in the cave as the heavy snows started to fall.
This was one of the heaviest early snow storms that Alaskan's
could ever remember. Most storms didn't come until November, not
August. Everything was covered and covered deep. Denali could not be
seen, even from the settlements. This was the storm that held Joshua
Tanana Caine captive.

CHAPTER 29

Joshua Caine looked different when he returned to his home nearly

six months from the time he left. His hair had turned almost totally
grey and the trim, well developed body was gaunt. The face was lined
and there was a strange gleam in his eye.
Joe's wife called her father-in-law when she had learned that Joe
had been found and that he was on his way home.
James, Polly and Maria's father and mother came as soon as they
got word. Joe had gotten there just a day before them and had some time
to spend with his wife. He was still tired, having lost over forty
pounds while trapped in the cave for three months. He had survived on
snow for water and the small quantity of food that he had disciplined
himself to eat only when he was at a point where he was becoming
delirious.
It was no good asking him what had happened while he was in the
cave. He said, "I saw lives of

our family, from the first of our family to that of grandfather. I saw
the things that I needed to know, and the people that I should always
remember. I saw the eagle and it talked to me and the woman saved me."
Maria thought that he was still delirious but Joe's father was
not so sure. He tried to explain to the woman what the mountain and the
eagle meant to the men of the family and indirectly to the women as
well. She started to try and understand but soon gave up.
It was weeks before Joe started to regain his strength and with
it his sense of humor. The glint in his eye brightened, and he was once
more back to work. Now, however, he was looking at the business with a
different viewpoint. He had talked to his father about what he thought
they should do and his father told him, "You're in control now and the
decisions are yours. You can talk to me about them but you will have to
make them without my advice."
Jacob Ashton called him early in March of 1927 asking him about
the sale of the shipping company. Joe told him that he had one or two
prospects but nothing new as yet. Jacob told him that the doctor's had
told him that he could not spend another winter on the coast. The
dampness was eating into his lungs.
He also told Joe that there was a group that would be contacting
him about a purchase of the company, but they were not the kind that
would keep the company or it's employees together. He had heard that
they wanted to buy the company and then split it up.
Joe listened and then told his friend that he would not sell to
them and that the shipping lines would be sold within the next two
months and that Jacob would have to stay and help the new owners for a
month. Meanwhile Jacob was to find some land where he wanted his house
and then tell Joe where it was so that he could have a house built for
the other man.
When Joe finished talking to Jacob he called Isaiah and asked him
to come to Texas. He had something he wanted to talk to him about. He
asked

him to bring his family since Maria often said how much she had wanted
to see them. Isaiah said that they would be there in three weeks.
Red Cloud was next on Joe's list and the two old friends would
also meet in three weeks. He would reshape Caine Company for the future.
Joe Caine was about to do what he had found the answers for, in the
cave. The answers were what he had gone to the mountain to find. He had
found them.
Three weeks later, after dinner, the three men went into Joe's study.
They were surprised when they saw him. He looked at least twenty years
older than when they had seen him the previous year. Both Red Cloud and
Isaiah knew better than to ask what had happened. If he wanted them to
know he would tell them.
The discussion was brief and to the point. Joe spoke first. "As
you can see I have been through an interesting experience. I was caught
in a storm, in Alaska, and lived in a cave. Many things happened there.
I have told you both about the eagle and the mountain. This is where I
went to make some decisions and to find some answers. I have done both.
Part of it involves both of you, if you are agreeable.
It seems that we have a problem with the Caine Shipping Lines.
Jacob Ashton is sick and has asked to be replaced. There have been a
number of groups who have wanted to buy it but for one reason or
another I don't want to sell to any of them.
The company is one of the best profit centers we have and if
there is ever another war they will make a lot of money shipping goods
and materials. I want the company to go to someone who will keep it a
profit center as well as keep our family in a good position." With this
last statement, they knew he had regained his sense of humor, and they
all chuckled.
"Isaiah I want you to take over the lines. It will be your
company. I want one hundred thousand dollars down and five thousand
dollars a month for the next sixty-five years."
There was a low whistle from the old veteran. "Joe, this is one
that I have to think about and talk over with my wife about. Also I
will have to raise some of the money. I don't have that much."
"Red", Joe said, I want you take over all of the company's
holdings, everywhere but Texas, New Mexico, Arizona and California.
This includes the east, north,south and midwest as well as the
northwest. I will make you the same deal as Isaiah has, with the same
terms. Both of you must keep the name the same and whenever any one of
the families of any one of us wants to use any of the company's assets
they will have use without charge. I will control the states that I
have mentioned as well as the properties in Hawaii, Mexico and other
countries, except as they are used for the shipping lines."
The indian looked at the other two men. Here he was a red man and
he was being treated as one of them, and he was being given the chance
to be rich beyond his wildest dreams. "I must think this over. I can
get the money from our peoples in the tribe. I must talk to my wife and
consult with the leaders of my tribe. They must tell me what I can do
since I will have to live like a white man. The tribe may want to
disown me. "The three men parted with the idea that they would talk
more in a few days.
The men agreed to the terms that were given to them They made
the provision that they would start the monthly payments starting with
January 1930 and that it would last until 1995. They had six months to
raise the money. Red Cloud left his wife and daughter at Joe's house
and headed for the reservation and the tribal council. Isaiah stayed at
the ranch for a few more days. He wanted the two women to have time
together.
Randall was now fifteen years old and Joanna was seven. It was
strange how much they looked alike. Both had the same color hair and
the dark eyes. Both were quite agile and Joanna was more like a boy
than a girl.
The women were happy as two children spending time at the ranch
and traveling around the state
and into Mexico. When it was time f
124124124124124124124124124124124124124124124124 124124
124124
124124
125125
125125
12612
6¤12
612612
612612
612612
612612
6126
µ126126§126126126126126126126126126126126126126126126126126126-126126-
126126 126126!126126"126126#126126$126126%126126&126126'126126(126126)
126126*126126+126126,126126-126126.
126126
/12
6126
0126126112612621261263126126412612651261266126126712612681261269126126:
126126;
126126
<126126=126126>126126?12
6126
@126126A126126B126126C126126D126126E126126F126126G126126H126126I126126J
126126K126126L126126M126126N126126O126126P126126Q126126R126126S126126T1
26126U126126V126126W126126X126126Y126126Z126126[126126\126126]
126126
^126126_126126`126126a126126b126126c126126d126126e126126f126126g126126h
126126i126126j126126k126126l126126m126126n126126o126126p126126q126126r1
26126s126126t126126u126126w126126ýÿÿÿx126126y126126z126126{126126|
126126}126126~126126126126€126126or Isaiah to leave he thought that it
would be a good idea for Rebecca and Joanna to stay with Maria and have
a good time. He would be spending a lot of time travelling from the
east coast to California setting things up.
It was agreed and the man left with the promise that he would
always come back through Texas. Joe laughed, "So you'll waste time and
money to see a woman. I think I made a mistake. You'll put me in the
poor house." The two men chuckled and said good-bye. As soon as he left
Joanna told them that she was going to have another child. She had not
told "Ike", as she called him because he had so much on his mind she
didn't want to worry him. Maria smiled and gave her a hug.
She had wanted more children but the doctor's told her that if
she tried it might kill her. When she told Joe he smiled and told her
that they would have to spoil the one that they had twice as much. Her
life was worth too much to him. They had a fine son and her life
revolved around her son and her
husband. They both promised not to tell "poor Ike." Joe called Jacob
and told him of his decision to sell right now. The new man who was
buying the Caine Shipping Lines would be there in about two weeks and
he had better send him the plans for his new house or he would be
sleeping under a cactus.
Joe and Maria had talked about the rest of their life. Now there
would be more time for them to do the things that they had always
talked about. Randy would be ready to go off to college in two years.
He had already shown an interest in geology and had spent a lot of
times in the company oil fields and around the gold, copper and silver
mines that the company owned. Joe was told by the chief geologist that
Randy had a feel for the rocks and for the soil. He was also had a
business head and always seemed to know the price of the various ore's
and the closest places to deliver the metals. More than once he had
suggested that they have their own smelters.
 By 1931 all of the other parts of the business had been sold to
the two men. Randall had entered the Missouri School of Mines in Rolla,
Missouri. Jacob was settled near Tuscon and was still working for the
company, checking on shipments to Baha California which had to go
through Mexicali.
Isaiah and Rebecca had another little girl. This one was named
Maria. They had asked Joe and Maria to be the godparents, to which they
happily agreed. Rebecca had found a beautiful house high on a hill in
San Francisco and decorated it in a manner that showed her not to be
one who would flaunt money to others.
Red Cloud had moved to Denver with his family. From here he could
go to most places within a week. It also gave his family a chance to
be closer to their successful son and his lovely wife, and their three
children.
Maria had always heard Joe, his father and her father talk of the
territory of Alaska. Now, she told Joe, this was the time for her to
see what
they had told her about so many times. Polly had not been back for many
years and she was getting to the point where she would not be doing
much more traveling. Maria's parents had also talked about going to
Alaska. It was decided that they would all take the trip together. The
women would spend time together for a short time while the men made a
trip to the "mountain."
Arriving in San Francisco they all met at the Mark Hopkins Hotel.
After taking in the sights of the city they headed to the north coast
up to Mendicino and then to the Redwoods. The trip took about a week.
By the third week in June all were ready to go north.
They had contacted Isaiah and he had an entire ship at their
disposal. It was a small sleek ocean going yacht that had room for ten
passengers and crew. The weather was delightful and they decided to
stop at the cities of Juneau, Vancouver and Seattle on the return trip.
In just the few years since Joe had been to
Alaska he was amazed at the difference. In Anchorage hotels were well
built and had heat. There were more restaurants and transportation
around the city. There was also a new railroad from Seward to
Anchorage.
They took the train down to the little port that was so special.
It was here that the medicine that was to save Nome, was carried by dog
sleds in relays across the frozen tundra over 1200 miles. The ride
through the trees was breathtaking. At the end of the ride they came
around a huge glacier. Joe's mind was already at work. He must talk to
"Ike" about using this deep water port.
After the sight-seeing was over as far as the
men were concerned they settled the women in the hotel in Anchorage.
Joe had made arrangements with the manager of the Kani Kompany to
take care of the women and see that they got anything they wanted or
needed. If they wanted to travel the manager would see that they had a
safe escort. The manager assured the man that he would do anything
necessary to see that the women had a pleasant time.
More than ever Joe had wanted to get back to the mountain. He
had always felt, since the first trip, that there was something he had
missed. Something that was important in his life. He knew that he had
touched the eagle, that he had found the ledge but he was still not
sure that he had seen the woman on the mountain. He also wanted to see
the cave again. He wanted to spend more time in there so he could copy
down the writings. This time he was taking plenty of supplies and going
at an earlier time. There would be time for the men to study the area
around the cave. That had not been done by his father who had not even
seen the cave. The next day the three men started out on their
journey. The weather was good and the days were long. They spent many
hour in the saddle and were able to reach the mountain in three days,
without pushing the pack animals and the horses.
Setting up the camp was easy since the men all knew where it
would be best for their climb to the
ledge. They also wanted the campsite to give them a clear view of the
rocky ledge.
After a hot supper of soup and salmon the men
decided that they would try to sleep longer and start earlier. They had
brought black paper to cover the tent because of the constant light.
Now they put it over the tent and crawled into their sleeping bags.
It was a clear morning and it was warmer than usual. The men did
not have to don the heavy coats that they had brought with them. After
a hearty breakfast they fed the animals and started off on the trip to
the ledge. They had been moving for about four hours and still had not
found the path to the ledge.
Surprisingly the eagle had not appeared. There was something
wrong, James could feel it deep in his stomach. He did not know what
but he was sure that something bad was going to happen.
Shortly after noon they found the trail and started to climb to
the rock. Going up the path
made them slow down. The packs and the age of the two older men made
the climb a long one. By seven in the evening, with the sun still high
they reached the ledge, still with no sound or sight from the eagle.
The men put up their tent next to the wall of rock that was Denali.
Dinner was finished and they sat and waited for.............. It
was time to sleep but the men could not get themselves to go into the
tent. Where was the eagle? It was not possible that the great bird had
not known of their coming. Why would he stay away. They discussed the
matter and finally it was decided that the eagle had died and there
were no others that knew of the sacred rites of man and the eagle. The
men felt sadness but knew that they were here for a reason.
Morning came and with it the search of the ledge. The men had
decided that they would start at one end and work their way toward the
place where Joe has found the cave. As the day wore on they had found
nothing of interest until they came to a tiny
crack in the mountain wall. In it was a small shiny object. Joe pried
it loose with his knife and found it to be a small piece of jewelry
made from bone. Strangely, father and son felt that it had some
meaning in their lives. They talked to each other about the sadness
that gripped them but they could not understand why.
Juan Carlos saw the tiny object that they had found as a thing of
beauty. Joe put it in a small pouch he carried where he also had dried
moss. The search continued well into the afternoon when they decided to
stop and eat. They would continue later but the air was getting colder
and the men did not want to get caught without having eaten in case
they could not keep a fire going.
After the evening meal the wind had picked up to the point that
they had to double stake their tent and then crawl into the sleeping
bags. The wind howled and it seemed as if when it stopped Joe could
hear the cry of the eagle. He asked the others if they heard the cry
but they said no.
The days would become shorter by almost three minutes each day
and they would start to see the dim light that signaled night. In two
hours it would start to get bright again.
This day it was different. The morning was a dull slate grey and
the sun was not to be seen. The wind had died making the day even
stranger to the men. Juan Carlos woke with a racking cough that seemed
to sap all of his strength. The other two told him to stay in his bag
and they would continue the search of the ledge.
By noon the two had found nothing and were heading to the area
where Joe had found the cave. It did not take long to find it and,
grabbing some of the dead wood that had found it's way to the ledge
from the tree line, they started a small fire in the cave. James went
back to the tent to get the lights they had brought with them.
"Joe, come here, quick!" A shout to the man in the cave came from
his father. Joe rushed to the tent and it was then that they understood
the
sadness which had been on them. Juan Carlos was dead. This quiet,
friendly man who they all had grown to love was with them no more.
Decisions had to be made and made quickly. Should they start back
at once? They decided that it was too late to start down the mountain
that day. The cold weather that set in would keep the body from
detiorating.
They carefully wrapped the friend and father-in-law in a blanket and
set him on the edge of the rock where they would start down the next
day. As they started back to the cave they heard the cry of the eagle
and looking up into the leaden sky saw the giant bird slowly circling
the far end of the rock. The bird did not land but flew overhead and
disappeared around the mountain. Another strange happening on this
strange trip.
After getting into the cave they made the fire larger. The warmth
felt good. The father and son sat silently with their memories for
several minutes.
Getting up Joe started over to the wall where the pictures were.
He lit one of the lanterns and started over to the beginning of the of
the picture line. James came over to where his son was and looking with
him at the drawings he said, "This could be the picture writing of our
family. Perhaps this is part of the story of the mountain. Each of us
has added to the wall pictures."
His son turned to him and said, "Dad, did you ever see this cave
or put anything into the wall? I have never seen it" said the older
man. The two men continued to look at the wall. Suddenly Joe let out a
loud gasp; one that was filled with fear and surprise. "My God, this
can't be." he called to his father. The older man came to where the boy
was and looked at the wall. There were obviously some new pictures on
the wall. They showed a man in the cave with what looked like a fire in
the middle. The pictures continued with a drawing of three men and then
with two of the men carrying the other. "None of this was here before.
Look! That's what it was when I sat by the fire I had built in the
middle of the cave. There is a drawing of what happened today.
No one knew we were coming and that there would be three of us.
Juan Carlos was not sick when we left. He was not sick yesterday and
now he is dead and the story is already on the wall. There is something
strange and I am frightened; more frightened than any time during the
war." The father nodded and looking at his son said, "We have no
answer. Remember the eagle returned only after Juan Carlos died, and
then did not come down as he has always done with our family. There
must be a message to be understood from all this but I'll be darned if
I know what it is.
The men continued to search the walls of the cave but found
nothing. As they started to leave James saw an object in one corner
half covered by dirt. Going over and picking it up he saw that it was a
knife. It was different than any he had ever seen. It was not one of
the ones that the family had been making for hundreds of years. This
one was made entirely from bone. It still was sharp. The handle was a
large bone with a slender blade pushed through the middle and down so
that the handle was long enough to let the fist go around the handle
and still have a tight grip. The blade was about ten inches long and
came to a point so that it would seem to go through the toughest of
skin and meat.
It was strange, thought Joe, that I never saw it when I was here
before. Someone has been here and left it for us to find.
"Joe, there are pictures on the handle and on the blade." said
the father. Joe went to look.
On the blade was a small picture of a boat of some kind landing
on what seemed to be a beach. There were what appeared to be two
people next to the boat. On the handle there was a picture of a man
with a spear. He was between two trees and there was a large animal,
probably a bear, thought Joe. The bear was caught between the two trees
and the man had pushed the spear into the front of the animal. Neither
man said anything.
Leaving the cave they packed up most of their
goods, saving their night and morning meals to cook. They avoided the
body and after they had everything ready to go they ate and went to the
tent. They were about to go to sleep when they heard the cry of the
eagle. The cry was somewhat different. Getting out of the tent they saw
two eagles that looked alike. The two landed at the far end of the
rock. Putting their boots back on
they moved toward the giant birds. Slowly as the moved the birds also
moved, coming toward them but moving apart.
Joe noticed first that one bird had brown feathers. His father
had told him that young eagles had brown feathers until they were five
or six. Could this be an offspring of the older bird?
Perhaps this too was father and son. For Joe this was a good sign. He
and his father. Could anything be clearer? The older of the eagles had
broken a wing sometime in the past and it had mended slightly crooked.
Morning came and with it a cold blast of frigid air, that happens
even in the summer. The
two men put on their great coats and went down the mountain to get the
horses ready and put the supplies in order. They would come back for
Juan
Carlos.
The day was long and the weather was getting worse. The two men
hurried about their tasks, not speaking but each thinking the same
thoughts. They knew their loss but how would Maria and her mother
handle this tragedy?
After they had every thing ready to go they went back for the now
stiff body of Juan Carlos. The path was not wide enough for the two of
them to carry the body sideways. Having plenty of rope, they tied the
man inside the blanket and used the rest of the rope to lower the body.
In this way they could pass the body to each other.
The trip down took the better part of the afternoon and when they
reached the bottom and were ready to leave both looked back at the
ledge, for each thought that they would never return. For an instant
both men were held spellbound. There on the ledge were the two eagles
and between them was a woman!

CHAPTER 30
The year 1936 had come and gone. Randy had graduated from college
and had taken a year to, "sow his wild oats." James was noticeably
older, Polly had died and Maria"s mother went back to Spain to live
with the two boys who were handling the European interests of Vegas-
Caine Industries.
With much of the world out of work and hungry it was indeed a dark
time.
Randall and Joe would sit and talk for hours about what would
happen if the two who had bought the other business's could not keep up
with their payments. Joe told him that their family would never do
anything to Isaiah and Red Cloud that would bring shame to either man.
"If they can't make the payments we will make it for them. They're only
paying us so if there is a problem we will add it on to the end of the
note." When your grandfather and I are gone it will be up to you to
honor this pledge to those families. Always remember that they are
part of what you have now and what you will have in the future."
Randall was gratified that he had a father who cared so much for
others. The time was coming that the world would be tearing itself
apart. Already the overtones of the beleaguered League of Nations were
crumbling.
A new and sinister threat seemed to be coming from the orient. As
he had taken a trip around the world on one of the ships of the Caine
line, he saw that the Japanese were people who had a lot of skills and
were making copies of the things that the Germans and the Americans had
made. They were quick to learn and to modify for their needs. He had
seen many new naval ships in Japan.
While in China he had seen the first movement of communism come
into the country and was surprised at how many of the people embraced
it.
He had always taken America for granted and it was this trip that
changed his viewpoint forever. As a scientist he could put things into
their right order and what he had come up with was a world with no
direction or real leadership.
One night he was discussing this with his
father and said to him, "One day one of the countries of Europe is
going to have a leader who will be able to control the whole of the
continent. When that happens we had better be ready to hold our own,
both in leadership and in strength. We never seem to be ready to fight
when we have to until the other guy hits us first."
Joe looked at his son, remembering his days not too long ago. "I
remember seeing just that back in the war. You know that was only
twenty-one years ago and here, by your reasoning we are about to do it
all over again."
The two men talked until late in the evening and then went to
bed, each thinking of the other and what his role in history was or
will be. When When Randy woke up the next morning he told his
family that he was going to Oklahoma to see if there was a place for
the Caine's in the mining industry of the state. His father smiled and
his grandfather laughed a hollow laugh, "Souns' just like a Tanana, eh
Joshua?" The old man chortled.

Joe turned to his son and said, "Remember to always follow our
methods and you won't go wrong. If you have someone working for you
treat him with respect and pay him all that he is worth. If you want to
open a part of the company while you are there, be sure to call me so
that I can come and see if it is what we want. You are the last one
left to take over all that we own. You must take care of your
grandfather, your mother and me. Remember you are a Caine." At this
point the eldest one of them all looked at the boy and taking his hand
he said in a cracked voice, "and a Tanana."
For several weeks Randall wandered all over the state looking for
the right mix of materials that would make a blend of workable
materials that the company could use and make a profit on as well.
It was on trip to the farthest part of Northeastern Oklahoma that he
found what he was looking for. The town was called Bartlesville.
Only about eighty miles from Tulsa the oil city and only forty or
so miles from the Kansas

border and a days drive from western Missouri or Arkansas; the area was
rich in mining, oil and oil refining. This is what he had been looking
for. In the back of his mind, for time now he had been toying with the
idea of using mud to lubricate the oil drills and the drills used in
the mines. Here was the place he could test this idea.
Calling his father he told him what he had found and what his
plan was for the area. He needed around twenty thousand dollars to get
everything up and running. Joe told him to open an account at the local
bank and then have the banker get in touch with their company bank for
the transfer of the funds. He also told the boy that he expected a
report each week on all that had happened.
Randall did what was asked and the reports were starting to show
what his family had known all along. He was a "rock hound."
In a matter of weeks Randall had everything running to his
liking. He had hired good crews and was paying them more than the other
crews working

for someone else, but as he told the men, "Be honest with me and I will
be honest with you. Give me a full days work and you'll get a full days
pay, without someone coming to collect for getting you a job." The men
were happy and worked hard to please this young man who was so good to
them. In a matter of weeks The first mine was opened and the men were
already pulling forth lead and zinc from an area just to the east of
Bartlesville. Just to the south he was building the first of the new
Caine refinery's.
It was 1937 and the dust bowl of Oklahoma and Kansas were taking
their toll. Men, women and children were making a mass exodus from the
states.
Many of these people had little or nothing but the clothes on their
backs. Randy saw this and knew that he had to help. He called his
father and asked him if he would "loan" him twenty-five thousand
dollars to buy land from the farmers and workers who were leaving the
area. Randy knew that this could not last forever and that the land
would be

worth a fortune later on, but now he could buy it at an honest price of
twenty-five cents an acre.
Joe listened to the young man and the stories of his ancestors flooded
his mind. He said to his son, "I won't loan you the money." The boy
voice was low and the sounds he made were ones that touched his
father's heart. He had not heard his son cry in since he was a young
boy. "I said I won't loan you the money, but if you will pay each of
the families seventy-five cents per acre I'll give you the money. You
say the land will be worth a fortune later, but we must not make this
fortune on the misery of others. If you will do this the money is
yours." The boy's voice had a new and vibrant sound to it as he said,
"I see in you what I will become. It is strange how many lessons I get
from you and never read a word. There is also another matter. I have
met a young lady and dad, she is great, wonderful, beautiful and smart.
I think you and mother and grandfather had better meet her before I do
something foolish."
Joe said,"We would like to meet her but grandfather is not doing well.
I was going to suggest that you come back soon for it may be the last
time you will be able to talk and see the old man. Bring the young lady
down to us. Bring her mother if she would like to come. Just finish
what you are doing and come quickly."
Little Bird was a Cherokee. She was a light bronze color with jet
black raven hair. Her eyes were a deep brown that seemed as if they
could see everything. Her features were soft and dainty. She came up to
Randy's shoulder and probably weighed about one hundred pounds. When
she sang it sounded like one bird calling to another. She never walked,
but seemed to glide.
This was the girl that Randall was bringing to his home in Texas.
Little Bird's mother, Dancing Waters, came along so that the family of
this man would not think that her daughter was not perfect in every
way.Little Bird's mother and father, White Buffalo, the Shaman, were
not happy with their daughters choice, but they had hoped that with
mother along the other family might
not let their son continue this courtship.
After ten days Randy had finished buying the land that he had
sought. If his instincts were right and his knowledge of rocks and
minerals were also correct they would have much to be thankful for in a
few years.
Randy, Little Bird and her mother, Dancing Waters took the train
from Tulsa to the home of the Caine family in Texas. The greeting was
much more than Dancing Waters had expected. The mother of the boy put
her arms around her and walked her into the house telling her about how
Randy had said so many nice things about her family, and how proud she
must be of the important place her husband held in the tribal
hierarchy. Then as they entered the large entrance hall she showed her
a picture of Polly. Dancing Waters looked puzzled and Maria laughed.
"You see your daughter will not be the first of your blood to be in our
family. This was my mother-in-law, Randy's grandmother. His great
grandmother was also indian as was his great-grandfather. In fact the
only one that does not have the blood of the indian in her is myself."
Randy is three-fourths indian. Great-great-great-grandfather had
married a Russian girl about two hundred years ago. The indian blood
always returned as surely as the eagle returns to the Tanana's."
The woman did not understand this last statement and the other
woman told her it was part of the ritual of the men in the family. That
the women only found out about it after they were married. It was said
that only the one who would be the last of the Tribe would know the
secret of the ritual, and then just before his death.
All of this Dancing Waters took in for she too was acquainted
with such thoughts and rituals as her husband did his sacred dances and
chants. Was this to be a joining of two tribes, she wondered?
The time the evening meal was to be served they had all managed
to become good friends, all but grandfather who still had not made an
appearance. Joe went up to get the old man and bring him to dinner so
that he could meet the girl that was to be his granddaughter. As they
came into the room Randy gasped. He had not seen grandfather for
several months and the way that he looked the boy knew that this was,
indeed the time to be home. A once robust, strong and vibrant man was
now a mere shell with deep set eyes and hollowed cheeks. His color was
ashen and yellow. His walk was slow and unsteady. He clung to his son's
arm as they made their way to the table. Randy came over to him and
gave him a squeeze and a kiss on the forehead.
During dinner as they chatted and talked of the future plans
there was little doubt that the two young people loved each other very
much. Little Bird's mother saw that this was the way that it was
to be and knew that this was the right thing for the families.
As the talk continued and the coffee was served, Grandfather
Tanana slowly pushed himself up out of the chair. Leaning on the table,
he said. "Well Randy it looks like you have decided to cast your lot
with me and marry a beautiful indian princess. When your grandmother
and I got married everyone but our family thought I had lost my mind.
The funny thing was that I had found it, in my Polly whose name in
indian was Pohatas or wise one. That she was, was Pohatas. She took the
name Polly when I was away and when I returned she told me that she had
this new name. It was to make me look better and to go farther. If she
had never done that it would have made no difference.
Love is not in a name. It is in a look, and I have seen that look
between you and your young lady. Our family has always been part of the
indian nation, this was and is, because of our actions to our friends.
Your father's friend for years, Red Cloud, is an indian, but more than
that he is a friend.
You live in a world that is harder to understand than when I was
your age. Now we have a radio to listen to people from everywhere. A
telephone to talk to people everywhere. There are talking pictures so
people can see people everywhere.
The best thing is not in all of those things but for people to
see each other in their hearts. This is what you two young people must
do if you are to have a marriage as good as your parents. I can see
that you have done this and I am glad that I am living long enough for
the day when you two will be married. Just don't wait too long for I am
coming to the end of my journey back to the mountain.
When you get married I have already planned your wedding present,
but that is for the wedding. Now I think it is time for me to go back
to bed. Joshua remember don't think because I am old I can't see or
hear. I'm still smarter than you any day. After all I am a Tanana. Now
help me to bed." As he said the last part they all laughed and Little
Bird went over to the old man and gave him a hug and rubbed her nose on
his.
Maria and Dancing Waters spent much time together in the week
that followed. Joe and his son also spent a great deal of time together
working on plans for the new mining and refining programs that Randy
had started.
It looked as if the Caine family fortunes were again on the rise,
this time to what could be its highest level. Oil was at an all time
high. Lead, zinc and glass were in great demand. Randy had opened up
one oil field, three refineries and a zinc mine, with plans to open a
second and even a third field. The young man had a lead smelter working
to capacity.
One of the things that he did, that made all of the people in the
area very happy with him was to give jobs to those who stayed. Many of
the other mines were worked by itinerant workers who were paid about
half of what Cain Mining Inc. paid.
It was the spelling of the first word that attracted his fathers
attention. "Where is the last letter of our name, Randy?" The son
replied. "There was a miner who had a small claim and was working it.
His name was Jacob Caine. I felt that I could not use the same name. It
might cause others to take it out on the old man. He is a "hard hat
rock zincer", and I feel that our name is what we have and we are known
by it. The sound is the same. In fact I will change my spelling to that
so people will not confuse us. I know that you would not object since
you yourself did the same thing many years ago. Also it is good to do
something good for someone else who is less fortunate.
I tried to buy him out and even offered him more than I could get
out of the ground, but he refused. Too proud, I think." Joe could only
agree with his son. He felt a glow of pride in this son who was so much
like him and like his father, but had the kindness that was the way of
his mother.
Little Bird and grandfather James were inseparable. They sat for
hours in the sun and talked, or rather he talked and she listened. It
was the story of a great family, she decided. One that would make her
parents happy. The old man and she would laugh over some of the stories
of the early indians who lived on their land. How his daughter would
teach them all of the white man's words and signs and they would go
back to their families who did not understand, so they ended up talking
in their native words.
Mostly the old man talked of the future for the two young people.
He had asked her if she was in love with his grandson and she "yes."
He wanted to be sure that they would be married before he died. This
was the sad part of their talk, for he knew, like an indian, that his
time was close by and that he would be leaving the earth for his
heaven.
The young girl promised that if he would wait until the spring
she would bring her family here for the wedding. He had to promise her
that he would "go nowhere."
Time was all too short and the two families had to separate.
Randy knew that he could not stay away for long periods of time. He had
no one to run all of the mines and handle all of the many details of
the refinery. He also was looking at other business in the area. There
was a small paper mill about seventy miles away that he was interested
in buying. Dancing Waters also wanted to get back to reassure her
husband of the fine match her daughter had made.
Little Bird had one last talk with the old man. She had a secret
to share with him. The old man cried with tears of joy and holding the
girl close said good-bye to the beautiful young lady who told him that
her english name was to be "Polly."

CHAPTER 31

The wedding was a brilliant affair. White Buffalo invited all of

his relatives who wore their finest clothes and feather bonnets. The
women wore their soft deerskin dresses with bright beads sown into the
fabric. It was beautiful and colorful. The friends of Maria from
Mexico all came dressed in the look of the Caballeros. Jacob Ashton
came looking old but fit, his cough gone. Maria's mother came from
Spain with others in the family.
The guests ranged from Paladins to old Jacob Caine who worked the
Caine Mine. Many were just the plain people who had known this family
and had never begrudged them their wealth.
Also two other families came; families that would bind the ties
for all of them. Ike and his family and Red Cloud and his family.
After all of the ceremonies and the music and dancing were over
the young couple were about to leave on their honeymoon to Europe.
Grandfather Tanana said, "Randy, you have made a good choice. In
fact if I were fifty years younger I'd take her away from you." The
room full of people laughed. "Since I'm not you're safe. Now you have a
person who will share all of the things in your life. She is wise. She
has good instincts and comes from a proud and noble family. Your blood
will again be united with the blood of the indian. That will bring to
you honor and truth and wisdom. I am old and I may be rambling but
these are the words that I feel in my heart and know to be true. You
will get much good counsel from your new father-in law, White Buffalo,
who by his very name is sacred and above all forms of pettiness. I hope
that you will remember all of this for you are now going to carry a
larger burden in life. I am coming to the end and I only wish that your
grandmother lived to see this, but I know that she is looking down from
heaven and is smiling. When I finish, your wife has a special gift for
you but now I want to give you a small gift that has no meaning for you
now but will in the future. You will never be in need of money, but
this will be something that you will always need." With that the old
man took from his coat a small leather bag. He handed this to his
grandson.
The young man looked in the little bag and saw some fine web-
like material. "What is it grandfather?" "It is dried moss. It has
always made fires to warm our family since the first of our people came
to Alaska over three hundred years ago. Keep it with you and when the
time comes you will know what to do with it." The young man knew of the
eagle and the mountain and knew inside that this would have something
to with the mountain and the legend.
Turning to his wife in a choked voice he said, "My grandfather
said that you have a gift for me Little Bird. What is it?" The girl
went over to her father and led him to the old man and with one on
either side of her she said to her new husband, "When I was with
your grandfather I saw his wisdom and heard his words. He is more like
my father than anyone I have ever known. I will now live in the white
man's world, your world. For that reason I must take a name that will
bring honor to you and your family. I have talked to my father about
this matter at great length. He has agreed that when I am in your world
I will have an American name. When I am at my peoples home I will be
Dancing Waters. But in this new and wonderful life that I shall share
with you I will be called, Polly."
Both families looked on in silence as the two men slowly embraced
each other, a smile between each of them. No words but the thunder of
their emotions could be felt by everyone in the room.
The following day the two newlyweds left for New York and the
start of their honeymoon and their life together. The trip was to be
about four months. Joe said that he would look after everything for
them. He knew that it would be good for him to get back into doing
something useful for the family.
That night Joe, White Buffalo, Ike and Red Cloud went into the
study to smoke cigars. Joe

liked White Buffalo as soon as he had met him and the feelings seem to
be shared by the tall, proud indian. The talk came around to the
children and Red Cloud seemed to be ill at ease. Joe sensing that
something was bothering his friend but this was not the time nor place
to discuss the matter. Tomorrow they would walk alone and talk.
Tonight the talk turned to the times of each one's past, together and
apart. It was as if a great spirit had descended on all of them at the
same time.
Joe thought of the eagle and wondered of its true meaning. Was
this to be the linking of all their spirits, past and present.
When a week had passed all of Dancing Waters
family had left as had Ike and his family. Maria cried as Rebecca left,
hoping that they would see each other soon and yet feeling that time
was going fast in their lives. The year was 1938 and America was
showing signs of coming out of the Depression.
The two women hopped that they would be around to see the ne world that
the new president Franklin

Roosevelt said was coming.

Red Cloud had stayed behind. He needed to have a talk with his
old friend and benefactor, Joe. Red Cloud was worried, Joe could see
that and he turned to his friend as they walked the land and came to
the stream that always had made Joe feel good inside. It was a quiet
place where he would come to be alone with his thoughts.
"Joe, I've got a problem with one of my sons,
James. It seems that he has decided that he wants to travel and be on
his own. He wants others to see him not as an indian but as an indian
who is better than others. I have to get him into a different state of
mind and I don't know what to do."
Joe thought for a moment and then a smile came across his face.
Red Cloud had seen that smile before when Joe had figured out how to
capture the enemy twenty years ago. "Red, what do you think of James
coming to work in Randy's business. We can give him some responsibility
now, before the young couple comes back and if he works out I will see
that he gets the traditional offer of a percentage of the profits. That
has been the trademark of our family for over one hundred years now and
I know you see how well it works. In Fact I probably gave you too much.
You look more like a white man now and probably your math is better
than mine. You cheated me, you tricked me, you could always read and
write. You just wanted me to take pity on you and think that you were a
dumb indian." Both men sat and laughed so hard that tears came to
their eyes.
It was soon agreed that the young man would come next week and
that he would work with Joe doing a lot of the dirty jobs that had to
be done as well as make some decisions in some of the smelting
operation. This would be the place where he could be most useful for
the heat of the operation would be too much for Joe for long periods of
time. He would be so tired and dirty by the end of the day that he
would have no desire to show off. He would be in an area where many
poor indians, mexicans and white men lived together. He would see what
he had and why he had to be proud but not boastful or arrogant.
Before leaving Red Cloud and his wife, Alicia,
talked the matter over and the next day Alicia said to Joe and Maria,
"We are so lucky to have friends like you both. You are always there
when we have needed you. What you will do for James is almost too much
to hope for, but in your hands it will be God working for us and our
boy. I will light a candle for you each day. I am so proud that Red
Cloud had chosen to name our son for your father."
That was the first time that Joe realized that fact. He was
overcome and cried for some minutes before he could even speak. "Have
you told this to my father?" Joe asked when he was again able to talk.
"Your father has known it from the time the boy was born. We called him
and got his permission."
The following week James Cloud came to the house. He was a tall,
well built, handsome young man. He dressed in what was the latest rich
man's
fashions. His coloring was a blend of his mother and his father. He had
the mannerisms of neither. He was aloof and arrogant. It was as if he
was the one doing them the favor of coming to live with them and help
out in trivial matters.
After a tour of the land and dinner the young man said that he
was going to the town to see what there was to do. He dressed in his
"quality" clothes and left. Joe and Maria were stunned that such a
person even existed. They had known wealth and had lived with the poor
as well but this was someone that they had never encountered. Joe went
to the phone and called Red Cloud who had just gotten home from the
office. "Are you sure this is your son?" He said. "Did they make a
mistake at the hospital and switch babies with you two? He is different
than anyone I have ever seen. He reminds me of the German officer we
captured who had to be sure he was dressed properly before
surrendering."
Red Cloud's voice was almost a whisper when he said, "I think you had
better send him back. I
never should have even asked for so great a favor. I had hoped that he
would, at least, be somewhat subdued when he arrived." Joe laughed, and
told his friend, "I'll send him back when he is a better man or else a
broken one. He is about to learn the ways of my fathers. I'll keep you
posted. Tomorrow will be his first test when we get up at five-thirty
and head north."
The morning was dark and cool when Joe got up. He had asked
Maria the night before if she would fix breakfast and tell the cook and
the maid to sleep in until the two men had left. After Maria had headed
down to the kitchen he went to the boy's room and started to wake him.
James could hardly open his eyes. He had spent a good part of the
evening drinking something called Tequila and he was paying for it now.
Joe told him that breakfast would be in a half an hour and they would
leave for the mines and the north one hour after they had finished
eating.
When the boy came to the table he looked as if he had not slept
in days. Joe and Maria smiled. They knew that he had learned his first
lesson. Also they were pleased to see that he did not whine or
complain. He drank lots of coffee but little else except for some toast.
By seven that morning they were on their way to the station to
catch the train that would take them to Bartlesville, and a new
adventure. Joe was feeling good. He was going back to work and he was
helping a friend.
It was a two day trip and for the most part the boy had little to
say to the older man. As they approached the end of the trip Joe turned
to the boy. "This is the only time I will ever tell you this. Your
father went to school because I told him that was the way he would be
able to better himself. He did not need to spend his life on a
reservation. He did what I asked. He worked hard for our family. He
became one of my two most trusted friends. If I had a problem I only
had to call. When he bought the part of our company it was
as a friend and he has never let me down. You, on the other hand, have
let your parents down. Your father asked me if you could come here and
see if I could help you straighten out your thinking. Money is not the
sign of success. The friends you make, the loyalties you earn and the
respect that people have for you are the greatest riches you can
possess.
Two weeks ago my son married a beautiful indian girl. Her name
was Dancing Waters. In front of her father and me she took the name
Polly, which was my mothers name. She also was an indian. The first of
our family to come to this land over three hundred years ago were
indians. I am probably more indian than you in my heart. That is pride.
You on the other hand show none of those features; but with me, and
with my son later you will be able to become what you really are
inside. If you do well you will be given the same opportunity that all
the others, including myself and your father have been given through
the Tanana family, which is the true family name. If you do well you
will be given a
chance to own a part of a business. That is, you will manage and
receive a percentage of the profits as well as a salary. You do not
have to give me an answer. Your actions will be your answer. You will
go back home a better person and a far richer person than you are now
for you will have much more than wealth.
On the other hand you may choose to leave any time and go home a
far lesser person than when you came, for you will show your parents
that you are a failure. The choice is yours. This is the last time we
will ever speak of this matter. Do you hear what I am saying?" The boy
nodded and looked as if he had been hit in the stomach and the breath
knocked out of him. He did not know how to react. No one had ever
talked this way to him, ever!
The train pulled into the station and the two men climbed off and
headed for the only decent looking hotel. The town almost looked like a
boom town in the old west. Cowmen rode horseback through the streets,
passing motorcycles and cars while trolley's, on tracks, were pulled by
mules.
Indians, and whites, mostly poor from their looks, and mexicans
walked the wooden sidewalks. Dust was everywhere, and was soon all over
their clothes. Both men went to their rooms and agreed to meet in the
lobby in two hours and find a steak dinner.
When Joe came to the lobby he was surprised to see the young man
dressed in plain pants with a jacket and was wearing older boots. Joe
smiled to himself. He had hopes for this young man. The blood of his
parents was starting to run in his veins.
They found the biggest steak in town, along with mounds of mashed
potatoes and beer they were soon full and ready to walk some of the
meal off.
They came to a beer hall and Joe asked the younger man if he
wanted to get a drink. "Are you kidding? I won't go near one of these
places for a long time. I get sick even smelling the stupid place." Joe
laughed and said, "We had better get a good night's sleep. Tomorrow
will be busy. You will start to take over some of the work and I will
get myself back to doing things that I used to do.

CHAPTER 32

Randy and Polly returned to the house where they had been
married. Randy wanted to hurry back to his office. He had not heard
from anyone for
the past five months and was worried about his father and the young man
he had brought to the smelter. Polly on the other hand had to stop and
see Grandfather James. They shared an unspoken bond and could sit for
hours, not talking but saying much with their eyes and their
expressions.
A week later having talked to his father, and being assured that
nothing too terrible had happened, the young couple went to the home of
White Buffalo where they spent the better part of a week.
Some of the braves decided to see if Randy could ride and hunt
and they set about a three day trip to get meat and fish. When they
returned a feast was held and the ceremony of giving of the name was
held. Randy was to be called, "Hunter Of Many Things." The next day the
couple left for their new home.
 Arriving at the offices of Cain Mining and Exploration Company
Randy was shocked to find the place cleaner than when he had left.
There was a bright, smiling young woman sitting at the desk in the
front. "Good morning sir. Is there something I can do for you?" "Is
Mr. Caine here?" the young man asked? "Who should I say is here, sir?"
Asked the woman. "Tell him it's an old acquaintance."
The girl went into the office and soon Randy's father came out of
the rear office. "Randy, your back! Darn it all I was hoping you'd
stay away longer. I really like the idea of working again.
I see you've seen Irma, the office girl. She takes care of all the
calls and the mail and people who I don't want to see. Irma, this is my
son Randall. He owns the company and that makes him your boss."
The girl smiled shyly but with some uneasiness. Randy quickly put her
at ease. "Glad you're here. It sure looks a lot better than when I
left."
Joe and Randy spent the better part of the day
going over the books and records of the company. Towards the end of
the day Randy called Polly and asked if they had enough food to feed
two hungry men. Polly laughed at her husband and told him that they
could get by.
That night Joe felt better than he had felt in a long time. He
was in the house of his son and his daughter-in-law. The feeling was of
warmth and happiness. After the meal the two men sat on the porch and
talked of the future. "I think that you have the right idea here,
Randy. What are your long range plans?"
"Dad I think that the smelter business can spread to many parts
of the country. While we were in Europe it seems as if the whole world
over there is gearing up for war. The Germans have some crazy guy named
Hitler building far better guns, tanks and planes than we have here in
America. They have started a campaign against the Jews and he has the
people believing that they are responsible for the depression all over
the world. We need to be ready to melt many things in our smelters and
I was
thinking that we also need to build smelters near some iron mines.
There is going to be a great need for iron and steel in the next five
years or I miss my guess. The company can grow rich and at the same
time do a great deal of good for the nation and maybe even the free
world, if there is such a thing."
Joe listened to all of this and knew that the boy was right. He
remembered how it was with the Germans during the last war. They had
better equipment than we had at the time. We won because of might.
Polly came out to where the two men were sitting and said, "Have
you solved all of the problems of the world; and if so how about a new
one?" The two men looked confused as she went on. "It seems as if
your son is a very strong man. He must have overpowered me in a moment
of weakness and now he going to give you a grandchild." Randy was
stunned and Joe was glowing. "Wait until I tell Maria and Grandfather
James. They will be on cloud

nine." "I have already told grandfather and by now he has told mother
Caine. I will tell my parents soon, but this is the time for you to
know. The baby will be born in February, maybe on Valentine's Day. If
so it had better be a girl.
The two men looked at her and then at each other and broke out in
laughter and tears.
 The next few weeks were busy ones for the Cain Company. James
Cloud had proved to be an excellent manager of people. He had taken to
calling himself "Jimmy." He told them that it made him sound like one
of the "guys." Jimmy had taken over the hiring of men for the mines and
all of the rest of the company projects in the area. He understood the
philosophy of the company and he respected it as one that did the most
good for the most people while it made huge profits. Everyone wanted to
work for the company. People who had lived here before the draught and
the dust were coming back to the town. They had heard of the Cain
Company and how it paid a living wage so that its employees did not

have to beg. They also heard of the school that Jimmy had set up for
the migrant people of the
area so that they could learn the basic skills of
reading and writing and how to count money so the merchants and others
could not steal from them.
Joe had realized from the first that the boy was trying to
impress his father by attempting to be a white man in a red skin. The
talk Joe had with the boy on the train was all that was necessary. In
fact over the next two months even Randy knew that this young man was
something that would be special to the company, and he was doing
everything in his power to keep Jimmy with them. He gave him a raise
and then a percentage of the profits while he was working at the
smelter. The family had never done this before. Usually it was when a
person was put in complete charge and the family left them alone to
manage by themselves.
Fall was in the air and Joe wanted to get back to a warm fire and
to Maria. Grandfather was still alive and had, in fact, shown some
improvement over
the past few months. All of them knew why.
On the first monday of October Joe told Randy and Polly that he
would be leaving friday to go back to Brownsville. He said that he was
going to stop and see White Buffalo and maybe go fishing and hunting
with the other man. Randy was caught between emotions; his father had
never looked better and was like a new man, vital and alive. He was not
sure that he would be able to do all of the work that the other man had
been doing plus his own.
He had planned to set up a mining and smelting operation in
Arizona, where there was a great deal of copper and some iron. He was
also buying up small iron mines wherever he could find a seller. He
was absorbed with the idea that America would go to war, and soon. With
his father gone he would have to slow down.
He knew that he had to let his father go back for that was his
life and someday he would be in the same position. That night he
discussed the idea he had been thinking about concerning Jimmy. He
would make him head of the Arizona operations and give him ten thousand
dollars a year as a salary. In addition he would get a bonus of ten
percent of the profits. Joe turned to his son and said that he was
doing the right thing but there must be a clause in the agreement that
would raise the other man's salary each year that the company made a
profit. That meant that he also had to produce more each year to get
himself a bonus. Randy agreed that this was the best course.
Joe said that before he did this he wanted Jimmy to go back to
his parents for a visit. "Make it a vacation." The older man said. "I
want his father to see if the boy has really changed. He will know by
the clothes the boy wears and the people he goes with at night. Then
you will know if he is indeed ready for the responsibility of running
such an operation. After all he has only been here for about nine
months." Randy agreed and the next day he told the other young man
that he had earned a vacation and the company was buying him a round
trip ticket home.
By now Maria was well along in the pregnancy and she seemed
bigger than normal,if there was such a thing as normal. She had told
her mother about the baby and Dancing Waters had told White Buffalo.
When Joe got to their village the three of them spent much time
grinning at each other. White Buffalo said to Joe, "It is time that you
bring your wife to our lodges. She needs to feel what you and I feel as
brothers, with Dancing Waters as a sister." Joe agreed and said that he
would get word to him next week on when to expect them. He would also
see if Grandfather Tanana would be able to come. He was sure that there
would be much that the older man would want to see and to say. It would
bring him back to his childhood and his youth. It was agreed by all and
the next day "Tanana" as he was called left for his home in
Brownsville, Texas.
Maria could not get over the difference in Joe. It was as if he
had stepped into a fountain of youth. His step was strong and springy.
There was a sparkle in his eyes that had been missing for many

years. Even his face looked so much younger.

She was happy that the work had been so good for him.
Grandfather also noticed the change and said to his son, "I think that
I need to have something to occupy my time in such a way as to make me
also lose some of my age. With a great grandchild on the way I've got
to get in shape." The younger ones laughed but were happy to see the
old man with a twinkle in his eyes once again.
Joe called Red Cloud to say that his son was being sent home so
that Red Cloud could see if there was any difference in the boy or if
he was the worse for wear. He told that when he started he was working
in the mine and the smelting plant for about twelve hours a day. It was
back breaking work but the boy was a worker. He was up early and was
the last one to quit.
Red Cloud was to let him roam the streets at home and see how he
reacted to a big city from a dust town. The indian said that he and his
wife would let him know how far the boy had come. He would let him know
after the boy went back to work. Joe did not tell his friend that the
boy was to be given his own operation not too far from where Red Cloud
and Alicia lived.
It was a strange trip to the home of White Buffalo. It was as if
someone had given Grandfather Tanana a new elixir of life. He was
always awake. His eyes were clear and his step was much firmer. He
still used a cane but not like before. He talked to everyone on the
train and they could not get him to go to sleep at night. Maria also
seemed to be happier than he had seen her in a long time. What was to
happen in the village was even stranger.
Maria and Dancing Waters spent much time together thinking about
the new baby and what they could make for the child. Maria thought it
would be a girl and Dancing Waters, a boy. They decided that each would
make clothes for both sexes, just in case.
Joshua, as the indians called him, his father and White Buffalo
walked the camps of the village. Grandfather had a strange look in his
eyes. He told
the two younger men that this reminded him of his youth in Alaska and
the early times in Grangeville to the north. So much was different and
yet the feelings were the same as his youth. He could see in his mind
the homes of his friends: of Running Antelope and Bright Eyes and of
Polly.
The world had changed but the memories still lingered of a time
when all was good. And he thought of the mountain. Once more he knew he
must go to the mountain. He had told White Buffalo of the mountain and
the eagle. The other nodded gravely and then surprisingly said,"I have
heard the story. I heard it from an old chief of the Souix, many years
ago. He told of the man who could tame an eagle and who carried a magic
flame."
James Karl Tanana felt as if he had been kicked in the stomach.
He sat in a chair trying to get his breath back when his son came into
the room. He took one look at his father and then at White Buffalo, who
in spite of being younger than his father looked every bit his age at
that moment. Getting his breath back he told Joe what the indian
had just told him. How the story must have been passed down from the
Tanana family to other tribes and now from a chief in the Dakotas.
Suddenly Joe got a funny feeling in his head, as if it were about to
explode. "He turned to his father-in-law and asked him if he knew the
name of the old chief. "His name was, Running Antelope. He was over
ninety years old but the story came from him as if he had just heard it.
He told me that the story had come from his father's father, and
had been told before.
James knew what had to be done. He knew that he was still alive
for one purpose, to make the last trip back to the mountain--with the
men of their family.
Joshua and White Buffalo tried to talk the old man out of it but
to no avail. He would go alone if the others did not want to make the
trip. Their arguing raged back and forth for several days with Maria
suddenly thinking that there was a way to solve the problem. She went
to the telephone and

called Polly. Polly, after hearing the story, told her she would be
there in three days.
Polly's arrival was a surprise to the rest of the family, for
Maria had kept it to herself. She knew that Polly and Grandfather James
would work out the right answer.
A great feast was held for Little Bird that night. She sat next
to her parents and across from Grandfather James. She could see the
excitement in his eyes. They would talk and then she would be able to
say the right things to the old man and to the family. Tonight was for
eating and story telling for the unborn baby to hear.
The two mothers sat and looked at the girl who by now was huge.
When they were alone later in the evening Dancing Waters said, "I think
it was wise that we decided to make two different sets of clothes. She
looks as if she is going to have more than one child. Maria agreed.
Soon they were to find out how right they were in their preparations.
The next morning Dancing Waters packed a lunch
for her daughter and the old man, who was now getting around without
his cane. He had grown remarkably stronger and much more alert.
The old man and his granddaughter walked slowly down to a stream
and sat by a few trees. Winter was not quite here but the weather was
turning cooler. The conversation was about the trip he wanted to make
back to the mountain. There must be something there that he has to find
before the end of his life. They talked calmly for several hours and
then sky started to darken and cold air started to blow. They walked
back to the village holding hands, laughing like lovers out for a walk.
That night as they ate dinner, White Buffalo turned to his
daughter, Little Bird, and asked her for her opinion regarding the trip
that the old man had wanted to make. All had agreed that she was the
one that all would listen to and abide by her decision. Both fathers
and Grandfather James
listened intently as the young woman spoke.
"I have tried to talk Grandfather out of this trip. He is much
wiser than I am. He has told me of why this return to the mountain is
so important. He wants the three of you to come also. He knows there is
something special about this time. My father is a Shaman and he must
know, above all others, the spirit that moves Grandfather. It is
surprising that you would not honor his request. All that he has done
for you he has done in the spirit of the eagle. I tell you that this is
the most important thing in his life. It keeps him alive. He must go.
More important you must go with him. Father this is a great honor that
he gives to you. You will be bound, for life, as brothers. It is a
sacred trip much like the ones that our forefathers took over a century
ago when they left Florida to find their own land. There is nothing
more that I have to say. It is the will of the spirit god's of our
fathers. The spirits of our people have spoken to me as I have spoken
to you this night."
Nothing else was said that night. Everyone
went to their beds with many questions and thoughts to sleep on before
morning came.
There was no other decision to be made. The men had agreed to
listen and do what Little Bird said.
White Buffalo had much to do. There was the picking of another
Shaman if he did not return. Joe had to go back to the house with
grandfather James and prepare all of their papers in the event that one
or both did not return. Randy had to take Little Bird back home and he
had to go to the office and make sure that all was in order. Irma would
have everything under control inside of the office, but what about the
outside, the mines and the smelters. Joe would call Randy in a few days
to give him Red Cloud's report. If it was what they both thought then
Jimmy could run the operations until they got back.
If something happened he would be able to keep it going or sell
it and give the money to Polly and Dancing Waters. There would be more
than enough for the women to live well for the rest of their lives, and
also for Jimmy to have a good nest egg to start on his own or work with
his father.
After getting home Joe called Red Cloud to get a report. The
Indian had been trying to reach him for several days. He could not
believe that this was the same son he had sent to Joe. He was as
different as the night was to the sun. Red Cloud and his wife were
happy beyond belief. The boy apologized for his "stupid" actions before
he left. They saw he had changed, especially when they went to church
on Sunday. Jimmy went with them and they were surprised to see that he
knew the service almost by heart. They had asked him about it and he
said that there was "a very nice girl" that he went to church with each
sunday and then they would walk and talk of the future.
Joe told him to send Jimmy back as soon as he could get there.
When he returned, Joe told the young man of the trip they were about to
take. He asked that he watch over his wife in the event that he didn't
return. He would take care of everything, but nothing was going to
happen to the men.
CHAPTER 33
The four men reached Anchorage in the spring of 1939. They had to
wait for four months before leaving. Both the weather and the birth of
the new child came first. Only there was a slight surprise for Randy
and Polly. Polly had a fine strapping boy, and then a beautiful little
girl three minutes later. They named the boy, Peter, for Joe's cousin,
and the girl was nam146146‚146146ƒ146146„146146…
146146†146146‡146146ˆ146146‰146146Š146146‹146146Œ146146146146Ž146146
146146146146‘146146’146146“146146”146146•146146–146146—
146146˜146146™146146š146146›146146œ146146
146146ž146146Ÿ146146146146¡146146¢14614
6£14
6146
¤14
6146
¥14
6146
¦146146§146146¨146146©146146ª146146«14
6146¬146146146146®146146¯146146°146146±146146²146146³146146
´14
6146
µ146146¶146146·146146¸146146¹146146º146146»14
6146
¼146146½146146¾146146¿146146À146146Á146146Â146146Ã146146Ä146146Å146146Æ
146146Ç146146È146146É146146Ê146146Ë146146Ì146146Í146146Î146146Ï146146Ð1
46146Ñ146146Ò146146Ó146146Ô146146Õ146146Ö146146×146146Ø146146Ù146146Ú146
146Û146146Ü146146Ý146146Þ146146ß146146à146146á146146â146146ã146146ä1461
46å146146æ146146ç146146è146146é146146146146ë146146ì146146í146146î146146
ï146146ð146146ñ146146ò146146ó146146ô146146õ146146ö146146ø146146ýÿÿÿù146
146ú146146û146146ü146146ý146146þ146146ÿ146146146146146ed Robin for the
little bird that had blue eggs. This was sacred to her people. Randy
agreed and the whole family gathered at the little Methodist church in
town. Red Cloud, Alicia, Ike and Rebecca and White Buffalo's whole
family came for the ceremony. They almost filled the church but there
was still room for Jimmy and Irma.
The townspeople knew that Jimmy and Irma were in love with each
other. Now she was to see Jimmy's parents together for the first time.
After the baptism of the children Jimmy and Irma went to lunch
with Red Cloud and Alicia. The lunch was warm and friendly and Irma was
happy to
be with such a loving family. Her parents had been dead for many years
and she had no one to give her the feelings she saw they gave to their
son. Jimmy was given permission to keep his relationship with Irma.
This was the tradition of Red Cloud's people. As soon as Polly
was able to travel the family went to the home of her father. Family
and friends came to the town and filled the rooms of the little hotel
in the town. White Buffalo had gone ahead to make sure that everything
was in order. The ceremony was sacred to his people and since the
babies were to be brought up knowing both of their heritages he wanted
the village to part of the children's life. As the Shaman it was his
duty to lead the ceremony.
When the time came for the ceremony Randy did not know what to
expect. He had seen the dances but this was a new and mystical
experience for him. White Buffalo, in all of his robes and feathers
stood in the center of a ring of fire. He chanted slowly for many
minutes and then started to move in
a circle doing the traditional dance of the bird. As he danced, one by
one the chiefs of the tribe came into the circle and danced with him.
Unexpectedly Red Cloud stripped off his shirt and he too entered the
ring with the others. White Buffalo saw this and a fleeting nod showed
his approval.
In his native tongue White Buffalo called to Little Bird to hand
him the boy. He took the child and holding him up to the sky he stopped
and chanted in song for several minutes. The others in the ring then
passed the child, each holding him up to the sky. It was as if the
child was being offered to the heavens. The boy was then passed to his
mother and the girl, Robin was handed into the ring.
This time it was Dancing Waters who came into the ring and held
the little girl to the sky while her husband chanted. Maria, feeling
the moment, stepped into the ring and was followed by Alicia and then
Rebecca. At this point the wives of the chiefs came into the ring and
sang a different chant. Dancing Waters smiled broadly and gave the
child back to her husband who once again held the child up. The people
became silent. White Buffalo slowly took his knife from his belt, cut
his finger and then put the tip of the knife into the little girls
hand. He ran his blood into that of the girls and slowly raised the
child to the sky. The child made no sound through all of this and in
fact looked down at her grandfather and smiled. All of the indians
broke out in grins and the singing was loud and happy. The ceremony was
over and the festivities began.
Polly explained to her husband, telling him that since the girl
was the second born her blood was to be united with the family so that
she would carry all of the wisdom and traits of her people mixed with
his people. She also said that the children had been given proud names.
Peter was to be known as Soaring Hawk and Robin as Blue Egg.
When Randy laughed at this Polly explained that this was a high honor
and meant that Robin would be treated as something almost sacred as the
eggs of
the robin were sacred to her people.
Two days later the party broke up, but not before White Buffalo
and Grandfather James went for a ride to the river. Joe was surprised
to see his father almost leap into the saddle and gallop away causing
the other man to race after him. When they returned in the afternoon
Grandfather seemed not to be tired at all, but instead looked around
for someone to play horse shoes.
The following day, with everyone going their separate ways Joe,
Maria and James Karl went back to sit out the winter in Brownsville. It
was this time that they used to make plans for the coming trip.
It was late in March when the four men arrived in San Francisco.
Ike had rooms reserved for them at the "Mark." They spent the first day
and a half touring the city and the areas to the south as far as
Monterrey. On the third day they met with Ike and getting their luggage
together they made their way to the steamer reserved for the length of
their stay here and in Alaska.
For White Buffalo this was like a dream world. He had never seen
so many people. The cable cars fascinated him as did the motion
pictures that talked. They took him to see a western and he laughed at
how badly the indians acted.
 Once at sea White Buffalo continually stood at the rail and
smelled the air. He had never seen anything like it and was amazed that
there was no land. Joe would bring his father up to spend time with old
friend. The sea air did not seem to agree with him and he took to
wheezing and coughing. After three days of this the old man
stayed down in the large living room. Joe and Randy usually took turns
being with him during the long voyage. At night the large wood stove
gave off a great heat that made Grandfather James almost doze off while
they ate their dinners.
Six days after they left San Francisco the ship pulled into the
narrow passage that brought them to Juneau. The mountains reached
skyward on
each side of the craft and looked as if they were going to close and
trap the visitors if they made a foolish mistake. It was obvious to the
men that this was a different world. What had been a great gold bearing
area seemed to be settling into decay.
There were some mines still operating, the largest being the A-J
mine. Old Joe Juneau, for whom the city was named probably never
expected an end to the gold bearing earth but the time had arrived and
with it came the exodus of people.
After a hearty dinner at the Alaskan Hotel and Bar the four men
returned to the ship preparing for next day's final leg to Anchorage.
Grandfather James sensed that they were getting close by the end
of a week. You could see his spirits rise and the color return to his
face.
The others were ready to leave the ship as well. There had been a
violent storm four days earlier and all of them had gotten sick. Now
the sun was out and the coastline came into view off to their right and
up ahead. The captain called to them that they would make land the
following day.
Early the following morning the ship rounded a point that put
them between what appeared to be two islands. They headed up a passage
way that was called Cook Inlet. For the better part of the day they
slowly moved toward Anchorage. The tall forests and the sight of the
great birds riding on the currents gave all of their spirits a lift.
They knew that they were nearing the end of the first part of their
journey. In the afternoon, about three o'clock, when the sun was still
holding fairly high up in the sky, they docked at their berth in
Anchorage.
Since Joe's last visit much had happened. He could see there were
many more buildings and a railroad came down to the docks. There were
people everywhere and snow was moved off of the streets so that horse
drawn trolleys could take passengers around the city.
Finding a small hotel off the corners of 4th
and I Streets the four men had their baggage brought to the hotel and
they went to their rooms to take a long hot bath.
Eating at a local bar and grill the men decided on a good night's
sleep and an early start in the morning. Randy was to take a course in
"mushing."
The following day as the four men started out to find the old
Kani Kompany store, Joe looked over to the north. The day was bright
and clear and in the distance he saw "the mountain." He turned to his
father and pointed. The old man looked and the others did also.
Grandfather James' eyes brightened. Somehow he seemed to stand
straighter and looked younger. He could make out Denali.
The old indian also saw the mountain and a startled look came
across his face. "That is more than a mountain." He said. "There is
great medicine on that mountain. I must climb and do the sacred rites
of our people to the great God who lives above all. Never have I
thought that I would see
the dreams of our people. It has been spoken at our fires about this
mountain but we had always thought that they were stories that were
made up. Now I know that you and I are more than just brothers of
blood." He said this while turning to James. He slowly moved closer to
the old man and held him tightly as he spoke in his native tongue.
Grandfather James looked at his friend and smiled as if he understood
all that was said. The moment was one that none of them would ever
forget.
The day was spent in getting the goods from Kani Kompany. The
store still had the faded picture of the eagle and the mountain over
it's doors. The manager of the store came to meet them after being told
of their presence. He could hardly believe that here were three
generations of the original family who had founded the business and
built the empire of Kani. Nothing was to be spared for their needs. The
best of everything. After all he was a Tanana and his family had run
the little store for over two hundred years.
Word spread quickly about the strangers and soon many of the old
time settlers and the leaders of the community were at the store to
meet them and to see the living legend that was Grandfather James. They
had heard the story of Joe and his ordeal and wondered at this man who
they called, "the man who would never die." They were amazed to see
that a "foreign" native was with them.
It took the better part of the day to complete their shopping and
to make arrangements for their trip north. All during the day White
Buffalo moved as if in a trance. He said little but kept his
eyes always to the north and the mountain.
The following day Randy was now ready to learn to become a
"musher." He was taken to the little track out west of town out towards
the area called Potter's Marsh. When he arrived he found two sets of
dogs harnessed to two sleds. The old man that was to teach him looked
as if he would not be able to move very far.
The first thing the old man did was to show
him how to stand at the back of the sled, holding on to one of handles.
Then the man yelled at the dogs and the two sleds took off with the men
holding on to each sled. Randy was out of breath within seconds and
letting go of the handle fell to the ground. Onumusu, the old
Athabascan native, slowed his dogs and turned to laugh at the younger
man. "So, did you think that I could not teach you because I am so
old?" The man chuckled, "Your grandfather was taught by me many, many
years ago, and your father as well. If you will do all I tell you, you
will be OK. If not you will die and so will your party."
By the end of the third day Randy was able to do all that was
needed to feed, harness and drive the sled. He found that his stamina
was coming back to him as he became used to the cool air.
Onumusu told the others that perhaps Randy would be able to do "an
honest day's drive."
It was decided that Joe would drive the other sled and decided to
take a few turns to see if he
could still handle the sled and the dogs. After two hours he was
pronounced "a returning musher."
The next day the dogs and sleds along with the equipment were
loaded onto a train and the party headed north to Wasilla.
 Some time later the men decided to get off and travel by sled
over to an area called the Matanuska Valley. They had heard of this
remarkable place where people were farming and growing large vegetables
and wheat. This was not the Alaska that had only cold weather and no
crops.
When they got there they found that the planting had been done
and the people of the valley were building more buildings to store
crops.
The trip had another benefit. This gave them a chance to load the
sleds, position the two men on the sleds and work the dogs. It proved
to be helpful and after spending three days in the valley, the men
headed to Willow.
Arriving in Willow they picked up the rest of their food
supplies, as well as food for the dogs.
This they would have to carry for the entire trip.
Boarding the train they again headed for Talkeetna, arriving
shortly before dark. Unloading the dogs, sleds and supplies lasted
until darkness had set in at the rail siding. After bedding the animals
down the four men headed to the restaurant on Main Street. Joe had
remembered the town and saw that it had changed little since that last
fateful trip.
The following morning the small party loaded the sleds and headed
cross country to the little town of Trapper Creek. The trip took about
an hour and they were in high spirits as they passed through and headed
for the few huts that made up Petersville, about five hours away.
The men were hungry and fatigue was starting to set in on Joe and
Randy. As they pulled into the little stopping place the sun broke
through for a moment and the mountain was seen in all it's grandeur. As
if it was directed, the four let out a loud gasp at the sight. Nothing
could describe the feeling of the men. It was a spiritual experience
that seemed to bond them to the mountain. A bond that was to last
forever.
Stopping for the night at a new road house called "The Forks",
they bedded the dogs down for the night and proceeded to eat a hearty
dinner and get a good nights rest.
The next morning showed the men how quickly the weather could
change. As they woke the wind was howling and snow was flying
everywhere. The day dawned cold and the men knew that this would not be
the day they were to start for the little path that was to take them to
the mountain and their next adventure.
As day changed into night the weather showed no sign of changing.
Randy fed the dogs and hustled back into the little road house, to wait
out the storm.
It was on the fourth day the snow and wind started to slacken,
and by the next day all was quiet. The sky was still leaden and the
clouds were
heavy with moisture; the air was brisk and the ground covered with
several inches of fresh snow.
The men knew that the storm had done one thing in their favor.
The fresh snow would make things easier on the dogs and the sleds would
glide at a much quicker pace. As they loaded the sleds and hooked up
the dogs they knew that this would be the last part of the trek to the
mountain.
Many of the glaciers and peaks that surrounded the great mountain
had started to be named for people and native groups. The men were
heading for the space between Mt. Hunter and Mt. Foraker known as the
Tokositina Glacier.
After a late breakfast the small party headed north towards
Denali, and the discoveries of the past and the future. The men covered
the twenty odd miles in good time reaching the west base of Mt. Hunter
by the late afternoon. Setting up camp, feeding the dogs and checking
their supplies carried them into the dark part of the early evening.
The men all went into the big tent and planned their meal and the next
day's activities.
After finishing supper the four men studied the maps that they
had brought with them. After planning their ascent they each drifted
off to sleep and the dreams that each had brought with them for this
adventure.
As if by design the sun came up and the weather warmed. The dogs
were fed, the men ate and prepared their packs. Each would have light
packs for all that they would need would be food, tents and extra
clothes. Each would have a large rope that was carried over their pack.
A new climbing cleat that fit over their boots and made the climbing
much easier than ever before.
It was late in the day when they reached the rock ledge where
they were to find the cave. There was still no sign of the eagle nor
had they even heard the cry of the bird. The day had been ideal and
the men were comfortable in the knowledge that they had been able to
climb without too much effort and that they had conserved their
strength.
It was as if the trip was making the two older man young again.
White Buffalo and Grandfather James had held their own and did not hold
the others back. When they got to the top the two older men dropped
their packs and headed to the far side of the ledge as if they had
wanted to be alone.
It was just what they had wanted. James had told his friend that
perhaps there were so many of them the giant bird was afraid to come
near them. Grandfather James was right. As soon as the two older men
got to the far edge of the ridge the cry of the giant bird was heard.
Spiraling toward them came the great bird. It slowly circled them and
came down on the rock between the two groups of men. As if it was
planned Grandfather James moved slowly to the bird that hopped from one
foot to another. As the old man moved closer the bird ruffled his
feathers and finally settled down. James smoothed the bird's feathers
and quietly called Joe to come next, then Randy. Before they could call
White Cloud over the bird suddenly
lifted off of the ground and flew to the old indian, settling down next
to him.
What happened next was something that those who would make it
back would never forget. The eagle reached back into it's body and
plucked a feather from the underside of it's wing. Slowly the bird
turned to the old indian and dropped the feather at his feet. Both the
indian and the others knew that this was the ultimate sign of
friendship. It was also a sign of great bravery.
Slowly the old indian picked up the feather and placed it in his
hair. The bird returned to the others and the indian slowly walked over
to them and joined the group. It was as if the eagle had known the old
indian and wanted the rest to know that he was worthy to be here.
As the men started to fix their meal Joe gasped and then pointed
to the rock above the far end of the edge. There silhouetted against
the darkening sky appeared the shape of a woman. Joe had seen this once
before but was still startled.
The others looked in silence as if the shape would
disappear with any noise. Suddenly the shape vanished and the eagle let
out a loud and different cry and soared off into the night sky.
Strangely there was little discussion of what had taken place as
the men had their evening meal.
They each had seen something remarkable and it had left each with their
own thoughts. Sleep was hard to come by for the three men of the family
but the old indian was asleep as soon as he lay down. There was a
quiet smile on his face and he looked even younger than they had ever
seen him.
Morning came and with it the anticipation of the climb to the top
of Denali. The morning meal finished, the men adjusted their cleats and
started up the side of west ridge.
The first part of the climb went slowly so that their lungs could
become accustomed to the higher altitude. By midday they had passed the
18,000 foot marker.
After eating the older men decided that they would go first so
that the pace would not
be staggered. By nightfall the four men had reached the area below the
face. They could feel the wind around them as the darkness settled in.
The night seemed to be different than any other they had known. They
knew that the climb that was left was the real test.
As old as Joe was he could not imagine the two older men making
this last part of the trip. Tomorrow they would own the mountain, but
at what price.
Morning dawned clear and bright. Day came earlier than when they
had first come to the territory and lasted longer before the darkness
came to signal the night. On this morning they ate quickly and packed
their gear for the climb on the face of the great mountain. Joe had
hoped that they would reach the area just below the summit before the
end of the day. If they did not they would sleep standing up for there
was no place where they could stretch out between where they were and
the narrow ledge that they could settle down on to rest and sleep
before the final assault.
The climb was rugged but with the two older men leading the way
they reached the final resting place well before night came. With a day
well spent and time drawing near, the four men slept the sleep of a job
well done but still not finished.
After a cold dry breakfast the party, once more, prepared
themselves; this time without their packs. It was only several hundred
feet to the top. Without the extra equipment they would make the climb
much easier.
It was shortly before noon when the four men got the breathtaking
view from the west peak. They had reached the summit. They had defied
the odds for the three older men were, in fact the oldest to have ever
climbed the mountain in it's short recorded history.
White Buffalo started to chant. He moved with a grace that seemed
to belay his years. The chant became louder and the pace more frenzied.
The old indian reached into his sacred pouch and threw what appeared to
be ashes into the wind, to be scattered
and never found again. The chant suddenly changed to a slow sing and
the man moved and swayed with the words as if in a trance. This lasted
for several minutes and the other three knew that they were witnessing
the most sacred of all indian chants and ceremonies that only the
Shaman could perform, and then only at a very special time.
The chant ended and the indian looked tired and sat down to rest and
gather himself together.
Looking off to the north Grandfather James saw a shimmering river
in the distance. Something deep inside him told him that he was looking
at the river of his heritage. The old man spoke to the rest saying,
"Look into the distance where I am pointing. Do you see the river? I
think that is where our family first started out. Who knows where they
were before then but today I know that this was birthplace of my great
ancestor Rangak. That was the place where we began over three hundred
years ago. That is where we must go from here. We have conquered a
great mountain. Now we must go to the source of our lives. There must
be a village in the area that will help us to trace our heritage."
The son and grandson listened in silence, but White Cloud now
spoke. "It is a wise thing that you do my brother. My people have come
from the north as well and we have always wondered if we would ever see
the place of our ancestors birth. Much wisdom comes from within when we
are in touch with the spirits. They lead us and will guide us to the
right answers if we are pure. We are much alike my brother and the
great spirit that is the one true spirit guides us both. We must
follow."
It was settled. The men would camp on the top of the mountain
that night, take pictures of the setting sun and of the rising sun the
next day. Then they would repack their gear and head back down to
their base camp, and then down to where they had started and where the
dogs were tied.
Joe and Randy went back to where they had camped last night and brought
the things back up to the peak. After the picture taking and all of the
warm clothes were put on the men sat around the small fire and each
with his own thoughts feeling the
presence of a spirit stronger than anything they had ever felt before.
The second day of the descent brought them back to the rock ledge
where they had last seen the eagle. The wind was picking up and the men
decided to find the cave and to sleep inside in the room that Joe had
spent so much time that winter, so long ago.
Finding the little cave they quickly built a fire and ate their
evening meal. Then with their small flashlights they studied the inside
of the cave. Joe showed them the writings on the wall and White
Buffalo looked in amazement. "I know this writing for I have seen it in
the caves of my people to the north of our lands. These are messages
that tell of the animals that lived here and of the tribe that lived
only two suns from here. This is the sacred cave where the spirits
bring those special members of the tribe. It is here, according to the
writings, that the eagle watches over the chosen family of the tribe
when
they are brought here for their last rites. The writings say that when
each one has been brought something of value is brought with them to
keep them from being without, when they return from the upper world."
The men fell silent thinking of what they had that would be of value to
leave here so that they too would not be without in the next life.
The following morning the base camp was packed and the men
carried their burdens down to the camp where they had left the dogs.
The dogs had come through in fine shape. They were chained far
enough from each other so that could have their food without one of the
others taking it from them. The were still close enough together that
wolves could not get to them.
Morning came and with it came another bright and beautiful day.
The sleds and the dogs were readied for the return trip to Petersville.
The ground had stayed cold and the snow was now packed and more like
ice. This would make the going
easier. They were leaving earlier and Randy thought they would be able
to get to Trappers Creek that day.
As they started to push off they once more heard the cry of the
eagle and looking up toward the rock on the mountain they saw two large
eagles soaring around the rock and swooping down toward them. Looking
up at the rock again there was a loud gasp and there clearly outlined
against the sky was the shape of a woman.
The eagles came to them and just as they looked like they were
about to land they rose once more into the sky screaming. Dropped at
their feet were four small rocks. Each one appeared to have been
scratched by the beak of the eagle.
A gift from one who had brought them there. They thought of the
great spirit. Looking up to the eagles they saw them soar over the now
vacant rock. Now they too were leaving this place and wondering if any
of them would ever return. For two of them they knew that if the spirit
had it's way they would be back.
It was past nightfall when the little party
reached Trappers Creek. It was here they stayed for the next few days.
On the second day while Joe and Randy were eating breakfast and talking
business the two older men went to the trading post and asked about the
towns and villages to the north. When James Karl asked the name of the
great river to the north he was told that it was called the Tanana
River. His eyes lit up and he tried to find out more about the region
but was told that the only person who would know was an old native
called Oonooska. Oonooska was about ninety years old and had been born
near the area and had lived around here all of his life.
Oonooska was not hard to find and the next day the four men set
out for the little cabin near the train stop. As they waited for
someone to answer their knock, Grandfather James became thoughtful and
seemed to be looking off into the distance, as if he could see what was
there.
Slowly the door opened and a small, frail woman appeared. In
almost a whisper she asked what
was it they wanted. Randy stepped forward and said, "We are looking for
the man called Oonooska.
My father and my grandfather and my father-in-law are here to find out
about our past and we were told that he has lived in these parts his
whole life. We want to ask him some questions. We come from the "lower
forty-eight" and it is important to my grandfather." The old lady
turned and went into the house, motioning them to follow.
The place was only two rooms and were small by anyone's standard.
One room was the living room, dining room and kitchen. The other was
the bedroom. They could see an old man lying on the bed. The old woman
went into the bedroom and spoke softly to the old man on the bed. In a
moment he was up, and moving surprisingly fast joined them in the front
room. "I knew that you would come it was told to me in the dream
world. Sit by the table and tell me what is it you want of me." the old
man said in broken english. Grandfather James said, "My family has been
traced back in the years to this part of your land, which is ours also.
I am the son of Rangak, the son of Karlek whose father was named Kolosh
who was a son of one of ours who was also called Karlek. His father was
Natchusek and he was the son of an older Rangak. We do not know who was
his father, but he also must have come from the north. You are older
than I and may still have some memories of where we came from. I felt a
strange feeling when we were on top of the mountain called Denali. Is
there a town that bears the name of our ancestors who were called
Tanana?"
The old man was quiet and thought for a few minutes. The rest
finally stood and prepared to leave when they were stopped by a voice
suddenly stronger and more vibrant. "You have been to the top of the
mountain and that is powerful medicine. Only a few have ever done it
and no one has ever done it more than once." Grandfather James smiled
and said to the old man, "Both my son here, pointing to Joe, and myself
have just come down from our second trip to the top of Denali."
Oonooska sat quietly looking at the two men.

"What you ask I will tell. There is a village toward the setting sun.
It is three days from the village of Nenana. It is very hard to get to
because you must cross the river where it joins the great Yukon River.
You will have to have a boat to cross for the water is deep and fast.
The ground is starting to get soft now and the snow will not cushion
the feet of your dogs. It will be better if you walk in to find the
village. The walk will take you five or six days from when you leave
Nenana. You must walk on the south side of the Tanana River. When you
see the village of Tanana go past it two hours and maybe a boat will
pick you up. If the people of the village see you maybe you can get
them to bring you across.
I have heard the stories of your family and I once was in the big
village of Anchorage I bought a new coat in the store with the painting
of the mountain and the eagle. The coat is still here." With that the
old man went to the bedroom and brought back a heavy coat that was
starting to show it's age.
"When we return to Anchorage I will send you a new coat and one
for your wife, and I will also send other things that you can use,"
said grandfather James.
The following day the party made the decision to take the train
to Nenana. Randy found out that the train would come through in two
days. They needed the time to gather what they could take with them and
add to their supplies. The two older men carried lighter rucksacks
filled with clothes and some food. Joe and Randy carried most of the
food and supplies they would need. They took two of the dogs with them,
each pulling an indian sled of cross poles that would carry the rest of
the food that they might need. They knew that a wrong turn could lead
them astray, and without food they would be in trouble. There was still
some snow on the sides of trees and rocks. The run off would fill their
canteens. The train came and the four men and the dogs boarded and
headed for Nenana and then to the place where it all began, or so they
thought.

CHAPTER 34

The train stopped at the small station that was called the Alaska
Railroad Depot. The area around the station was booming for this was a
construction site for the railroad. They were soon told that this is
the place where President Harding drove the golden spike for the
junction of the railway to Fairbanks.
Nenana is on the Tanana river and the men soon found out that
there were tugs and barges that could carry them to the town of Tanana
in just one day. This was the best news they could get for they all had
started to get homesick; all but Grandfather James. His step got firmer
and he seemed to be stronger than he had been in years.
The river had a good current, but they saw that it was muddy and
they were sure that they would have caught no fish to supplement their
food, as they had planned.
Nenana means "a good place to camp between the
rivers." It's name had been changed not too long ago from Tortella, a
white man's interpretation of the Athabascan word, Toghotthele.
The men had unloaded their dogs and their packs and headed to the
Bed and Maybe Breakfast for a nights lodging. The night had again
turned cooler and the stars would not be out this night.
Getting their rooms and taking care of the dogs the four men set out to
eat a hearty meal. All of their appetites had increased since they had
come to this northern land. From dinner to bed, for each was tired and
eager to make the final leg of their journey to the town of great
mystique.
The next day dawned and they knew that there would be no trip
this day. The snow and the wind would not let any barge move on the ice
choked river. The bad weather lasted for a week and they only ventured
out to eat and feed the dogs.
The day came when the wind and the snow stopped and the river
settled back into it's running pattern. The party loaded themselves and

their dogs and goods onto one of the barges that was due to stop at the
village called Tanana. There were three other people who were also
getting off at the village. One was a missionary and the other two were
trappers that lived in the village and had taken their furs to
Anchorage to sell.
They arrived in the little village in about six hours. Word had
come to the people that there were four strange men who were on there
way. It had been rumored that they were descendants of the first
villagers. When the barge docked all of the people turned out to see
who were these people who had come to see where their ancestors were
born.
When the small party walked onto the docks with their dogs and
packs they looked around and saw that there was no place that they were
going to be able to stay. They decided to go out to the edge of town
and put up their tents. As they walked the villagers followed at a
distance.
It did not take long for them to find a spot where there was
space to put up their tents and

room to put the dogs out almost as guards.

Grandfather James went to the crowd of men who were watching them
and asked if there was anyone who spoke English. One boy came forward.
He was about nineteen or twenty years old and taller than the rest of
the villagers. The boy said, "I have gone to the mission school and I
can speak your language. Is there any one of you who can speak our
language?" Grandfather James laughed and said, "Why would I need you
to speak my language if we could speak yours?" The boy turned to the
rest of the men and told them what the old man had said. The villagers
chuckled to themselves. They knew that these were the kind of people
who would want information but would not try and take advantage.
After the four had set up their tent and staked down the dogs,
fed them and themselves they sat around a campfire and discussed what
they would try to find out from the villagers. White Buffalo said, "The
people of the village look much like my people. The boy is built much
like the warriors

that you show in your movies. He is smart and it looked as if the men
in the village treat him as an equal. We should first try and talk with
him. He will tell us much if he knows the past history of your people."
Grandfather James was tired but he also had some ideas that
needed to be spoken about before they could talk with the elders of the
tribe that lived here. "What we want to find out the boy will not know
but there are others here who are as old as I am and they will have
memories of the past. Between them we may be able to find if there are
any of our descendants still living here. If there are none maybe they
will know where we can find some of our people. There must be some
clues."
Joe could see that his father was starting to weaken and that
they would have to go back soon so that he could get to the warmer
climate of Texas.
"There will be something here that will tell us something. I can
feel it. It is a strange feeling, different than anything I have ever
felt before. The closest thing to it was when I saw the girl on the
mountain for the first time. Don't ask me how or why; it's just there.
We were brought here for a reason. Everything has pointed to this trip.
The older have been younger in body and spirit from the time we planned
this trip until we came to this village. There is a force that is much
more powerful than any we know that is guiding us and we must follow
that force."
Randy had been quiet through all of the discussion, but now he
spoke. "Have you noticed that no one from the village has come over
here to see what we are doing or how we are set up or what they can
offer us. It is not natural for someone not to be curious by now. There
is an area across the river where it is shallow that I want to see
tomorrow. There is a well worn path into the trees and it may have
something to do with why no one has come here. We are in line with the
path and people must come through here to get there. Tomorrow people
will come, I just know it."
The four men talked some more but the conversation was about
Denali and the feelings that each had when they had reached the top.
Randy was excited. Joe was prayerful, James was misty eyed but also
prayerful; but the most interesting was White Buffalo who was
awestruck, not by the beauty but by the spirituality on the top of this
mountain. As a Shaman he was used to prayers to the spirits who were
always high above them. Now for the first time in his life he felt that
he was in with the spirits. It was as if he could talk with the sun
god, the god of light. He was with the eagle. It had given him a
feather and had led him to the highest place in the world. He had
danced the dance of gratitude to the great spirit who looked at the
world and gave it life. He had lived his life in a good way and now he
had been rewarded. When he got home he would make another a Shaman and
he would take his place with the gods.
The next day the sun was almost at the top of the light when
Randy went across the river. As he
started over the villagers ran to the edge to see what he was doing.
There was a great deal of talking and gesturing at him and at the other
side.
The young man who they had spoken to the day before came over to
their camp and asked them where he was going and what he was going to
do. Grandfather James said, "My grandson is going to see what is on
the other side we have always been a curious family. I see that your
people seem to be concerned. Is there something we need to know. Is my
grandson in danger?" The boy said, "It is the story of my people that
one day when the land was young, a member of our tribe went across the
river and when he came back the great eagle came back with him. The
eagle landed and walked over to him and the boy became a leader. He
travelled away from the village but always came back each year. He was
the grandson of the son of the man who founded our village. It was
hundreds of years ago and the eagle has never come back. It is said by
our people that if the eagle ever comes back the story of our
people will come back with it. We will find a new leader and he will be
the friend of the eagle."
The three men sat in silence and looked at the boy. He did not
know them and what they had each seen. They did not tell anyone of
their individual experiences with the eagle. Grandfather James and Joe
had more than one experience and the others had each had one with White
Buffalo's being the most significant. They would say nothing to the boy
or to the villagers. This was something that they had to tell Randy
about.
That afternoon Randy returned and they told him of the boy's
story. Randy said nothing but smiled. He had been on the other side for
some time and was some distance from the campsite when he heard the
rushing of wings and a large eagle flew over him several times and then
finally disappeared. Perhaps the eagle was saying that one of the
others would have to cross the stream and the eagle would find the true
leader.
That night the leader of the village came with the young man and
asked them if they would like to come and sit in the council lodge with
the rest of the men. The people of the village wanted to know more
about these people who came and were living with them. The four men
went with them to the council fire. For White Buffalo this was much
like the days of his youth and the days of his father. He had heard
many stories from his father about the days when there were still
buffalo to hunt. Now he would sit in the hut of the leaders as one of
them for they were guests of the village elders. There was much they
could learn from each other.
As the men walked toward the hut White Buffalo pulled Grandfather
James back and as they walked together he said, "This is much like the
way our people do things. It would be good to find out much from them
tonight and tell them some about us. In this way they will want us to
come back each night until they know all about each of us; and we know
the history of their people."
The fire in the large wooden and bark room seemed to rush to the
center of the ceiling and out as if to say, "I need to go to the sky to
keep it warm." The men all sat for minutes looking at the curling
wisps of smoke as they wound their way to the heavens. Then suddenly
one of the men spoke in what sounded like rough words. The rest of the
men in the hut were not smiling. Suddenly the boy who spoke for them
stood and looked at the Americans.
He spoke at great length in what they could only guess was a debate
about how to handle the situation. Just as they wanted to learn more
about their hosts so to did the natives want to learn more about their
"guests."
The night was surprisingly warm and the men seemed to loosen up
as they asked the questions of the newcomers. Finally Grandfather James
with a large yawn told the young man to give his apologies but he was
going to sleep. All of them laughed for each was waiting for someone
else to rise so that no one would feel that they were breaking up the
party. As they left it was with the assurance that they would get
together the next night.
The day dawned bright and clear. In front of them lay the river
and beyond the forests and what appeared to be a gentle rise. Behind
them and to the sides there were mountains. On this day it was so clear
that they could see "their" mountain.
They set about cleaning up the camp and then decided how much
longer they would stay and what they would do while they were here.
They had found out the history of the village from what the villagers
could remember. Some of what they had talked about was not new to
Grandfather James.
He had heard some their last remarks from his grandfather and his
father as well. What were the missing pieces and how do they get them
to fall together? All of them were now sure that they were sent to this
place for a very special reason. White Buffalo was making strange
chants and rolled his eyes frequently. Grandfather James prowled the
riverbank as if looking for the clue to
what they were after. Joe and Randy each went off in different
directions looking for something that would bring sense to this part of
their trip. They had already done things that no one else their ages
had ever attempted, let alone completed. What then was still left?
On the fourth day the village boy came to them and said that the
villagers would have a someone special in the village that night who
would be able to answer many of their questions. Grandfather James
turned to the young man and asked him his name. "They call me `the
smart one' but my name is Rangak."
There was a loud gasp and grandfather James clutched at his
heart. His color was ashen and they could see his breathing was
labored. Quickly they laid him on the ground and put cold water on his
face and wrists. Slowly the color returned and the breathing became
lass labored. In a few minutes he was able to sit up. By then most of
the village had come to see what had happened.
Grandfather James turned to the boy and said, "How did you get
that name? The boy replied, "It is a name that has been passed down in
our history. It was the name of one of my ancestors. My grandfather
told me that there had only been three others with that name and that
they all were famous.
" Grandfather James smiled and his eyes were as clear as they had
ever been. "Rangak, we are of the same tribe. One of my ancestors was
named Rangak. He was the son of one of the members of your village
whose name was Karlek. We have traced our family back that far and now
you are part of the puzzle that we are here to unwind. This must be why
we have been sent here by God." Rangak translated all of the to the
villagers who suddenly started to murmur and then chant. White Buffalo
heard the chant and joined in the melody of the words and soon was
swaying with the men to the beat of the chant.
A great feast was held that night for they were to have a visitor
from out of the past.
Perhaps one who would be able to add more links to the chain of their
lives. There were great quantities of a thick soup and a delicious meat
that was cooked to perfection. They were told that this was the deer
that ran in their forests. White cloud asked how they hunted the animal
and they laughed and said, "With our bows and spears. Is there another
way?" A pudding-like substance was for dessert. Everything was
wonderful and they were full.
A sudden hush came over all of the people. Seated at the far end
of the feast was a small person who the four had thought was an older
women from the village. There were so many that looked alike that it
was hard to tell one from another. Slowly the frail person rose
and they could see that it was a man. He was older than Grandfather
James, or so it seemed. He walked over to the four men and sat next to
them.
It was only a few seconds, but it seemed as if was several
minutes, before the man spoke. "I am glad that Uuloonbog asked me to
come tonight. I have heard that you are seeking the trail of your
ancestors. One of you looks like we do but the rest of you seem to be
different. More like the white man who comes to steal our meat and our
skins."
For several minutes the old one went on about how the white man
had always taken from the indian, especially from the Tananas. He told
of the great freeze when the white man used the dogs to carry medicines
to the villages and then killed many animals for their skins on their
way back home. The rest of the villagers made rumbling sounds when the
old one spoke of these events.
"Which of you thinks you are from a family of this village?" the
old man asked, and before they could answer he continued to speak. "I
have lived
for over ninety years. I have lived at the other side of the great
mountains to the east, closer to the great waters of the sea. My people
talk of the man who left our lands to come to this part of the land.
The old people have passed the story of how
this man came to the village because of his brother who lived with the
animals and yet became the head of our village. I first heard the story
from my father's father's father. He told us that he had heard the
story from old people who had heard it from others in the village.
The man who left us came over the mountain pass that my people
use to come here now. He was a good man and taught our people how to
survive against the bear and the other animals. He taught us how to
make clothes of the skins and how to cover the walls of our huts with
skins to keep us dry. He was a very wise man, and very brave. He was
also very sad for the story tellers say that he had lost a wife in a
storm and that is why he came our way."
The four men were spellbound with the tale but they did not
understand why this man had come to tell them this story.
Joe stood up and stretched. "Old man this is truly a great story
but why do you find that you have to tell us this story? What is your
name, old man? "My name is Toomgak and I am named after the other
brother who lived with the animals. The one who came through the pass
and came upon this land was called Rangak!"
There were tears in the eyes of Grandfather James and in White
Buffalo's as well. Both men knew that they were standing at the
beginning of time, as far as each was concerned. For White Buffalo, he
was hearing the story as if it was one of his ancestors who had come
down from the great plains and mountains of the North.
For the others it was as if they had found something that they
could not believe. Grandfather James was the first to speak. "I have
always wondered where our people began. Who they were and who they
became. My life started in the north of the States, but it was also in
a place called "Yukon." It seems as if our people have lived
throughout this land and yet we only know of what has become of the
last few before us. I am old and tired. My strength for this trip has
come from the Almighty. He has guided us to this place to fulfill our
destiny. To unite our families once more. Rangak, for us you are the
newest part of our family, and you Toomgak are the oldest. We bring
together centuries of knowledge that must be written down and
preserved. This is your job Randall. You are the one with the most
education and it is you who must find and record all of the details of
our history."
Randy was silent but he knew that this was the way that it had to
be; he was the only one who could do it. He nodded to his grandfather
and then said, "This has been a long day and I am tired. Let's go to
sleep and tomorrow I will start to write what Toomgak and Rangak tell
me.
There are others here who will also be able to give some
information. We will have to work fast for we must be heading back so I
can see Robin and Peter take their first steps."
It was agreed that they would get an early start the next day.
They all drifted off into a sleep that was filled with dreams of past
adventures, and perhaps new ones. .
Morning came and with it the start of Randy's work. He was
enjoying it for he was learning more and more about his family each
day. The work was hard for Rangak had to interpret almost everything
for him, but he was also learning the language and could, in fact, say
a few sentences now and then to speed up the work.
During this time Toomgak and White Buffalo spent much time
together. White Buffalo had not figured out how the old man had learned
English, since he came from the other side of the mountain range where
it seems there was nothing else but the ocean. When he asked the
Toomgak he was told that there were many villages over there including
a large one that was called Nome. Missionaries would meet with the
people and they would teach them the words. He had studied for many
years.
Joe and his father were busy trying to find out all that they
could from Rangak, when he was not with Randy. Grandfather James told
his son, "This may be the last time any of us shall ever see
our people. We must learn all we can before it is time to go." The son
agreed, but he had a sinking feeling in his stomach that something was
going to happen and happen very soon.
After more than a week of hard work Randy had all but finished
his efforts with the boy and was ready to question Toomgak. The days
were now with them almost all of the time. The sun never seemed to set
for more than a couple of minutes. There was a frantic pace now as they
all knew that they would have to leave soon.
One evening as the sun was moving to the west just behind the
mountains and the trees a great cry pierced the air. Everyone in the
village stopped and looked, with fright, to the sky. Nothing was to be
seen, but a few minutes later the sound was heard again. The villagers
all huddled together, the look of fear etched on their faces. It was a
sound they had never heard before and they did not know what was going
to happen. Randy, Joe and Grandfather James were all nearby when they
heard
the first cry. They knew that it was the cry of the eagle. Surely the
villagers had heard and seen eagles before. Randy went over to Rangak
and asked him if they had ever seen the great bird they called "eagle?"
The boy said that they had seen a large bird high up in the sky,
usually in the time when the sun was out for only a few hours early in
the year. The bird was so high that they had never seen it close by and
had never heard it at all.
The three men decided that they would not say anything to the
rest of the village until they had talked with White Buffalo. It proved
to be a wise thought for the next day was to be never forgotten.
That night White Buffalo and Toomgak came back to the village.
They had been on the other side of the river and been walking through
the forest when they too heard the cry of the giant bird. Toomgak
smiled and said to his new friend, "I think that the giant bird has
come back to the village. Most of the people there have never seen the
bird up close. In fact most of the villagers think that it is only a
story that is passed down to the young so that a leader will be chosen
to lead them for some strange reason. I do not know if this is a fact
but in all of the times that I have come across the great mountains I
have seen the eagle only at the first part of the journey, but when I
reach the part of the mountain that leads down to this river the eagle
disappears. There is something different here than anywhere else.
White Buffalo listened to the old man and then said, "There is
more to this than we know. There is a legend of my people that says
when the bird flies so high that it cannot be heard it is talking to
the gods. We are not able to hear what they talk about but they will
send a message for us to understand."
The two men headed back to the village and each walked with his
thoughts; always turning and looking to the sky.
The next day Randy told the others that he was though and they
could prepare to leave. They had been here at the village for the
better part of a month and now was the time to head back. It would
still be almost a month before each got home.
The villagers were sad to see that the four men were getting
ready to leave. Randy made Rangak promise to write each month to tell
him what was happening in the village. He would pass it on to the
others.
Dusk was now earlier and by eleven o'clock it was almost dark.
Campfires were started earlier and the weather was starting to change.
They had told the villagers that they would be leaving on the next
boat. The people were saddened for they had become friends with the
four men.
Toomgak looked at White Buffalo and said, "Be aware that you are
someone who is special to the gods."
About five in the afternoon it happened. The cry of the bird was
heard and the four men moved to the area just below the river and along
a flat space that led to the village.
Suddenly with a great swoop the bird
flew over the heads of the startled villagers. Many of them fell to
the ground and chanted messages to the spirits. The bird circled the
village three times and then slowly lowered to the ground in the
cleared area where the four men were standing. The villagers stood as
if rooted to the ground. They were silent. The stories of the past were
now the story of the present.
The eagle turned to look at the four men. Randy started to move
toward the bird, but it lifted off the ground and settled further away
from them. In turn Grandfather James and the Joe did the same. The bird
moved further away.
It was now White Buffalo's turn. He turned to the bird and
chanting in his native tongue he moved toward the huge bird. The eagle
ruffled his feathers and moved from one leg to another but did not move
away.
Slowly White Buffalo went to the bird and standing to the side of
it smoothed the feathers on it's head. The villagers gasped and
suddenly started talking between themselves. The eagle stood there
while the old indian talked to the bird. After a short time the eagle
rose and climbing high it suddenly dove toward the ground and White
Buffalo. Quickly the bird came down and when it was only a few feet
from the indian it changed it's course and landed at his feet.
In the eyes of the villagers the old prophecy had been fulfilled.
The eagle had picked the one to lead them.
White Buffalo was aware of what had happened; and to him this was
the will of the great spirit. It was a command and it must be obeyed.
He knew that he would not be going back to his family. This was his
destiny. He was the one that had been picked to lead these people. He
had done this back on the great plains, and now in his old age he would
do it again here in the north. Back to where his people had began.

CHAPTER 35

It was a warm autumn day in 1943. Randy was in the South Pacific. His
unit was in a place called Guadalcanal. Polly had put up a big map of
the world and she and the two children tried to find where their daddy
was.
The Marines had just come there from Australia where they had
been training for some time. Randy had written about the people and the
land down under. He told them about how the families of the "Aussie"
soldiers would take them in for meals when they were on pass. Being a
Marine made him a special person. Everyone had heard about the battles
and how the marines had fought against the much larger forces of the
Japanese.
Most of the time Randy was on patrol, still looking for outposts
of the enemy that had not surrendered. There had been many men killed
by the hidden forces that had vowed not to surrender.
 When Randy came off duty that night he had a

surprise waiting for him. Polly had made a home movie of the family. He
saw the picture of his grandfather who now was confined to a wheelchair
and barely able to talk. His father had also aged but seemed to be in
good spirits. Best of all Polly and the children looked great. It was
the first time he had been able to see what they had looked like in
over a year. They were both now almost five and each was a delight to
watch as they tried to do cartwheels and tumbles.
Robin had dark hair, long legs and a great smile. She also
seemed, from her antics to have a lively manner.
Peter was blonde and had dark skin. He was a quiet child and had
never cried very much as a baby. He walked by the time he was ten
months old and started to read words when he was three. The family knew
that this was a special boy and that he was destined for some
greatness. He was a Cain and that counted for something.
After watching the movies several times Randy went to his tent
and wrote his wife and children.
"My dear family;
I have just finished watching the
home movies that you sent me. It
was great seeing all of you. Dad
you look great! Grandpa it was
great seeing you again. I can't wait
to see you when I get back. I have something for you
from Japan.
Polly, what can I say. You
have done a great job in raising
our children. You can see in them
your looks and strength. Robin you are
my favorite little girl in the whole world and Peter
you have the looks
of a Cain.
You children need to sit down
with great-grandfather and have
him tell you the story of our people You should know
where you came from. You need to hear from your mother about
her family and the great thing that
your grandfather, White Buffalo, did
for everyone. He was a great man. You share his
blood just as you share mine.
I wish I could be with you when you
hear these things but I am far away
in a place that you will read and
hear about someday. I am here so that
you and all the children will be safe
at home in the years to come. There
are many men here who have children
back home and they want to be with
them just as I want to be with you.
First I have a job to do before I
can come home. When we finish we
will all come home to all of our
wives and children and we know that
we will not have to leave you again.
 There are bad people in this world
and they have tried to take away all
that we love from us. Many of my
friends are dead so that you will
always be safe and free. I guess

more will also die but these are the sacrifices that
have to be made for
our families. Wars are bad in every
way but they are real bad for those
who have to be away from the ones
we love.
I think of all of you all
of the time. Polly your picture is
next to my heart. If anything should
happen to me know that I love you. I
am not a hero but I have a job to do
and I am not afraid. Tell grandfather
and my father that the spirit of the
eagle is with me and that I can
always see the mountain in my
thoughts. Last night I had a dream
about the mountain and it was clear
as if we were there. The eagle was circling the
ledge and the woman with
the sunlight in her hair was there. I could not
see her face. I heard the cry of the eagle and then I woke
up.
Well I have to go to work now. Our platoon
is going out to check out the last section before
we leave
this place and go back to a rest area. When we
get where we are going I will write you again.
I love you all,
Randy

It sounds strange, Randy said to himself, Hill

341. He thought, thank goodness this is the last day on this miserable
piece of rock.
The hill had a gentle slope upwards to a knob that was pocked
from const7777777777777ant shelling in past weeks. They could not see
any sign of life and Randy was beginning to think that they had made
it. As they reached the top the platoon was told to spread out in twos
and comb all of the shell holes. If they came across a bunker or
cave they
were to throw a grenade into it before they looked to see if there was
anyone there. They were all aware of the fact that the enemy was
fanatical and many would never surrender. They had seen the mutilated
bodies of other marines who had tried to coax the other soldiers out
and to give up.
Randy and Jeff, his foxhole buddy started to work to the left
side of the ridge, across the top.
They came to a small bunker and as Jeff started to pull the pin on a
grenade they heard a cat in the bunker. As Jeff looked in a burst of
machine gun fire hit him in the face and chest. As he fell back there
was nothing but his dog tags to identify the man who had been an all-
american baseball player with a professional contract signed and
waiting for him back home.
Quickly Randy pulled the pin of a grenade and threw it into the
opening. The blast did it's work, but too late. Randy lifted the dead
marine and carried him down the hill. It was the end of the battle of
Guadalcanal.
On May 27th Gen. Douglas MacArthur announced the strategic end of
the New Guinea campaign. For many of the Soldiers and Marines it was
the end of one battle and the wait for the next one.
The Marines did not have to wait long. On the morning of June 5th
the 2nd Marine Division along with the 4th Marines were once more
loaded onto boats, bound for another island. They still didn't know
the name of the place that they were going, and for many of them it was
the same old story. Wait for a letter from the family or girl friend to
find where they were and where they were going next. It was joke that
the brass wouldn't tell them but the war correspondents could figure it
out and send the information home almost before they landed.
Along with the Marines, the 27th Division of the Army was to land
with them at one of the other beaches on the island that they now found
out was called Siapan, in a group of islands called the Marianas.
Unknown to the high echelon commanding the
operation, the Japanese had built a garrison of approximately 32,000
men. When command found this out they proceeded to shell the island
beaches and hills with over 2400 16 inch shells, the Navy's biggest.
With strong support from the air over 20,000 young Americans men
and boys stormed the beaches on that first day. This was by far, the
largest concentration of troops put ashore in any Pacific amphibious
operation. The date was June 15th.
The Japanese resisted fiercely and Randy's unit found themselves
under constant attack. The Marines had dug in just below the crest of
sand that marked the place where the beach and the trees started to
come together. The shelling had done it's job for the most part and the
trees were almost naked with palms leaves scattered everywhere. Here
and there a tree stood untouched by the battle. It was here that the
Japanes 166166166166166166166166166166166166166166166166 166166
166166
166166
167167
167167
16816
8¤16
816816
816816
816816
816816
8168
µ168168§168168168168168168168168168168168168168168168168168168-168168-
168168 168168!168168"168168#168168$168168%168168&168168'168168(168168)
168168*168168+168168,168168-168168.
168168
/16
8168
0168168116816821681683168168416816851681686168168716816881681689168168:
168168;
168168
<168168=168168>168168?16
8168
@168168A168168B168168C168168D168168E168168F168168G168168H168168I168168J
168168K168168L168168M168168N168168O168168P168168Q168168R168168S168168T1
68168U168168V168168W168168X168168Y168168Z168168[168168\168168]
168168
^168168_168168`168168a168168b168168c168168d168168e168168f168168g168168h
168168i168168j168168k168168m168168ýÿÿÿn168168o168168p168168q168168r1681
68s168168t168168u168168v168168w168168x168168y168168z168168{168168|
168168}168168~168168168168€168168e had their snipers, firing down on
the troops as they lay in the sand.
Quickly flame throwers were brought up to the front lines and the
brave Marines who handled these
torches moved into the open to set fire to the trees and their
occupants. It was a matter of an hour or two and the front line of
trees were secured. Slowly the Marines moved forward and found places
to dig in for the night.
Randy heard it first. It sounded like a low moan coming from
somewhere to his left. He had heard of the tricks that the enemy
played, sounding like a wounded GI; but this did not sound like any
trick. After a few minutes the sound faded and Randy fell asleep in his
foxhole. He often wondered why they called it a foxhole, but no one
seemed to have an answer.
The next day dawned clear and bright with the sweltering heat a
factor even in the early morning. Randy's company was to move forward
to the ridge about a mile to their left and probably the same distance
to their front. As he moved he thought about the cries from the night
before and he kept a
watchful eye out for a wounded man.
They had been moving for about two hours when they came upon an
empty pillbox, blasted open from the naval gunfire. It was here that
Randy saw what could happen to men when hit with one of the world's
largest weapons of destruction. Skin, body parts and bones were
everywhere. Nobody seemed to be in one piece.
By noon the company had reached the bottom of the ridge. The men
deployed and started the move to the top. They wondered at the lack of
resistance encountered so far. Could it be that the enemy was
withdrawing to the other side of the island. If so the 27th Division
would take care of them. Still they were not sure of what was happening
as they slowly moved forward.
 As the men dug in at a point below the crest they heard sounds
from the other side of the hill. Easing forward three of the men,
including Randy, moved to the top and looked over to the other side.
Down at the bottom of the ridge, about forty yards from their
tents were a group of men sitting
around a camp area eating and laughing. In the middle of their circle
was a young girl who seemed terrified. As the men finished their food
the girl would pick up their dishes and scurry to wash them and return
to the men. As she did each of the men tried to grab her. A sickness
came over Randy as he realized what was happening. Slowly he crawled
back to the far side of the crest.
It was late in the afternoon when the mortar attack started. The
shells were landing on the far side of the crest and the men seemed to
relax. Suddenly there was whistling sound and then a dull "crump."
When the smoke and dust cleared Randy was lying several yards from
where he was before the shelling began. Blood was coming from his nose
and from a large wound in his thigh. Slowly the mortars crept down the
ridge causing widespread fear and some panic.
After about an hour of the constant shelling the enemy came over
the top of the ridge. Their fire was heavy and soon the tired marines
were starting to retreat down the hill. Because of the withering fire
all of the dead were left in the hope that they could recover them the
next day.
It was dark when Randy became conscious that he was still alive
and could think. He heard the enemy talking around him. His eyes
focused on several of the soldiers moving among the dead, poking them
with their bayonets. He silently moved his good right arm down to his
side and pulled it close to his body. Suddenly a blinding pain shot
through The arm as he was jabbed by one of the soldiers. He blacked out
again.
When he came to he was aware of the dull pain in his right arm.
His left side was numb. He slowly opened his eyes and tried to look
around. Seeing nothing he lifted his head cautiously and looked at the
area. Down below him he could see shadowy forms. He heard guttural
commands and men scurrying around. Slowly he moved to an abandoned
machine gun with the gunner still draped over the loading breech. He
tried to use his left arm to pull the man off but was too weak to move
him very much.
After what seemed hours the man was off and Randy saw that the
gun was loaded and in the firing position. Swiveling the gun around he
picked out the largest group of men and started to fire.
Men were screaming and falling in heaps. The soldiers turned and
started to fire at him. At that time the marines started to fire at the
enemy soldiers, who by now thought they were caught in a cross fire.
Randy pried open the breech and reloaded the machine gun and
continued to fire at the enemy. Slowly they retreated away from the
area around Randy. Suddenly a command was yelled and a large body of
men started to charge Randy's position. As they dropped one after
another their cries of "Banzai" tailed off. In a matter of seconds the
charge was over and the cries of dying men gave testimony to his
accurate fire; but not before he was hit several more times by enemy
fire.
Randy's company charged back up the hill and soon overran the
enemy.
Blackie, the company medic rushed to the hero of the moment and
started to treat the wounds. In minutes he was taken off the hill and
to an aid station where a team of doctors worked feverishly to save
Randy. He had lost too much blood and the wounds were too many. The
young marine, husband, father and hero died that day, June 19th, 1944.

CHAPTER 36
The Oklahoma sun beat down on the sweating young man. He was
stripped to the waist. His hands had long since calloused from working
in the oil
fields that were called Cain Oil and mining.
His mother and his sister had showed their pride in him for
starting at an early age. He had worked on school holidays and during
the summers, starting at the bottom and learning all of the skills
necessary to master the art of bringing in a well.
Peter Cain was six feet tall and was well built, with blonde hair
and dark eyes. His skin was dark and the sun gave it a bronze look much
like his mother's people.
Robin was dark and had her fathers laugh and his ready smile. She
was every bit the tomboy and could run faster than most of the boys her
age. When she graduated high school she had already decided to
be a teacher. She had heard of her great aunt who had done such
wonderful work with the schools in Idaho. Robin knew the plight of the
indians of the area and the lack of schooling. She and her mother
decided that if she were to get her teaching certificate she could go
to the indians and start a school. The family would help pay for the
books and she would be their first teacher.
Polly had long since quit mourning the death of her husband
Randy. She had a family to raise, as well as Randy's father and
grandfather.
For the past fourteen years she had seen to it that the two young
people never forgot who their father was and what he had done. A
greatful nation had given him their highest award and the blue ribbon
with the medal on the end was placed in a framed case and hung in the
front hall of the house so that all who came in would know of the brave
marine whose home it was.
The year was 1957. The Korean War was over. A new way of
entertainment was around. It was called television. Cars were big and
fast. Movies were better than ever. Life was good for the little
family.
Grandfather James had died shortly after Randy. Joe died last
year and now Polly's family had only each other, and the few close
friends that they had made during the hard times after the death of
Randy.
Mary Jane Thatcher was quite a handful. In high school she was
head cheerleader, captain of the field hockey team and beautiful. She
teased the boys and laughed with the girls. An excellent swimmer she
often challenged the boys to races, which she usually won.
Peter was the one she challenged the most. He was a year older
and one of the best athletes in the school. He could have gone to
"State" on a football scholarship, but decided to devote himself to the
family business. At least one of the family businesses.
As he became older he found out that the family had many
interests and it was his choice as to what he would do with his life.
He was made aware of all of the principles the family followed. He
had been told of Denali by his grandfather from the time he was small
until the old man had died last fall. He had made the promise of going
to the mountain when the time came. It had been told to him that he
would know when that time was.
Peter liked girls and Mary Jane was the one he
liked the most. It was not just her looks but also the way she was
around him. She let him be a man, and she gave him all of her attention
when they were together.
Mary Jane was graduating this year and she asked Peter to take
her to the prom. When they showed up at the dance everyone knew that
they were made for each other. The young couple knew it as well and
that night Peter asked her to go "steady," with him. She sighed, moved
close to him in the car and said, "yes." A warm feeling came over him.
Work in the mines and the oil fields was hard. Peter decided
that he would learn the operation of both when he was fairly young. Now
that he had gotten through the oil part he headed to the mines.
Mary Jane went away to college and Peter went to work in the
family mining interests in Arizona. He knew that the mines were
started by a man from San Francisco almost a century ago. His family
had bought the land and had a Mr. Ashton run it until he died. The man
was running them for his great-great-great grandfather. The man never
had children and when he died the mine foreman took over the running of
the properties for the family. He had grown rich for he received
regular pay and ten per cent of the profits. It was a Cain family
tradition to reward those who rewarded the family with their labor, and
their loyalty.
The man was Leonard Poston. His grandson, Mark who had no family
of his own was now in charge.
When Peter arrived at the copper mines northeast of Mesa,
Arizona, the hot summer sun of June was already doing its work. Peter
felt like a limp dish rag as he got off the bus. It was only ten in the
morning but the temperature was hovering near one hundred degrees.
Mark chuckled to himself as the young man got off the bus. He
thought to himself, "another softy from the owners come to try and be a
man. Others had come from different parts of the family but none had
made it past a week in the summer." He gave this young man three days.
Peter saw a man striding toward him with a smile on his face.
"Hello, I'm Peter Cain, but everyone calls me Pete." Mark looked
closely at the young man and at his hands and thought to himself, maybe
he would last a week.
"I'm Mark Poston. I suppose you're here to learn about the mining
business this summer. You're one of the Cain's so you tell me where you
want to start?"
Mark knew the answer before he asked the question. Like all the
rest he would start in the office where it was not so hot. The rest had
never lasted long enough to learn anything and he knew it would be the
same with this young man. Peter Cain looked too young to be able to get
much out of this except a beer or two.
Peter looked at the other man and saw that he was being tested
and that Mark had little use for him or his family. "Where do most
people start?" He asked. "A new guy starts in the pits as a digger. If
he does well he moves up to a pusher and then a "sapper" and then a
"lead man" and finally, a
"foreman","but you can start wherever you want. You see you're really
the boss."
His voice took on a hardness that Pete had heard in the oil
fields when a new man came to work and was told that Pete was the
owner's son. The men learned quickly that they had misjudged this young
man. The first fight in the oil field told them that this was no
ordinary soft kid from the rich side.
"I'll start in the pits. You move me when you think I'm ready to
learn the next step." The answer startled Mark, both by the tone of the
younger man's voice and the fact that he was not an office flower.
"OK, let's get you started in the bunkhouse and then we'll fill
out your papers. I'm not going to tell anyone who you are. Just your
name and that you came from Oklahoma. No favorites this trip, Amigo."
Pete laughed and said, "You call it and that's the way it'll be."
The next day the crew crawled out of their bunks about five
thirty in the morning. A quick
breakfast and the little bus took them to the pits; a large open
circular area that had been carved out of the mountain layer by layer,
each one wider than the one below them.
Pete was assigned to a crew headed by a short wiry man named
Carlos Estaban. Carlos had been in the pits for about seven years. His
skin was almost the color of the copper they were mining.
That first day was the longest in Peter' life. If he thought the
oil and gas fields were tough he thought wrong. Here was the hot
blazing sun burning into every fiber of his exposed body.
There were few breaks, in fact just one per hour for five minutes
for the men to get some water into their dehydrated bodies. Lunch was
at 11 in the morning and when Peter settled down by himself to eat the
food brought up on the little bus he could hardly keep his eyes open.
The sun was doing it's job and his eyes were feeling seared and his
skin tight and drawn.
Lunch lasted for half an hour and then back to
work until 4PM. Back on the bus Pete could feel his skin starting to
stick to the back of the leather seat. He sat forward so that he did
not touch his back to the seat. He was tired, dirty, sore and had a
king size headache.
When he got back to the bunk house some of the men were laughing
at him and he became angry. One of the men, Domingo, saw his face and
told him to look in the mirror in the bathroom. As he looked in the
mirror a shock wave went through him. His body was a bright red. His
hair was a dusty green and he could see the fatigue written all over
him.
He walked back into the main room with a sheepish grin on his
face. Domingo laughed and said, "soon you will be one of us, amigo. Now
go and take a shower and then put some grease on your body to keep from
burning up."
As he hurried to the shower he noticed that the men were also
getting ready for the showers. He stepped in and turned on the cold
water. A loud yell sounded throughout the building. Peter had
just felt what it is like to have what seemed a ton of water falling on
him. The cold water hitting his hot body was the most painful thing
that had ever happened to him since his father's death.
It was a cool night and the young man did not feel too much pain.
The men had put an herb or flower of some kind on his body and it was
soothing and restful. In a matter of minutes he was asleep, forgetting
about dinner.
The next morning when he got up he could feel the skin seeming to
peel off of his body. Domingo came over to him and put some more of the
medicine on him. "This is called 'aloe` he said. It is very good for
skin like yours. You are lucky that you have worked in the sun before.
We will keep the aloe with us and you can put it on whenever you feel
the burning. Put it on your eyelids. In a couple of days your skin will
be darker and will not burn.
You must be used to hard work You didn't break down yesterday
like the other "gringos." You
work hard and in a year or two you will move up. You are going to be
OK."
The first week went by in a blur of pain and fatigue. Friday
after work all of the men went home to their families. Peter used the
time to rest and get his strength back. Saturday morning Mark came into
the bunk house to find Peter writing a letter. "Well you made it
through the week. How do you feel?" The younger man smiled and said,
"Like a well done steak, which I could also use now. Does everybody go
through this or did you reserve this weather just for me? I've worked
hard before, but never in heat like this. How do the men stand this for
so long? Some of them have been here for years and they never complain.
Is the money that good?"
Mark noticed the real concern that Pete had for others. He was
changing his mind about this man from Oklahoma. He had lasted the week
and had not begged for anything that others did not have. He had talked
to the men and they also liked Pete, who they called "Pedrocito." His
last statement was one
that he had never expected to hear from one of the owners.
"So you would like a steak. Come with me tonight and we will have
one at a jail in Mexico. You may get many answers to all of your
question."
Mexicali was a bustling town just south of Tuscon. Poverty was an
instant sight to any outsider. The old jail had been in the side of a
hill and was now a restaurant. The place was dimly lit but the smells
were out of this world to Pete. He was hungry enough to eat a cow. As
he looked around he saw that most of the people there were from the
states. He said something to the other man, who smiled to himself. This
member of the ruling family had a good head on his shoulders and
noticed everything.
Pete got the biggest steak he had ever seen. Along with it were
refried beans and tall beers. When they were finished it was becoming
dark. Mark took him to a row of shacks that were near a dirty spring.
There were one or two outside bathrooms for
the whole area. Pete wondered why they were coming to this part of town.
"Hey, Pedrocito, come here." It was Domingo, calling to him from
one of the doorways that was covered by an old piece of cloth. Pete and
Mark went to the doorway and Domingo motioned inside.
The first thing that took your breath away was the heat. It felt
like back at the mine. Then came the smells, food and sweat all mingled
together.
"What are you doing down here with the big boss. He showing you
where all the girls hang out?" The man laughed. "Solinda come here and
meet one of the guys I work with. It is the gringo I told you about.
The one that looks like a lobster."
A small, very pretty woman came into the room from the back. She
carried a small child with her and there was another holding on to her
dress.
Mark stood in the background and let Pete feel the room and the
people who lived there. After several minutes he came forward and told
Pete that needed to head back before the crowd held them up
at the border. Sometimes it took several hours to get back if there
were a lot of people going back at the same time.
The ride back was a quiet one. There were many thoughts going
through the young mans mind. The letter he had been writing that
morning was to Mary Jane telling her of his first week, and of his
feelings for her, his future wife.
The next day he wrote another letter; this one to his mother and
sister. It was a different side of him that had finally come out. One
that his mother always knew was there, just like his father.
After the second week Pete was called to the office when the men
were finished. Mark was there and they had a cold beer and Mark told
him that he was going to be the lead man on a new crew that would be
starting the next week. "It is now your responsibility to lead." "What
will the men who have worked so long say about this?" the young man
asked. "They don't ask, they do." was the reply.
On Monday the new crew showed up and Mark
announced that Pete would be the lead man. No one said or did anything,
but looked at him with blank expressions.
Pete took over and the new men had thought he had been there
forever. By the end of the second week the crew was one of the
smoothest working groups in the mine. The other man saw this and nodded
approval at Pete.
After a month on the job, Pete was moved into the office. Mark
was moving Pete along as fast as he was able to grasp the complexities
of the mine operations. Now was the part of the business that Pete knew
he had to learn and learn well. He already had learned many things that
he would take back to the oil and gas fields. This was the part of the
business where the profits were made and lost. It was his job to see
that there was to be little loss and more profit.
After three months of hard work learning the mining business Pete
still had not gotten into the smelting process. Mark knew that this
would be the last part he would learn here. The next step would
be at the metal exchanges that the family used to sell the finished
product. Next week he would begin the final process of his mining
education. The two friends worked well with each other.
Pete had not heard from his mother and sister since he wrote
them almost five months ago. This was strange since he knew what he had
proposed would be something they would be interested in doing and it
would make more money for the mining concerns. In fact his idea might
work in many of their operations.
It was the end of October and the weather was delightful. Mark
was sure that he could send Pete home knowing the business of copper
mining. On friday, every thing was shut down unexpectedly at noon and
the men were called to the office area for a meeting. Pete joined the
other men in the yard as Mark stood on the high porch in front of the
office.
"I called you men together because one of you
has been writing letters to the owners. They have talked to me and
there are going to be some changes made around here. Before I go into
that I need to tell you that someone among you is not what he seems. He
has worked among us, learning the business. It was his choice that you
not know that his family owns the company that owns the mine. He wanted
to be one of you and learn as you have learned. Many of you have told
me that he was a good friend. He has been a better friend than all of
you can realize. `Pedrocito,' come up here."
Pete felt the heat rise on his face as he walked to the little
porch. He had not wanted his new friends to know why he was here. Now
he was afraid they would look at him differently and the bond might be
broken between all of them. His fears were meaningless. As he walked
through the men they clapped him on the back and joked with him about
coming back into the pits. When he got to the porch, next to Mark, the
older man said, "When our
friend first came here I took him to see your town and how you lived.
He has never said anything about it, but he has done something for all
of us."
The door opened from the office and out came his mother, sister and
Mary Jane.
The five of them stood on the porch. Mark told the miners of the
wonderful news that Pete's mother brought with her. "Señora Cain says
we are going to have a new town here. Each family will have a house of
their own with indoor plumbing. They will have bedrooms, kitchens,
dining rooms and living rooms. Mrs. Cain said we will also have a
hospital and stores. There will be new buses to take you to Mesa or
Tuscon or Phoenix for more shopping. This will help you to live better
and have your children grow up in a healthy way.
Señorita Cain is going to move here and start a school for the
children and the young people. She is going to prepare them to take
over the school and the stores. They will learn to work in the
hospitals. We will have a church to pray in and
I know that we will have many weddings and then many christenings."
Pete knew why he had not heard from them. He was overjoyed that
Mary Jane was with them. He realized how pretty she was, and how she
looked as if she belonged in the family picture. He made up his mind
that they would get married as soon as they got back to Oklahoma.
It was a tearful goodby two days later when the family left the
mine. All of the families of the miners had been bused in the night
before and tents had been set up for the families. It was a giant
fiesta that lasted for many hours.
Pete noticed that Mark was spending a lot of time with his
sister, probably to protect her from the young men who were not
married.
Mark pulled Pete aside as they were about to leave for Phoenix.
"When you first came I thought you would be like all the rest who came
before you. That first day I gave you three days, but when you said
you wanted to start like everyone else, I gave
you a week. See what a liar you have made out of me. Never again will
I make such a judgement." Pete laughed, "I gave myself little or no
chance to live after that first day in the mines. I thought you were
going to make it as tough on me as you could so that I would quit. If
it had not been for Domingo and the others I probably would have quit
on that first Friday.
After I am gone, amigo, raise each miners pay by five dollars a
week. Raise each of the leads by ten and the foreman by fifteen
dollars. Raise yourself by twenty-five dollars per week. I think when
the town is built we will make much more copper and the men deserve
their share." Mark turned to the young man, and grasping him in a bear
hug said, "Via con Dios, me amigo. Via con Dios."
 CHAPTER 37
The year was 1962, Bartlesville, Oklahoma. Karl Cain had learned
to walk last year and the house showed the effects. The youngster had
gotten into everything that wasn't tied down.
Pete and Mary Jane seemed more in love with each day. He went to
work in a happy frame of mind and returned home the same way no matter
what the problems of day brought to him.
As for Mary Jane she spent most of the day looking after the
small child, cleaning up after him and visiting with her mother-in-law,
Polly.
It was like spending time with someone who seem to know her very
thought, even before she said what was on her mind.
One of the things she spoke to Polly about was going back to
school. Mary Jane had finished one year of college and had promised her
family that she would go on and get her degree. Since she had made the
trip to Arizona, she knew what she wanted.
She was going into the new field of Social
Work. Many people, she saw and heard, needed help with their lives.
Poverty and poor conditions were found everywhere. She had heard about
how bad it was in other states and countries. Someday, she thought, I
will be able to make a difference, just as Polly and her daughter,
Robin who was now in Arizona helping to start the new school in the
newly named town of Saguaro. She was supervising the construction of
the school and the other buildings and had the help of her constant
companion, Mark.
"The poor guy just makes sure I have everything. I think I'm
falling for him. I hope he isn't just being nice," she had written Mary
Jane. The other girl assured her that she had talked to Pete and he
said that it was obvious before they had all left that Mark,"had met
his match."
Now as her child was older, Polly talked to her mother-in-law
about going back to school. Her problem was that there was no school
nearby and that she didn't want to be away from Peter.

Polly listened to all that the pretty young woman had to say and
told her not to worry. "God will take care of everything." she said. In
her mind was the thought of what she needed to do to find the answer.
It had only been the men who had gone to the mountain, Denali, to look
for the truth and the answers. Why not a woman. She was the head of the
family. There were only two others that could help her. One was very
old and the other was not much younger than her father-in-law would
have been if he were alive.
She decided to contact Ike and Red Cloud, the only two she knew
who could help her. Ike was now retired but his three sons were all
ready to help her in any way they could.
They booked her trip to San Francisco, got her a room at the
"Mark" when she refused to stay with any of them. Even old Ike called
her and tried to get her to stay with him. She need to be alone.
Then she called Red Cloud who she had met many times. He insisted
on coming down to see her and

talk about this idea. He was there in two days.

The two talked for hours about Randy, the old days, the people
that were in both their lives, and of the people in both of their
lives. The conversations went on for three days and neither Peter or
Mary Jane knew what was going on. All they knew that someone who had
known many of the family had come for a visit.
Red Cloud left on Thursday. It was the beginning of August and
the heat was deadly. You could see it rise from the ground in layers.
On Saturday, Polly asked Peter and Mary Jane to come over. She
had a surprise for them. Dinner was at seven and after dinner when Karl
went down for a short nap before they woke him to go home, she talked
to the two young people. "I have to go away on a long trip." she said.
There are some things that I must find out for myself. The only place I
know to get the answers is on Denali."
Mary Jane was not familiar with the name and Pete explained that
this was the name of the sacred
mountain that the Cain family had always gone to for answers .
When they got home the two stayed up most of the night while Pete
explained the history of the family and the role that the mountain had
played in their lives. He explained that the mountain had never given
up an answer that the men in the family did not follow. Of course he
did not know that the answers had never come from the mountain. It held
no answers and yet it held all of the knowledge that the family had
ever needed.
On Sunday Pete's mother, Mary Jane's family, Pete, Mary Jane and
young Karl, stayed after in the little Methodist Church. The minister,
Reverend Gilespie, met with them. Polly had asked that he give them
communion.
The other family did not know what was the reason but there was
no hesitation. They loved the church and always felt that it could only
help in time of need, and this seemed to be one of those times.
After they left the little church they all
went to Mary Janes's family for the traditional Sunday dinner. It was
here that Polly made her announcement. She would be leaving on the
train that night and would be in San Francisco by Tuesday evening. She
would be leaving there by plane for Seattle the next day and would
board one of the Caine ship's for Anchorage, Alaska.
Silence greeted the words of the slim proud woman who had braved
the loss of a husband, the husbands grandfather, father and mother; and
still raised two fine children.
Polly was still an attractive woman who did not look her age.
Everyone in the room was aware of this and they all worried that
someone would take advantage of her when they found out her vast
wealth. Polly laughed at them and said, "If I find a man who can match
up to Randy then I'll have no problem letting him take advantage of me.
Let's hope I find such a person on the mountain.
That night Pete and Mary Jane held young Karl up to his
grandmother for one last kiss for no one
knows how long. With a kiss for the boy and a hug for the other two she
climbed aboard the westbound Central Pacific.
Late in the afternoon on Tuesday the train pulled into the
station. Waiting with a big sign that spelled out," Polly Caine," were
four men and two women. There was no mistaking that the old man was the
one who had been always called, "Uncle Ike."
Three men of varying ages stood to the rear of the old man and
next to two of them were two women; one plump with a sunny smile, and
the other short and very tiny. She looked as if a good wind would blow
her out of the train station. She walked quickly toward the group with
a broad smile that seemed to say, "Well here I am."
After getting settled in her suite, Polly went to dinner with the
family. Old Ike told her of the times with grandfather Joe and great-
grandfather James. He told of how they had been the "Great War," and
how they and Red Cloud had become what

they were because of the kindly old man named Joseph and his family. He
told him of how Joe had given them a chance when they got out of the
Army. How he provided for their families while they were starting out
working for the Caine family.
Old Ike was surprised when he heard that the name was shortened
to "Cain." The boys laughed with the old man and told him like the
times changed, so do people and their names. That was why Leon, the
youngest was called Lee. James and Joe, the other two boys knew of the
heritage of the names and would wear them as a badge of honor.
Polly cried and laughed with them for about three hours when Ike
said, "What are we doing here? This woman has been travelling for over
thirty hours and then spends hours with us. She must be exhausted.
Joseph, take her to her room. Polly, my dear, we will see you in the
morning. Your plane leaves at 2:30 and will get you into Seattle by
dark. Your room is all arranged and someone from the shipping lines
will meet you at the airport and take you to the hotel and the next day
to the ship. I have arranged to have you met in Alaska by the head of
the firm in Anchorage. He will take over from there and will be
available for all your needs.
It was hard to believe that things had turned out for Ike the way
that they had. After ten years heading the East coast operations the
giant shipping company had severe financial problems. Joe and His
father had talked it over and bought the company back, on the condition
that Ike would go West and manage the operation. Ike had agreed. The
pretty little girl, Joanna had died of pneumonia two winters before
they headed west. Grief had stayed with them even though they now had
two sons. They thought that with the move they would heal. The moved
proved wise and the family assumed a place in the community. Another
son was born, Leon. The company was once again on a sound footing. By
the time World War Two came the company was large enough to handle
government contracts, which made the company's coffers swell.
Polly awoke at 9:45 the next morning. She scolded herself for
sleeping so late. She had wanted to see the city.
As she walked out of the elevator, young Lee was there to meet
her. "Father said that you might want to see the city. If you pack your
things I'll have them taken to the airport. My mother wants to meet
you. She could not come last night. She had a fail and broke her hip.
She gets around on crutches now. Thank goodness she'll be rid of them
in another couple of weeks. She drives us all nuts." He laughed as he
said the last part, and Polly knew that this must be a happy family.
"Mother has breakfast waiting so hurry up. I'll send a bellboy
up to get your things in five minutes."
Lee took her through the hills of San Francisco, making sure that
she saw the Golden Gate Bridge, the port area and Telegraph Hill. The
brick road fascinated her. She saw the great prison in the bay,
Alcatraz, and then they were down on the

flat area coming to a large house that was set in a wooded area. She
thought that this was a perfect setting and that someone knew how to
take care of the property. They turned into the driveway and Polly's
eyes grew wide as she saw the perfectly trimmed hedges and the
beautiful lush ferns and flowers.
It did not take long for Polly to feel at home. Rebecca was
already at the table and Lee brought Polly into the older woman who had
such bright eyes. They were the brightest blue she had ever seen. Along
with the silver hair she looked like a picture of regalness.
She started to get up and the younger woman rushed to her side.
"It is so good of you to have me to your beautiful home. Every one
here has been so good to me. I can see why my father-in-law loved you
all so much." Polly put her hand on the older woman's shoulder making
her stay in her seat.
It was a great breakfast with great conversation. Polly was
hearing many things of the family's past that she had never known. Full
of food and contentment, Polly said her goodbyes and Leon and Ike took
her to the airport.
The last goodby with Ike was hard for in the short time she was
with them she again had become aware of the heritage of the family. She
now knew that she was, in fact, carrying on the tradition that gave the
family it's wisdom and she understood that friends of old were all part
of the family; it's connections and extensions.
Boarding the silver Constellation she flew on to her next
appointment with the future. Little was she to know that her family and
their fortunes were to be changed forever, except for the mountain and
it's calling.
Anchorage was growing. The airport had become an important link
with the rest of the world. Planes taking the great circle route to
the east and west stopped here to take on fuel for the rest of the trip.
It was a bright morning when the big plane landed at the field.
It looked to Polly as if the
plane was going to land right in the main part of the city. Merrill
Field was at the edge of the city near Medfra Street and 6th Avenue.
The plane rolled to a stop and as Polly got out she was amazed at
the sight of a city almost surrounded by majestic snow covered
mountains. The blue sky contrasted brilliantly with the mountains just
to the south of the airport.
As she made her way into the terminal she wondered at the
weather. The sun was high, but she knew that most of this part of the
year was light. The temperature was delightful, not like what she was
used to in Oklahoma at this time of the year when the thermometer
reached into the mid nineties and even into triple digit numbers. The
air was also clear and had none of the dust of the land that she had so
recently left.
Going to the luggage area she saw a sign held by a striking
looking man. He was about six feet, well built with a shock of black
hair that was shiny and almost alive. His skin was almost the color of
the copper of the family mines. She could see many of the features of
the plains indians about this man. Peter also had some of the same
facial structure. Then it hit her. He looked remarkably like her dead
husband, Randy.
The sign held aloft over the man's head read, "welcome to Alaska
Mrs. Caine." The old way of spelling the name sent strange feelings
through her. She walked over to the man and said, "I'm Polly Cain." It
was simple and direct and yet when she said it she felt that feeling
like the first time she had ever said it to people back home when she
was Randy's bride.
"Mrs. Cain I'm Thomas Tanana. I am in charge of the Kani Kompany
stores in Alaska. We are all so glad that you are visiting us." The man
spoke like he had memorized what to say.
Polly looked closely at the man and saw that he was not as young
as he looked from a distance. Slight streaks of grey were forming at
his temples.
Sun wrinkles showed on his neck and forehead. She
saw that his eyes were kind and soft brown. He stood tall and straight.
He gathered up her luggage and strode briskly toward the outside
door. Suddenly he stopped and turning he flashed a sheepish grin. "I'm
sorry to have walked so fast. I forgot you were a woman. When I come to
pick people up here they are always men who are going to be outfitted
for trips to the interior." He paused to let her catch up and then
walked slowly so that she could keep pace.
Polly laughed to herself. He didn't know that he was going to
outfit her for the same thing.
She had heard the name Tanana before. Something was in the back
of her mind about that name. She would have to search her mind, but for
now she was going to let this man make decisions for her to get her
ready for her trek to Denali.
He had taken her to a little hotel on the corner of "K" street
and west "5th." The hotel was clean and the couple who ran it had been
told of her arrival. They had a room for her that looked out over Knik
Arm, the port of Alaska harbor. There
were flowers in the room and fresh cold water in a beautiful pitcher.
The old four poster bed had a down comforter and a large mattress. The
floor had a large bear skin, covering the area around the bed. He had
suggested that she take a rest and that he would pick her up later in
the afternoon and show her downtown and the dinner. A warm feeling came
over her and she told him she would be ready in about four hours.
It was four in the afternoon when she woke up.
Quickly she dressed and went to the little bathroom next to her room.
She returned to her room and finished her dressing and headed
downstairs to the lobby, where she found him sitting and reading a
magazine.
"I'm sorry for oversleeping. You must have been waiting a long
time. Please forgive me."
Thomas looked at her and suddenly felt feelings in him that he
had never felt. She was pretty enough but it was something else that
grabbed at him. Her strength of character was evident as she walked
toward him; a firm step with her head tilted slightly back. Her eyes
were steady as she looked into his face. He knew that this woman did
not waste words. She meant what she said.
As they walked through the six block area that made up most of
downtown, Polly was amazed at the stark simplicity of it all. The sky
was still bright blue and the sun hung almost straight up. She
wondered at crowded docks and the railroad that ran next to the docks.
There were people of all colors and races. Here is where a"white"
person was seldom seen.
"You don't have many people from my part of the country do you?"
she asked. He looked at her and smiled. "We only became a state three
and a half years ago. Most of the people from the `lower forty-eight'
are servicemen who either stayed here after WW II or came up when the
government gave plots of land to people who would homestead the land
and settle the country. They didn't want us eskimos to own the
country." He said this last with a smile and a laugh in his voice.
They went to dinner at a small restaurant that
served a variety of dishes, many of whom Polly had never heard or
smelled. The food was outstanding and the quantity was more than anyone
could eat, she thought. Thomas had no problem though and ate all he
ordered and when she did not finish hers he ate that also.
After dinner they walked back to the hotel and the man said that
if she was not too tired he would show her where the first "Kani
Kompany" store was
founded. She was both delighted and surprised that he would make time
for her. After walking back to the hotel they got into his Jeep and
drove down to an area on the other side of the port where everything
and everyone seemed to head out to the north.
The store was on a road called the Loop Road, near the corner of
Ocean Dock Road. The building was old, and the wood withered. The sign
above the doors had been painted over more than once. You could see
the many faded spots and the slightly different fresher colors on the
wood.
There it was, the mountain. Around the center of the mountain was
a cloud-like formation that seemed to cover much of the sides toward
the top. On a ledge stood a girl with reddish hair and a long indian
style dress. Next to her perched an eagle. The sign was old but to
Polly it was a fresh sign, full of hope and answers.
That night as she lay there, half way between sleep and dreams,
the thought came to her that she was being tested for something. But
what? Why was she really here? What would she find on the mountain?
Thoughts ran through her head in a whirl and soon she was asleep.
Morning came and with it another bright day. Polly didn't wake
until almost 9 AM. As she moved about the room she glanced out of the
window which faced the end of the inlet. Suddenly she stopped and moved
to the window. There far in the distance was a mountain. She was sure
that was Denali. It had to be. It stood above several other mountains
as if they were surrounding a huge structure to protect it from
intruders.
In her mind she could see the giant, but here in real life it was
almost a blur on the horizon. She made up her mind to find out if that
was "her" mountain.
When she came down stairs she asked the woman who was cleaning,
the directions to the store where she was to get all of her things.
"Mrs. Cain you just sit down and wait. Mr. Tanana said that when
you got up we were to telephone him and he would come and get you." The
woman went behind the counter and picking up a telephone, she called
and left the message that Mrs. Cain was up.
Thomas had been up most of the night. He could not get this woman
out of his mind. He had many girl friends in his fifty years. There had
never been one that he wanted to spend the rest of his life with; that
is until now.
Thomas Tanana had worked for only one company since he was old
enough to remember. His father had worked for the Kani Kompany all of
his life. He had told his son that his people had worked for the
company since two of their ancestors came to the little town of Knik
over two hundred years ago.
The company now had stores in every city that had a population
over 2,000 people. Nome, Fairbanks and Juneau were the largest stores
in the chain. Tok was the second oldest; but the store in Anchorage was
the one that did the most business. Thomas had his headquarters
at that store. He travelled to the other stores during the summer
months. Sometimes he had to get to the stores in the south during the
winters. He had learned to fly and had bought an airplane to use when
he went to the various stores. For now, however, he was content to take
the little Jeep and pick up the fascinating woman who had come into his
life.
Polly, too, had thoughts about the handsome man who reminded her
so much of her dead husband. He had a soft voice and he looked
directly into her eyes when he talked. There was nothing to hide. His
face spoke of honesty, sincerity and gentleness. He was so much like
Randy that it scared her.
Thomas had not really known what she was doing here or why, but
he knew that if she wanted him to know she would tell him in her own
good time. For now he would be content to just be with her.
As they drove to the store Polly asked him to stop by the
railroad tracks so that she could ask him about something she had seen.
He was puzzled but did as she asked. When they pulled to a stop, Polly
pulled him over to the tracks where there was nothing to obstruct the
view. She pointed to the mountain, showing faintly in the distance.
"Is that the one they call `Denali'?" He looked at her in surprise.
Yes that is the one that has two major names, Denali and Mt. McKinley.
The word Denali means "high one" in our language. The Russians called
it "Bolshaia Gora" which meant "Big Mountain." She smiled. At last
she was to come face to face with secrets of the family, going back as
far as they could be traced. Perhaps she would find things that would
carry them even farther back. She would once more walk and stand where
her dead husband had walked and stood.
When they arrived at the store Polly walked through getting the
feel for the place. She could see that it was old, very old.
They walked together and he could feel her closeness. It stirred
him almost to the point of telling her what he was feeling. Only his
great self control stopped him. She too felt the closeness but her mind
had only one thought; she must get to the mountain.
They turned and went into his office. She was surprised to see
how comfortable the room was, with rich paneling and dark rugs. Large
sofas covered in hides and furs gave the room a rich feeling. He walked
over to his desk and sat behind it so that he could hide his shaking
knees. Polly sat in a large chair that seemed to make her look so much
smaller. She told him why she was here, and Thomas who knew the story
of the family's tie to the mountain, said little.
He attended to all of her needs and made all of the arrangements to
get her to the little used new
airstrip called Montana Creek. From there she would be driven to
Petersville. The last part of that drive from the highway to the town
would be over 40 miles of a rough hand carved road. The same route
that her husband and his father and grandfather had taken with White
Cloud twenty-three years ago.
They went to dinner after nine that night and the sun was just
starting to grow dimmer. He took her out to a place called the Brown
Bear Restaurant and Saloon. It was not far from Potters Marsh where
millions of birds came to nest each year. They stopped at the large
area and Thomas pulled out a pair of binoculars so that she could see
the few birds that were still nesting.
As they walked into the Brown Bear, he took hold of her hand.
Shock waves went through her. She shivered and when he felt her
movement he let go of her hand. Instantly she reached out and putting
her small hand in his large one she looked up at this gentle man who
had brought out feelings long hidden, even from her.
She had always like steak and when he asked her how she liked her
meat she looked at him and laughed. "Tell the cook to kill the cow,
drop it on the grill, count to ten, turn it over and count to ten
again. Then he better take it off the grill. If it's dead it'll be
ready." She had never heard him laugh before; but his laugh came from
deep inside and seem to explode out of his mouth. Everyone looked at
Thomas as he turned red from laughing so hard. "Little lady, I've
never heard anyone describe cooking steak like that. I'll tell the
waiter just what you said. In fact, I'll always tell that story to
anyone I go to dinner with, from now on, so help me." He laughed again
but it was lower now and his eyes were sparkling.
By the time they left the saloon he knew more about her than she
had ever told anybody. She spoke of her feelings after her husband
died. She
told how she had wrapped herself in her children. How her daughter and
son had made something of themselves. How she had run the empire of
the business for years, counting on old friends and new. People always
seem to come along at the right time to help her when a problem proved
to great for her to solve. Now there was a problem that she didn't
know how to solve and there was no one to get her out of where she had
found herself. She knew that this was a man that she was comfortable
with now, but what about in the future? In her mind she knew that he
would always be there. She was happy now though she knew the next day
she was scheduled to start the trip to the mountain.
As they left the restaurant, the sky had darkened and for the
first time she saw what an arctic sky filled with stars looked like.
She felt that she could grab any one of them. Thomas looked at her as
she gazed at the sky. Seeing her profile, he reached down and taking
her shoulders he turned her toward him, leaning his head to hers kissed
her softly and with great tenderness.
After a few moments they continued down the hill to the parked
jeep. She held on to this big man with all of the strength she could
muster. Her knees were weak and he was all there was to hold her up.
She had not remembered the last time that she felt like this; but she
knew that was more than some twenty odd years ago.
The next morning she woke with the feeling that she somehow had
lost control of her life. It seemed as though she could not make any
decisions. Everything had a question without an answer. She knew that
now more than ever she must get to Denali. Now she knew that the blood
of all of Randy's forefathers coursed through her and that she was to
be the person who would lead them all into the future. But what of her
future? She felt sure that she would find her answers on Denali.
A little after nine there was a knock on her door. When she
opened it she found a beautifully carved Puffin, one of the prettiest
birds found anywhere. She had read that they were found in many parts
of the state. There was a note on the bird that read simply, "We shall
take the journey with you." She did not know the meaning of the note
and when she went down to the lobby to check out she asked the woman at
the desk where the bird came from. "I have no idea. It was on the
counter with a note to deliver it to you." the woman said.
After checking out of the hotel, she set about getting her gear
together. Getting everything together she sent it on ahead to the
airport. She decided to make one more trip to the old store that was
the family's foundation. She told herself that she wanted one last
look at the old building and to feel the history; but she knew that
what she really wanted to see him again.
Getting into the taxi she told the driver to take her to the Kani
Kompany. Without hesitation he moved into the morning traffic and
headed for the store.
As Polly went through the door of the old store her eyes fell on
an old carved wooden statue of a small native indian boy. She had
never seen it before and yet she had the feeling that she knew who it
was supposed to be. Could this be one of the "Caine's" from earlier
times. She made a note that she would have to find out the early names
of the family after she came down from th
e mountain. She quickly picked up the carving and took it to the sales
clerk who wrapped it for her. She started to pay and the girl looked
at her. "You cannot buy anything in this store Mrs. Cain. We have
been told that anything you want is yours." Polly smiled a shy smile
and said," Thank You." She asked for Mr. Tanana and the girl told her
that he had not come in today and may not be back for sometime.
Sadness came over her and she left feeling that at least he could have
been there to say goodbye.
When she got to the airport her bags were quickly unloaded and
she had the baggage man take them to the little chartered plane.
Looking once more through the terminal she saw no familiar face.
Certainly not his. Was last night a dream? Finding her way to the
hanger where her plane was waiting she climbed into the little plane.
Are you ready, a muffled voice said. Almost in a whisper she said,
"Yes let's get out of here." The pilot turned and smiled. It was him.
He was there for her!
"I couldn't let you go. I know how important this is to you for I
have heard of the trip of your husband's family over the generations. I
also know that a woman has never made this trip. More important to me
is the fact that I want to be with you. I could not sleep last night
thinking of you; thinking of us." Polly felt the blood rushing to her
head. She felt warm all over. "Thank goodness you're here. I was
afraid that it was a dream last night. I went to the store and they
told me that you were gone and would not be back for some time. I
wanted you to hold me once more and I needed to see you again. I told
my family that I was perfectly safe and that if I ever found a man that
matched up to my children's father then I would let him take advantage
of me. Will you take advantage of me? she asked him. "Yes," he smiled
and then they both laughed. The little plane surged forward and they
were on their way to the future and the mountain.
 CHAPTER 38
The little plane landed at Montana creek and the two passengers
got out and headed to the little hanger to the left of the runway.
Waiting at the hanger was Frank Simmons one of the men who had helped
rebuild Talkeetna, a town about fifteen miles from the air strip.
Frank was an old friend of Thomas and was more than glad to meet him
and the lady that he had with him. Frank had never known Thomas to
even mention a woman. In fact Frank always said to Thomas that he had
better settle down soon or it would be too late and he would die a
withered old man.
When Frank saw Polly he let out a low sound of approval. Thomas
had struck pay dirt in Frank's mind. He wondered what this woman
wanted that was up this way. No woman, other than the natives and a
few wives of the settlers had ever come to this area. In fact the only
strangers that came were either to fish and camp or to climb the" great
mountain." When he found out her reason for being here he smiled as if
to say, "Try it little lady; you'll never make it. No woman has."
Thomas told the other man that he needed a Jeep for the next
several days. He would either pay for the use or Frank could take it
out in trade goods. Frank told him he would trade for the vehicle.
Through all of this Polly stood and listened. This was something she
had never seen or heard in her life. Men actually traded for goods and
services with no bartering.
That night they stayed at the Talkeetna Road House, a place that
had been built back in 1944. The food was delicious and had a family
atmosphere about it that gave it a comfortable feeling. Polly was tired
and after dinner she told Thomas that she was going to bed. He told
her that he would make all of the arrangements and that they would
leave in the morning for Petersville.
The following morning Thomas and Polly got in the little Jeep,
followed the road back to the Montana Creek junction with the main
highway. From there they headed north for about fifteen miles until
they came to the settlement called Trappers Creek. This was an area
that had been homesteaded in 1948 and was still giving government plots
of land. The road to the settlement was rough and bumpy, filled with
the ruts of winter.
It was here that they turned westward on the Petersville Road.
If the first road was bad this was even worse. The little vehicle
bumped and slid over the so-called road. The going was slow and
difficult. It was obvious that it got it's best use when there was
snow and the road was packed for sleds, trucks or jeeps. It took the
better part of three hours to get to the little stop called "The Forks
Roadhouse." Polly was not really hungry but forced herself to have a
bowl of soup and some crackers. Thomas ate well. Nothing seemed to
affect his appetite.
It was well into the afternoon when they came to the end of the
road. From there they drove slowly across the rough tundra and rock to
the area between the first of three glaciers that stood out from the
mountain. The day had started out cloudy

but by now the sun was bright and the mountain shown like a jewel.
Around the center of the mountain, about half way to the peak was a
cloud-like ring. It was as she had been told by Randy and his family.
They made camp, cooked a hot meal and then started to look for
the landmarks that were so familiar to her even though she had never
been here before. She had heard the story of the mountain from Randy
almost from the time that she had known him. When the four men took
the trip to the mountain it had left a feeling in her that seemed to be
with her at this time.
She suddenly remembered White Cloud had stayed behind at the
village next to a big river. She remembered that the village and the
river had the same name. She knew that she should remember the name.
All of a sudden it hit her! "Thomas, did your people come from a town
that has the same name as you?" she asked. He looked at her in a
strange way and said, "Yes it is the name that my family

has had for over two hundred and fifty years. Why do you ask and how
did you know? Have you seen it on a map?" "
186186‚186186ƒ186186„186186…
186186†186186‡186186ˆ186186‰186186Š186186‹186186Œ186186186186Ž186186
186186186186‘186186’186186“186186”186186•186186–186186—
186186˜186186™186186š186186›186186œ186186
186186ž186186Ÿ186186186186¡186186¢18618
6£18
6186
¤18
6186
¥18
6186
¦186186§186186¨186186©186186ª186186«18
6186¬186186186186®186186¯186186°186186±186186²186186³186186
´18
6186
µ186186¶186186·186186¸186186¹186186º186186»18
6186
¼186186½186186¾186186¿186186À186186Á186186Â186186Ã186186Ä186186Å186186Æ
186186Ç186186È186186É186186Ê186186Ë186186Ì186186Í186186Î186186Ï186186Ð1
86186Ñ186186Ò186186Ó186186Ô186186Õ186186Ö186186×186186Ø186186Ù186186Ú186
186Û186186Ü186186Ý186186Þ186186ß186186à186186á186186â186186ã186186ä1861
86å186186æ186186ç186186è186186é186186186186ë186186ì186186í186186î186186
ï186186ð186186ñ186186ò186186ó186186ô186186õ186186ö186186÷186186ø186186þ
ÿÿÿþÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿNo" she replied, "It was the name of my
husband's people from the earliest of times. They changed sometime in
the 1700's, and a couple of times since then. I had forgotten that
until now. I wonder what our relationship must really be. Can we be
related?" There was a note of sadness in her voice. Thomas saw her
face and heard her voice. "We aren't related. Perhaps I could be
related to your husband's family, but the relationship would be over
two hundred years ago." What we need to do is go to the Tanana village
and find out what we can about the past." said Thomas.
Before it was dark, the shadow of the mountain gave their camp
an appearance of being in dusk and then as the soon started to sink it
was night for the two people who had no idea of their future together.
Morning was early, and by nine o'clock they had finished eating
and had gotten all of her gear together. He would stay behind for this
was her quest and he could not be part of it.
Placing her pack on her back and gathering up her rope and little
climbing axe she looked once more at the faded drawing of the route and
back to the mountain. Slowly she started toward the giant, picking up
her pace with each step. As she started up the slope she looked back
at the man who had given her new life. Would he still be there if she
got back? Would he still want her? Would she find her answers on the
ledge or in the cave? And what of the lady or the eagle? She had not
seen either. By early afternoon she had found the narrow passage
that led to the way to the ledge. It was here she stopped to rest and
to eat something. The air was much cooler here and she took a light
jacket out of her pack and put it on to keep the chill away. She was
about to go into the cloudy area and she knew that it would be colder.
As she climbed she was aware of the fact that she had to stop
more often and take more breaths in order to move forward. It was
getting darker and she moved as quickly as she could. She was not a
young person and her body was reacting to the pace and the cold. She
looked at her watch and saw that it was only three in the afternoon.
She moved forward and suddenly she froze in her tracks.
A loud and piecing cry made her tremble. She moved forward and
again she heard it, almost as if it were directly above her. Looking
up she saw the shadow of a large bird on the side of the mountain in
front of her.
Moving up the little trail she finally came to an outcropping.
Struggling, she scrambled to try and get up the rocks. After several
attempts she took off her pack, tied her rope to the end of the pack.
Putting the other end around her waist, tied it securely and then
started to climb to the top of the rock. This time she succeeded and
found that she was on a long ledge that narrowed at the far end.
Pulling her pack up she moved to the center of the ledge and sat down.
She was tired, cold, scratched, bruised and disoriented. She
did not know where she was or where she had started. What was she
doing here?
She propped herself against the mountain, closed her eyes and tried to
compose herself.
Back at the little camp had set up, the man looked at the
darkening sky and quickly covered all of their open belongings in the
little jeep. He moved everything else into the tent, knowing that this
would help to keep it from blowing away or getting pulled up from the
ground.
The clouds had already hid the mountain and the wind was starting
to blow harder. The man knew that this was going to be the first storm
of the coming winter. The temperature was probably down into the
thirties, he thought. Would she find the cave before she got caught in
the cold and wind?
Polly slowly opened her eyes and looked around. She had only
rested for a short time and felt that she was in control again. She
felt the wind blowing, now harder than before and saw that it was
getting darker by the minute. It reminded her of the weather just
before a tornado back home in Oklahoma. Quickly she set about finding
a place to put her small shelter. She walked to the narrow end and
looked out but could see little. Turning, she walked back toward the
other end. She suddenly let out a little cry of pleasure. She had
found the cave. It was not a big opening but she quickly brought her
things inside. Putting everything down on the inside she went back out
and gathered up some loose branches. Polly saw no trees but this was
wood for a fire. She would not have to use her precious fuel and her
stove for this night. Feeling that the cold may get worse she went back
out and brought in more wood, as much as she could carry. She
remembered the story of Randy's grandfather and his stay in the cave.
Lighting her lantern she looked around the cave, studying the
walls and the roof of the little room. She found the writings that she
had heard about. There were some that looked new and she made up her
mind that she would look more closely at them tomorrow; for now she
would build a fire, cook her supper and get a good night's sleep. She
wondered, as she went about her tasks, about the large bird. The
shadow was larger than any she had ever seen. Was it the eagle of the
legends? For now she would eat and sleep.
She tried several times to light the branches but they seemed to
be just a little too damp. Polly walked around the cave looking for
scraps of paper or other dried leaves. Suddenly she came upon a small
pile of dried moss. She looked in amazement and wondered how it got in
here. Carefully she put some of the precious moss under the leaves and
branches and put a match to the dried material. A burst of flame
rewarded her effort and slowly the other material started to glow and
then to spring into burning wood. The little room started to heat up
from the fire. Polly got her food from her pack and started to fix her
dinner. As hungry as she was she held back on some of the food. She
realized that she was in a storm and that she did not know what to
expect. Taking some water from her canteen she made soup and tea along
with dried beef. She also made some powdered potatoes and ate a small
can of fruit.
Going to the mouth of the cave she saw that it had started to
rain. She ran to get her coat on and then went out to gather more wood
and leaves.
In the gathering dusk she saw it! Near the far end of the ledge
sat a great bird. It was black with some white feathers on it's tail
and a large white topped head. She stopped what she was doing and
started to walk toward the bird. As she neared the bird dropped
something and then gave a shrill cry and lifted into the sky, quickly
lost from view. Polly ran to the spot and picked up the object. It was
a funny kind of blade. It had a curved handle that seemed to be made
of a bone like substance. Carved on the handle was the crude picture of
a bear between two tree trunks. A man was standing there with a spear-
like object thrust at the bear. The blade was curved, flaring out from
the ends. She put the small knife into her jacket pocket and quickly
gathered up another load of wood, taking it back to the cave. She took
her little cooking pot to the mouth of the cave, wiped out with a cloth
and set it out to catch water. She thought that this would make sure
she would have enough until she returned from the mountain.
Polly sat down on her sleeping bag and tried to understand the
meaning of what had happened this day. She knew that there was purpose
to all that was happening and yet she could not know what it was. She
lay back on the bag, stuffing her pack behind her as a pillow, and
thought of her life. From the time she first fell in love with Randy
until now she had been able to keep everything in perspective. She had
coped with his death, carried on with the business of the family,
raised her children to be self-sufficient and to help others. She knew
that she must keep the role of her husband's family in the business
world; one that could nor would dim. There were too many people
depending on her for their very lives. Where was her life going? She
now realized that she was still not an old woman, " past her prime,"
as the expression went, but that she had much left to live for. Maybe
for a new beginning, though she would still have hold of the old. How
would her children handle this new man in her life, if he was to really
be in her life. Everything had become so complex. What was the answer?
It was eight in the morning when she next looked at her watch.
She had slept for about ten hours. She felt better than she had for a
long time. She had a purpose in life and she knew what it was. The
night had been filled with dreams. Her own childhood, Bits and pieces
of history of her dead husband's family. The realization that she was
part of a great legend that stretched back through the centuries, bound
by a family that knew only that they blessed by good fortune and had
passed it on to others. Their deeds and words had stretched throughout
the world. Theirs was a heritage that had no blemishes. It was up to
her to see that all of this was carried on. She had become, at a young
age, the matriarch of the family. She was here to put the final pieces
of her life into perspective. Where she went from here and what she
did would be a reflection of her role in generations of his people.
When she woke up she went to get the little pot outside the cave.
The snow was falling in large soft flakes. The sky around her was
leaden and she could see only a few yards. The wind gave her a chill
as she picked up the little pot. It was full of water, frozen water,
ice. She took some of the dry moss and rekindled the small fire, and
feeding it small branches she put the pot on top to melt the ice. She
thought that her first move would be to refill the canteen. She had
melted snow before, on the plains of home and knew that it would take a
lot to make a pot full.
When the ice was melted she refilled the canteen and then made
herself a cup of hot coffee. Taking her little pan she made some thin
batter and made herself a stack of pancakes. Using some of the powdered
eggs she had fashioned a good breakfast. She saved the little bacon
and ham she had for the time she might need it for it's fat content.
Now was the time to explore the drawings on the walls. She had
read much about the indians of her own land and had studied some of the
drawings that told stories. Looking at these she realized that she had
before her a great story of life. From the beginning of the story on
the wall, it seemed to her she was looking at the progress of a people.
After what seemed an eternity she approached the far wall. It was here
that she found the picture; four men, one who seemed to be slightly
set apart from the others. He seemed different as if the others were of
one family and he was a stranger. OF COURSE, she realized this was the
drawing of grandfather James, Randy's father Joe, Randy and White
Cloud. They must have drawn it on the wall for the next one to enter
the cave. But how did they know who would be next or if there would be
a next one.
Polly turned her light along the wall and stopped abruptly.
There was another drawing next to the one of the four men. This one
showed two men standing next to the giant bird. One of the men looked
like White Cloud did in the previous picture; but who was the other
man? Next to the men was a crude drawing of a large bird and a river.
There appeared to be huts in the background. The drawing was crude,
like all of the others. They seemed to have been here for ages and yet
she knew that it had not been that long since Randy had been here with
the others.
The light flickered and then shone bright again against the wall.
There on the wall was the last picture; a woman and the bird. Fear
gripped Polly. Who did that and when was it done? Had someone come
into the cave while she slept? What was the meaning of it, and why the
bird?
Suddenly the light went out and she heard the cry of the eagle. She
moved quickly to the opening of the cave and for an instant she thought
she saw the figure of a woman in a red dress. It was only a momentary
glimpse and then she saw the eagle in the middle of the ledge. She
realized that the snow had stopped and that the sky was clearing and
the light was bright. Putting on her boots she moved slowly out to the
bird. It ruffled it's feathers as if shivering. Polly moved next to
the bird and cautiously touched the head of the great bird. The eagle
turned to look at her and his great yellow beak opened as if to grin.
Gently she rubbed the head and then the back and the folded wings. The
bird slowly moved away and took off from the ground. It made tight
circles as it rose and suddenly cried out and swooped down from the sky
and dropped another object from its mouth. It was a buckle. She
looked at it and saw that it was indian, small and made with beads and
leather. A loud gasp escaped from her as she remembered the buckle. It
was White Cloud's. She knew what she must do next.
Polly filled her pack and prepared to go down the mountain. The
sky was bright and clear and the air was much warmer. Before leaving
she gathered up the rest of the wood and stored it in the cave. She
placed the tea and coffee next to the pile, left the little pot and
skillet, made sure that the fire was out and shouldering her pack she
set out to return to the campsite, and Thomas.
The little jeep turned up the rough road to Nenana. The two had
spent the night at the little roadhouse at the junction of Petersville
road and Trapper Creek. They had stayed up much of the night as Polly
told him of the things that had happened. He sat quietly stroking her
hair and holding her hand. Thomas could see when she had gotten back
that something had happened on the ledge. She was not the same woman
who had left him for the mountain. In many ways she seemed more
settled and closer to him and yet there was something that held her
back from giving her self completely to him.
It was noon and the sun was high. The snow glistened on Denali
and it was as if she was still up there. In her heart she knew that
part of her would always be there. They stopped at a little cluster of
huts. A place, Thomas said, the natives and the people who lived there,
called Cantwell. As they went into the largest hut, a fat native woman
ran up to Thomas and gave him a bear hug. She laughed and chattered
away in some dialect the Polly had never heard. Thomas laughed and
dragged Polly over to meet her. "Polly, this is `Nachita.' She is an
old friend. Her husband is away hunting and she says that this will be
a good hunt. They are one of the largest suppliers of northern brown
bear skins that the company has. Kani has done business with them for
over twenty-five years." Polly smiled her shy smile and said "Hi."
The other lady looked at her. She looked at Thomas and asked in
halting english what did she say. He laughed and told her that this
was the way that some americans said "hello." Nachita said, "Hi." and
laughed her big laugh that seemed to make her whole body tremble.
Nachita fed them a hearty lunch of bear stew and beer. They all
talked and laughed for an hour or two. Polly felt as if she had known
the big woman all of her life, when they left.
Thomas told Polly that they had to get to Nenana before dark and
the rutted road was slow going from here. Polly wondered what road
could be slower than the one they had just travelled?
By the time they had covered the almost one hundred miles from
Nachita's house to Nenana it was almost dusk. Thomas pulled up to an
old depot that had a sign, "Bed and Maybe Breakfast." He told her that
this is where President Harding stayed when he came to Alaska and drove
the golden spike that completed the Alaskan Railroad.
When they entered the lobby they were greeted by a man dressed in
a long coattail and mutton chop whiskers. Thomas smiled and said,
"Well you heard we were coming and thought you would dress for the
occasion, Philip. Did Nachita call you? What's the matter can't you
speak." The man put up his hand and said, "If you would shut your mouth
for a minute you will live longer. Nachita said she was pretty but I
didn't think she was this good looking. Lady you're far too good for
this man. He is a rogue and a scoundrel." Polly blushed at the man's
comments about her looks and then broke out laughing as Thomas turned
red and then white. "Mister, I don't know who you are but I like you
already. I'm glad someone will stand up to this man." Thomas looked
dismayed and then he saw the two of them laughing at him. He blushed a
dark red that gave him the appearance of the plains indian.
Philip Carson was a big man, tall and with a broad smile. He
took off the coat and the false whiskers and sat down with the two of
them. "You know Thomas and his family before him are the ones that
made so much of this possible." She looked at him questioningly.
"After dinner I'll tell all, whether you like it or not Thomas."
Dinner was one of those memorable meals that no one ever
duplicates. Philip had fresh lettuce and tomatoes from the Matanuska
Valley; salmon from the great waters. There were fresh vegetables and
potatoes and a special treat, home made ice cream made by Philip's wife
Dianne. After dinner there was brandy and coffee. It was a rare
evening of contentment for Polly.
"You know that Thomas and his family come from a little village
about sixty-five miles from here. You can only get to it by boat and
then only in the summer. Well for as far back as we know the Tanana
family, Thomas',have worked for a company called The Kani Kompany. The
natives around here are Athabascans which is what Thomas is, I guess.
Anyway ever since anyone can remember his family has bought goods from
the people up here. As near as anyone knows about three hundred years
ago one of the people from the village left and went down to where
Anchorage is now. He married a russian girl and the family grew and
grew. I heard that they had changed their name to Kani or something
like it." The people kept in touch with the village and it was the
area that supplied much of the goods that were sold at the first store.
I don't know much more except that Thomas' father was the man that
helped start this little town and made it possible for the rafts to
bring goods here and load them on the train to Fairbanks and Anchorage.
I hear that they're lots of Kani stores that Thomas runs." Philip
stopped talking and looked at Polly. There was something different
about her face. She had a glow that seemed illuminate her entire
being. Shyly she held Thomas' hand and looked at him with a wondering
look. This man was truly one that could take Randy's place in her
heart and her life. It was good that they were together she thought.
Randy is dead and she loved him, but this is now and she is in love
again. Small talk continued for another hour and then everyone
went to their rooms. As she opened the door to her room he walked by
and then turned and gave her a gentle kiss. Slowly she pulled him into
the room and said, "Do you really want to marry me?" "Yes," came the
answer swiftly, "If you'll have me." She said, "It means that one of
us will have to move and give up what we do." He looked at her and
said, "For you I would give it all up, gladly, but it is yours anyway."
She laughed quietly and said, "If we are to be married come here to me
and be my love." He closed the door and took her gently in his arms.
 CHAPTER 39

The next day they were told that there would be a boat going to
the little village of Tanana tomorrow. Thomas decided to teach her to
fish. When they returned to the lodge they brought enough fish for
everyone there. Thomas has caught two and she the rest, all ten of
them. Philip laughed until he cried. It was a great dinner.
Morning came and they boarded the barge that was to take them to
the village for answers to the many questions that she had. The barge
moved downstream at about twelve miles per hour. She marvelled at the
mountains and the birds and squealed with delight when she saw the
deer and the snowshoe rabbits along the banks and in the trees. The
mountains were not as high here but they rose almost straight up from
the ground giving the appearance of being much taller than they were.
They reached the village while the sun was still high. It wasn't
very long before they had their things unloaded. Thomas had sent a
large quantity of goods from the Kani Kompany and they had arrived at
the village on the same barge.
The days were much cooler now and she wore a light jacket over
her sweat shirt. He laughed and told her that she would never be able
to live in such a country as this, if she thought this was cool. Then
he remembered the snow storm and the time she had spent on the
mountain.
After they had been there for a few minutes, it seemed like the
whole village came to see this woman who was with one of their own. It
did not take long for Thomas to tell them the good news, news that he
was getting married, and this was the bride. The villagers crowded
around and soon, a man who looked to be about forty years old came over
to them. "Thomas, you finally found someone who will listen to all
your stories of the past. Our village would be famous if everyone
listened to your stories. Lady, I am one of the few here who speaks
english. My name is Rangak.What is your name?" he asked. She looked at
him and said, "My name is Polly Cain and I was married to one of the
people that came from your village many hundreds of years ago. I was
hoping to find some answers here and on` Denali'. I have heard your
name by my dead husband. He said that you became good friends.
I have been to the mountain and it has also led me to the village."
The man looked at her and said, "You are the girl that Randall
married. Is that not so?"
Polly suddenly felt quite dizzy, the earth was spinning and she was
spinning with it. When she woke up she was lying on the ground and wet
cloths were being put on her head. "She's awake." Rangak said as
leaned over the woman. Slowly Polly sat up and then got into an old
chair someone brought down to the docks.
"How did you know who I was?" she asked. The man replied, "When
I was much younger four men came to the village. They were looking for
information about the past. Thomas you were here. Don't you remember
you brought some supplies for the hunters? Anyway one of the men was
named Randall. The others were his father and father's father and our
leader, White Buffalo." This last remark made her weak again. She
quickly took a drink of water and asked, "Did you say he is your
leader, now?" The man looked at her with slight smile on his face and
nodded. "He is now over eighty years old. His health is starting to
go bad and that is why he is not here to greet you. He has asked me to
bring you to him; both of you."
Polly remembered the old chief, but not as he looked now. The
once stocky and muscular man was now thin. His skin hung loosely on
his arms. His hair was very thin and steel grey. Only his eyes still
had the clear, steel glint that she had remembered from the past.
The old man rose to a sitting position when she and Thomas came
into the hut. He looked at her and smiled. She said softly, "I was
Randall's wife. He was killed in the great World War II. Do you
remember him?" The old man laughed a cackling laugh and smiled. He
had a single tooth in the middle of his lower gum. "Randall was a good
boy. I remember how he learned to drive the sled in only three days.
He was the first to the top of the mountain. He has written the
history of this village and of the people from before. I am sorry to
hear he is gone, but he is in a good place. The eagle of long ago is
with him, and the spirits watch over him as does your God. He has the
best of everything."
She told him of the death of the others and how the area where
they lived had grown. She told him about her two children Peter and
Robin. When the old man heard the name of the girl his eyes lit up.
"The name of the girl that I knew we left alone with two children was
Polly. Are you Polly?"
By the end of the third day Polly knew almost all of the history
of the Caine family. What she did not know was how the name Cain had
come to be. She made a note to herself to talk to old Isaiah and find
out what he knew. He probably had heard the stories from Randy's
grandfather. For now she was still puzzled about Thomas and his
connection to the family. Nobody seemed to know what that connection
was, only that his family had always been part of the Kani Kompany.
It was obvious to anyone who watched the two people that they
were in love. They laughed, walked and talked together as if no one
else even existed. Polly spent many hours with the "old one" as the
villagers called the indian. He looked as if he were one of them and
she marvelled that they all seemed to respect him as their leader. She
decided to see if he was strong enough to tell her the story of how he
became one of them and their leader.
"No one from the outside has ever heard what happened here." He
said as he began the tale of his life after he had left the other three
men. "The old man from the other side of the mountain, Toomgak, was
able to talk english well enough to help me learn the Athabascan
language. We would sit by the hour during the great darkness and he
would tell me the story of how the land was settled and of the family.
It seems that they go back over four hundred years. There were many
problems during the early time and all but two of the brothers of one
of the first families that settled the other side of the mountain range
died. He told me all of their history he knew.
When Spring came the old one left me here and went back to the
other side of the mountain. I was able to speak the language and
helped the people learn some of the things that we have taken for
granted. When they saw these wonderful things like an easier way to
skin the animals that left more meat for them to eat. I showed them
how they could use small portions of the land in the summer to grow
some crops and how to grow potatoes. This is a good place to grow
potatoes. Then I had Thomas' father send me some fishing poles, reels,
line and
hooks. I showed them the way that fish could be caught and how to make
snares to catch small animals.
One day there was a dispute among two of the men and they both
came to fighting each other. This was not good. I told them that they
would not have harmony of the spirit if they continued to live with the
argument between them. That night the council met, and after they had
finished their meeting I was invited to come in and listen to the men
tell their side of the problem. After they had finished the council
told them to leave and then they asked me what I thought should be
done. I told them what we would do in our tribe to settle the matter
and they called the men back in and told them that they would each have
to go into the woods and find a tree that they would cut down and make
into a canoe. They could not come back until the canoe was ready to go
into the water. In fact they had to come back in the canoe." The old
man continued, "From then on I was considered a man of the village and
they had me sit on the council. I took another wife who died last
year. We had no children so I do not have anyone to pass the
leadership to and that means that the people will have to elect a new
leader. I have asked them to do it now so that I can help him get the
people to accept him. They do not want to do that for they think that
when that is done I will die. They wait much longer and they will be
right."
The story was delightful and Polly felt good hearing that her
family had such a person who has led both back home and now here. He
was the last of a dying breed of men who helped shape the country. She
often hoped that her children would be movers of the land. Peter
seemed to be most content when he worked on the land, in the mines or
the fields. He also seemed to like the cattle business that they had
on the western side of the state and into Texas. He often found
reasons to go there for a week or two.
Robin on the other hand had married Mark, but continued her work
with the people and was becoming one of the female leaders of Arizona.
She had the hospital enlarged and had the first real maternity suites
in the state built in the enlarged section. She raised money for three
new bright yellow school buses so that all of the children for fifty
miles around would have a way to get to school. Her family started six
scholarships, three for boys and three for girls who graduated from the
high school and wanted to go to college and study medicine, dentistry,
nursing or teaching. Polly felt that Robin was shaping the world far
better than her mother.
Thomas and Polly were spending their last few nights in the tiny
village and the villagers were not about to let them go without a
party. That night it was a feast and a celebration that would never be
forgotten. Word got out to the other villages by the railhead and
special barges with small outboard motors, to speed them up, came
loaded with friends to help celebrate.
When morning came the next say after the party, two tired and
stuffed lovers quietly said their goodbyes to the old chief and the
rest of the village and boarded one of the barges for the return trip
to Nenana.
Putting their gear and presents in the little jeep took a lot of
doing and it was starting to get dark so they decided to stay for one
last night and leave early in the morning. Thomas was anxious to get
back to the little store and see that everything was all right.
When morning came they quickly ate and said their goodbyes and
then headed back the way that they came weeks before. To their right
loomed the great one, Denali, surrounded by other mountains that did
not reach quite as high, so that the mountain stood, rightfully, above
the others.
They reached Montana Creek by afternoon, though the sun still
promised several hours of daylight. Frank was there and so was
the little plane that had brought them to this place. Frank arranged
to send everything by the next train south and the two left to return
to Anchorage.
That night they had an early dinner and then went to the store so
that Thomas could see if there were any problems. After seeing that
everything was in exceptionally good order, as if he were never gone,
they went to his place. Polly would stay here until the ship would
come for her the next week. They had much to talk about and the time
was needed to solve many of the problems that they had to face if they
were to get married.
The most important problem was where they would live! Both had
deep roots where they were and it would be hard for either one to give
up what they had worked so hard to achieve. Thomas had told her that
he would not have a problem just so he could be with her. Could she say
and do the same? She was doubtful that she could live here.
It was the second week in September when Polly and Thomas knocked
on the door of the big house on the hill in San Francisco. Polly had
called Isaiah's house and told them that she was bringing someone for
him to meet. They wanted to know as much as he could find out about the
origins of her family. The housekeeper opened the door and as they came
in the old man came to meet them. "Polly I'm so glad you're back. We
were all worried since we had not heard from you for so long. Is
everything all right." He kept talking and suddenly stopped and
turning to Thomas he said, "I'm sorry young man. It's like you weren't
there. Please forgive me but this young lady is very important for all
of us and we worry about her. Her family calls every other day to see
if we have heard from her. I tell you they are driving us crazy." He
laughed as he said the last part but Polly could see that he was
serious. "Uncle Ike, this is Thomas. We are going to get married after
he meets the whole family, if he still wants me.
He doesn't know what he can get into with the Cain family does
he?" Ike laughed and looked at Thomas. "Son watch your step this
family is sneaky. Her father-in-law grabbed me out of the army thirty
seven years ago and made me do forced labor. All he ever gave me
was....everything. You are marrying into the finest family I have ever
known. Not a bad apple in the bunch." Polly blushed and quickly asked
if she could use the phone. Emily, the housekeeper took her to the
parlor and she called her daughter, Robin. After she told her the news
she promised to bring him to her home on the way back to Oklahoma. She
said Peter and Mary Jane were on their way for a visit. He and Mark
were going hunting and this was a chance for their children to be with
the two families.
The next morning Lee, the youngest son of Ike, picked them up at
the house. Ike and his wife would not let then stay at a hotel. They
went to the docks and to the offices of the great company. Lee took
them to a small office in the back of the building. "This is where the
shipping lines started. That was about a hundred years ago. The two
men who started it all had come here from Alaska and somewhere in the
Dakotas. I don't know much about them but there are some old journals
and papa said for you to read them and see if you can put it all
together.
Polly and Thomas spent all of the day and well into the next day
before they came across something that was interesting. It explained
much of the riddle. It seems that the two men who started the company
were not brothers but friends. When they started to spread out they
hired two brothers from the little village called Tanana, the place
where they had just come from. Back about two hundred and fifty years
ago the two brothers were brought to Knik, a small town next to where
Anchorage is today.
The two boys were used to run supplies to the different villages.
They helped run the main store and brought goods to it for sale and
trade. Later on as the two owners decided to grow with the business
they opened stores south and east in the great snow bound land. They
put the two boys in charge and gave them a share of the profits.
Apparently this is what the family has always done for those who worked
for them. One of the boys went north to open all of the stores and do
the trading and the other brother stayed in the Anchorage area and
managed the little store called the, "Kani Kompany."
Thomas was still for several moments and then turned to her and
said, "You know that I am not related to your husband's family. The
Tanana name was the one given to the brothers to identify them and the
village they come from. I have always known that I had come from the
village but I did not realize until now that my family had been in
Anchorage for so long. I remember my grandfather talking about how his
grandfather had told him about the story of the fishing line that was
used by the first peoples of the family of the Caine's, or what ever
their name was at the time. I think that their family was also named
Tanana for the same reason. This means that my family has always worked
for your family. Well I guess I'll just change jobs and keep on
working for the family." He smiled at her and she felt an electric
shock go through her.
The timing could not have been better. When they arrived in
Mesa, Arizona, the first touches of the short Autumn had arrived. Last
week it was in the hundreds and now the days were in the low eighties
and the nights in the fifties. Thomas was dripping with sweat, for he
had never been in such warm climate before. Even the nights were
warmer than the days in Alaska, for most of the year.
The train pulled into the station and the whole family was
waiting to greet the couple. Robin and Peter sprinted to their mother
and their children were not far behind. Mary Jane and Mark stood back
and looked at the tall dark stranger with the face that looked much
like the indians who lived in the area.
"Well I told you if I ever met a man that could measure up to
your father, and he wanted to marry me I would say yes. Peter remember
that night at the table before I left I said that didn't I." She
looked at Thomas who was grinning and shifting from foot to foot.
"Thomas, I guess you'll have to pass the inspection of these two before
everything is final, so I'm going with Mark and Mary Jane and you ride
with these two hearts of my heart."
It did not take long for the three of them to get well
acquainted. Robin saw the look in her mothers eyes and how this tall
man looked at her.
As they rode they told him about what they did for a living. They
wanted him to find out later how much the family was worth, after they
got married. By the time they got to the little town of Saguaro the
three of them were like family.
Robin rushed up to her mother and whispered, "He's so much like
the way that you told us dad was that it's almost as if he was alive."
Polly jerked up and then it hit her! What she loved in this man were
the same things that she had loved in Randall. Now it was all clear to
her. God had given her a second chance at happiness with a man. One
who would be good to her, like her first husband.
Peter also came over to her and said, "Well if he can ride a
horse and throw a rope around a calf I guess you can marry him." Then
he broke out in a huge grin and hugged his mother, almost squeezing the
breath out of her.
Mark and Mary Jane now had their turn, explaining what the family
was really like. They had him laughing so hard the tears were rolling
down his cheeks when Mark told him about Peter's first week in the
mines. Mary Jane told him about his reaction when she told him she was
going to have a baby, like, "How can that be."
Mark and Robin had built a big house with five bedrooms and four
baths. They knew that they would have people coming and going at all
times of the year and the day, or the night.
When they got to the spanish adobe house the six of them stayed
up most of the night as he told them about his life. They could see in
his eyes the look of love he gave their mother and they were happy.
Mark had a great idea! Why not get married here in Saguaro.
They would have a big combination wedding and fiesta. They could have
it in October, the prettiest month of the year. That would give
everyone time to come from all over. Mark would rent the hotel for
guests to stay at while they were here for the wedding. Polly and
Thomas would invite everyone they knew and the children would do
likewise.
The next day Polly called home and got in touch with the preacher
who married she and Randall so many years ago. Reverend Polk was about
to retire. Polly asked if he would come and perform the ceremony. She
told him how much he was like her first husband. He knew of her trip
and he asked her if she had found the answers to her questions. She
told him that this was part of the answer. He agreed to come and she
told him that a ticket would be at the church office in the next few
days and that they would pick him up a few days before the wedding.
She wanted him to see the area and to talk to Mark about religion. This
was one thing that they had never seemed to have brought up.
Everything was arranged. Over three hundred people would be
coming from all over the world. Many of them out of respect for her
family and to meet the man who was to be her new husband.

CHAPTER 40
 Thomas and Polly had been married for ten years. For the past
seven they had lived on the sprawling ranch near Plainview, Texas. Not
only did Mark learn to ride and rope, but his natural ability for
trading, buying and selling techniques made the ranch grow and prosper.
Peter had moved his family there and built a large house on the other
side of the ranch. The two men had hit it off from the very beginning,
and worked as equals. Little Karl had a new grandfather and Peter had
the father he never knew.
After the marriage Polly told Thomas of the holdings that she
controlled and his eyes widened as if he thought that she was joking
with him. It scared him when he found out it was true. Would people
think that he married her for her wealth? The problem caused him
sleepless nights until he finally told her that she was to make sure
that everything was in her name and it was all to go to her children if
anything ever happened to her. She smiled at him and said nothing more
about it.
When they first moved to Texas he never worked so hard. It seems
as if he was up at dawn and to tired to do anything but sleep at night.
Now years later he saw the hard work paying off. They had some
of the finest beef cattle in the country. Buyers were plentiful and
the price was not negotiable. Everyone knew that "The Eagle Ranch,"
gave only fair deals and that their word was their bond.
Karl looked out over the prairie and wondered at the vastness.
Dim hills appeared in the distance, wavering in the shimmering heat of
the
day. He was fifteen years old and looking more like his father with
each passing day. He had already become good at everything there was
to do at the ranch. He could do any one of the men's work. Thomas was
proud of the boy.
He was glad they were here in Texas. He remembered the news
flash on March 27th, 1964. Anchorage was devastated by an earthquake
that rocked the area. The little village of Portage, forty miles south
of Anchorage, had been completely destroyed. It had been covered by a
large tidal wave and then the water receded and the town was no more.
Roofs and debris were all that were left. The people that were still
alive did not rebuild. Many of his friends had been killed.
He and Polly chartered a plane and rushed to the fractured land
that was his home for so many years. The weather was clear and cold.
Winter was still with them and the days were about seven hours long and
the snow was bright enough to blind a person if they were not careful.
He rented a plane at and they flew to Montana Creek. From there
they got the train to Nenana. The quake had hit here also but with
much less force and there was little damage. They were there for
three days before there was a barge that would be able to carry them to
the village of Tanana.
When they stepped onto the dock they saw it! The giant eagle lay
on the dock, its wings spread out and all of the long feathers pulled
from the top layers and the tail. The eagle's head was crushed as if
something had smashed it where the great bird lay.
Rangak came forward in a daze. His head was bandaged and he
walked with a limp. He recognized the man and said to him, almost in a
whisper, "You have come at a terrible time. Some men came here two
days ago. They said they were going to hunt in the forests. They had
a new kind of gun. They came back yesterday and they were drunk. The
eagle was flying over the water and the men took their guns and fired
at the sacred bird. They fired many bullets at once and they hit the
eagle. It landed on the dock and was still alive. I went to the bird
and one of the men hit me behind the legs and knocked me down. Then
another hit me on the head. When I woke up the men were gone. They
took two of our women with them and started up the river. They pulled
out all of the feathers and took of the sacred feathers with them. We
have kept the ones that they had not wanted. They are in the council
room where we pray to the spirit eagle to come to take them back. We
know that this will be the only way that the days will become right
again and everyone will be happy. If this does not happen we are
doomed." The man was crying and Polly was also. Thomas was as mad as
he had ever been in his life. What right had any person to take from
the sacred bird. This was not the land of the white man. Always he
seemed to destroy what was good. Look at all of the wars that were
fought for such stupid reasons. Land stolen from honest people.
People taking advantage of others instead of seeing what they can do
for others.
He thought of Robin and what she had done for all of the people
of Arizona. What Peter had done for the families in the oil fields of
eastern Oklahoma; and he and his mother had done for the people of
Plainview. Polly and Peter put up the money for the land so that the
Methodist church could build a new worship center. The present one was
in great disrepair and was too small for the growing community. The
great things that Polly had done for people all over the world, giving
to good causes with no one knowing where the money or food came from.
Many of the indian reservations had food and medicine that she bought
but would not let anyone say where the supplies came from.
They stayed in the village for several days, hoping that the boat
would come back. Thomas made plans to deal with the men and then to
turn them over to the authorities. The village had a link to the
outside, thanks to Polly who had a full radio transmitter and powerful
receiver sent to Tanana.
Thomas radioed to the state police in Fairbanks and told them what had
happened. The taking of an eagle's feather was against the law and
carried a severe fine. These men must have taken enough feathers to
put them away for many years.
It was April tenth when they returned to Anchorage. The little
"Kani Kompany" store was still standing. They were doing a land office
business. Thomas turned to Polly and said, "There are a lot of people
who now have nothing. Would you feel betrayed if we gave much of the
goods that we have to those who need them. In the old days a man would
write down what he got and pay when he could. It would be the thing to
do." She looked at this handsome man and said a silent prayer of
thanksgiving for having him for a husband. "You are so good to
people," she said. "Of course I don't mind. It's a great idea." The two
spent most of the day giving the people what they would need to get
them through the rest of the winter. Everyone looked at the little
store with it's faded sign and smiled. Surely these were the real
people of the land. The ones who take care of others as did the people
who started the land so many hundreds of years before. Thomas and Polly
found the little hotel she stayed at that first trip to Anchorage. It
had not been damaged and the same lady was still behind the counter.
She remembered the story of the Carved Puffin. When she heard that
they had married she gave them the "bridal suite." When they left
three days later she refused their money. She had heard what they had
been doing the last three days.
 Looking out over the land Karl turned from the mountains and
headed to the road to catch the bus for school. He was in high school
now and there were lots of ne interests. Girls, cars, girls, sports
and girls. Being good looking with his dark complexion and blond hair,
the girls were only a problem choosing which he wanted to be with.
Unfortunately he did not make the choices out of good intentions. Many
times during that year irate fathers would call Thomas to tell him to
keep the boy away from their daughters.
Football and Karl were made for each other. When he was a
freshman, a year ago, he made the team and already the colleges had
heard of him.
His grades were another matter. Thomas finally told him that the
truck he wanted would not be available until he had passed all of his
classes and made up all of his back work to get his credits. Karl did
it in less than a year and next week he and his father would go to town
and find the boy a truck.

CHAPTER 41

Karl had been out of college for seven years. He was an All-American
running back at Oklahoma M&A
He signed to play with one of the pro teams and had made good money for
six years, Karl had a problem. It was an old problem, girls. He just
couldn't seem to find the right one and settle down. He played the
field as if he was running through the line of the opposing team. One
would grab him and he would carry her for a short time and then drop
her for someone else. The young man went through them from one city to
another. Wherever he played there was a problem. No one seemed to
measure up to his mother or his sister, Polly.
It was the third game of the practice season when it happened.
He had taken the ball on a wide end sweep. As he made a cut to the
inside he was hit from the side. A blinding white-hot flash
went through his leg. Karl went down and lay there. The trainers
rushed to the downed player. As they straightened his leg, to place
him on a stretcher, a searing pain went through his knee and he lost
consciousness.
When he came to he was in a bed in a hospital room. The doctors
were there and so was the coach. He looked at their faces and knew
that something was wrong. He thought to himself that he must have a
broken leg and he was going to miss the season. He was still groggy
from the anesthetic and soon fell back to sleep.
He was dreaming and the dream was about a pretty girl with bronze
hair. She was laughing and riding a paint horse. He saw his mother
and stepfather, Thomas and they were looking at him. Slowly he opened
his eyes and saw that the two of were standing over him. It was no
dream.
The X-rays told the story. They would rebuild the knee and he
would be able to walk, but his football playing days were over. If he
were to take a hit on the leg he would never walk normally again.
Several months later he was in a small bar playing some pool with
old friends. He had settled down somewhat. He was now using his
degree in business administration working on the ranch. He was
handling most of the paper work and the business of running the oil and
gas lines throughout the country. He also had started a small breeding
ranch for paint quarter horses.
 He still chased women but at a much slower place, trying to find
the right one from his dreams. He had heard of the dreams of his family
back to the mountain and the bird. He also had heard of the women who
had the sunset hair. Karl knew the stories of the people in his family
and what they had done with their lives. He had dreams of the girl with
the bronze hair. He looked at every girl he saw but she was still not
there. He no longer played the field. To be sure he still dated but
they were casual, nothing serious.
His mind was always drifting, trying to come up with a purpose
for his life when one day, in April, his mother called him to the ranch
for a conference. Polly, Karl,Thomas and Peter sat around a table and
talked about the business in Alaska. They wanted him to think about
going up there in a few months, when the weather was better.
He had always wanted to see the country where his stepfather came
from. He had heard about it from both parents from the time he was old
enough to read a map. Now it was his turn to work in the business that
started the family's wealth and fame.
That night he went into Lubbock. There was a place that served a
great steak and had the coldest beer around. He had lots of friends
there who he had gone to school with him, both high school and college.
He had set up dinner with three of them and Art Mason, one of the guys,
was in charge of the dates.
She was there, dressed in a red western shirt, jeans and boots,
with a stetson tilted back on her head. Her hair, with red and gold,
mixed into a beautiful bronze glow. Karl was captivated by the hair.
She was pretty in a wholesome way.
When he got home that night he woke his parents and told them
that he had found the girl that he was to marry. They smiled and told
him to go to sleep. He did not go to sleep. Instead he sat out on the
porch and thought of his next date with Sharyn Morgan. The next day he
told Thomas and Polly. They looked at each other and broke out
laughing. He asked why and they just smiled and walked away, holding
hands.
For the next two months Karl and Sharyn were together most of the
time. He took her to his breeding ranch and she fell in love with one
of the paints. He saw to it that the quarter horse was transferred to
her name. He had the horse saddle broke so that she could ride with
him. She squealed with delight. She always squealed when he made her
happy. He always tried to make her happy. The summer was coming
and with it the trip to the north. Should he ask her to go along? He
talked to the family who had met her and had grown fond of the happy
young lady that changed Karl's life. "Well it's certainly one way to
find out if she really wants to spend the rest of her life with you or
you with her. Why don't you see if she can take off from the school
where she teaches and wants to go with you. Maybe she would rather
stay at home."
That night he told her that he would be taking a trip to Alaska.
He could see the sadness in her face. Then he told her that it was for
the family business. He spent the next week telling her the story of
the family and the role that the north country played in its life.
Then he told her of the mountain and his plan to follow the family
tradition and go to the mountain for some answers. Some important
answers. She looked lonely and forlorn and he could wait no longer and
asked her to go with him. She squealed with delight.
School would be over next week and then she was free for the rest of
the summer.
 They flew to San Francisco where they stayed at the "Mark." A
Man named Lee Greenberg met them at the airport and told them that he
would take care of all of their arrangements while they were in the
city. All of the bills had been paid. Karl asked about this when he
called his mother. She told him that his grandmother had made the
arrangements and that Mr. Greenberg's family were part of the family
fortune.
Five days of taking in the sights of the city by the bay and the
vineyards, redwoods and coastal towns left them tired and ready for the
final trip to Anchorage.
Arriving at the hotel Karl asked for a room near the top floor.
One that had lots of windows and looked to the north. He didn't know
why. He only knew that this was the way it must be.
Karl and Sharyn had a room on the tenth floor of the Anchorage Hilton.
The room had windows on two sides and it was here that they stood, her
back pressed to him, into his strong stomach, as he put his arms around
her and held her close.

as emotional for all of them. The biggest surprise came when Isaia202
202202ˆ:202:202“:202™:202$¦202&¦202®202+®202=•

202202
z202z202z202x20
22022022022022022022022022022022022022022022022022022022022022022022022
02202202202202202202202202202202202202202202202202202202202202202202202
202202202202202202202202202202202202202202202202202202202202202202202202
202 202 202 202202 202202 202202 202202 202202- 202202¬ 202202í
202202,202202<202202R202202202202«202202V202202c202202:202202‚202202
202202¹ 202202°
202202•
203203z
203203vvvvvvvvvvmmmmmmmmmmm203203203§à 203203203§ð203§z
203203|
203203~
203203Ž
203203
203203£
203203²
203203´
20320
3ߤ20
320320
3203
Y203203@µ203203üµ203203ã203203u203203w203203y203203{20
3203¨203203g203203i203203k203203Y
203203vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv203203203203203203203§à Y 203203[ 203203]
203203
!
203203§
"20320
3Ñ"20
3203Ô
"20320
3Ö"20
3203Ø
"20320
3Ú"20
3203Ü"203203Þ"203203à"203203â"203203ä"203203þ"203203>$203203F+203203è-
203203x.203203z.203203|.
203203ç0203203vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv203203203203203203203§à
ç0203203@22032035203203“8203203•8203203—8203203™8203203›8203203
820
3203Ÿ
820320
3¡8203203£8203203¥8203203§8203203¬8203203º8203203¼8203203è8203203;:
2032039
;20320
3¥<203203µ=203203‘?203203vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv203203203203203203203§à
‘?20
3203P
A203203B203203wC203203±D2032036E203203¦E203203œF203203®H203203L203203§L
203203ÒN203203¯R203203S203203ôS203203¸T203203£U203203ÆW2032033Y203203Y2
03203I\20320
3”]203203&^203203vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv203203203203203203203§à
&^203203Ma203203°a203203Øc203203Ue203203üe203203ig203203
h203203i203203Üj203203¼k203203?l203203nm203203n203203.o203203Êq203203s2
03203xs203203@t203203€u203203w203203
x203203wy203203vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv203203203203203203203§à
wy203203bz203203Ë{203203203}
203203Š203203ë203203ë€203203(‚203203ƒ203203
ƒ203203„20320
3¦†203203b‡203203ö‡203203ʈ203203‹20
3203À
Œ203203ҍ203203rŽ203203O203203§‘20320
3t’203203Ç’203203vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv203203203203203203203§à
Ç’20
4204É
’20420
4Ë’20
4204Í
’20420
4Ï’20
4204Ñ
’20420
4Ó’20
4204Õ’204204×’204204Ù’204204Û’204204Ý’204204ß’204204ì’204204@”204204C–
204204i–204204k–204204m–
204204.
˜204204J™204204ìœ204204l204204vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv20
4204204204204204204§à
l204204ÆŸ2042041¢20
42044
¢20420
4Ý£20
4204¦
¥20420
43¦204204T¦204204©204204ó©204204õ©204204÷©204204ª204204;«20
4204
¡204204£20
4204
¥20
4204
Å204204Y¯204204Ï°20
4204V
±204204X±204204Z±204204vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv204204204204204204204§à
Z±20
4204â
±20420
4²204204ôµ204204η204204Ó·204204Õ·204204×·204204Ù·204204Û·204204Ý·20
4204ß·204204á·204204¸204204È»204204Ì»204204h½204204ð¾204204…
¿204204%Á204204<Â2042041Å204204ÌÅ204204vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv20
4204204204204204204§à ÌÅ204204
Æ204204Ç2042041Ç2042043Ç2042045Ç204204È204204%Ê204204âÊ204204äÊ204204æÊ
204204%Ì204204Í204204žÐ204204ßÑ204204ÞÒ204204ñÔ204204µÕ204204mÖ204204¥
Ø204204)Ú204204,Ú204204gÛ204204vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv204204204204204204
204§à
gÛ204204ºÜ204204OÝ204204âß204204Tà204204á204204Ñá204204Hâ204204«å204204ç
204204éç204204
ë204204éë204204204í204204¢í2042046ï204204ð2042041ò204204‰ò204204þó204204
´ô204204áô204204ãô204204vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv204204204204204204204§à
ãô204204åô204204õô204204÷ô204204rö204204
´ù204204û204204Âý204204Fþ204204204 204Ö 204 204Z 204ø 204Á 204& 204»
204
205û
 206†¤ 206Ĥ 206Þ 206— 206vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv206206206206206206206§à
— 206´ 206¸µ 206¢§ 206ú 2066 206 206’ 206Ç 206ﾁ 206W! 206Z" 2065# 206Ò$
206& 206½& 206ä' 206ú) 206ü) 206þ) 206 * 206* 206*
206vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv206206206206206206206§à * 206* 206 * 206* 206*
206E* 206ô+ 206- 206x. 206ﾍ/ 206ì0 206“2 206Ì3 206¶4 206G5 206z5 20608
206Ð8 206t: 206E< 206ý< 206ÿ< 206 =
206vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv206206206206206206206§à = 206*= 206V? 206¬@
206¯@ 206†C 206ûC 206‰D 206`E 2061F 206áG 206§H 206RI 206‰J 206~K 206
L 206®M 206úN 206%P 206pR 206 T 206¦V 206xW
206vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv206206206206206206206§à xW 206¢W 206JY 206eY
206_Z 206fZ 206jZ 206qZ 206tZ 206ﾍ Z 206ﾐ Z 206‰\ 206T^ 206®_ 206[a 206³a
206µa 206·a 206§e 206©e 206«e 206©f 206hi
206vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv206206206206206206206§à hi 206ji 206li 206“i
2069j 206Äk 206Ël 206úl 206ül 206þl 206Ûn 206zo 206èp 206„r 206Ät 206Æt
206Èt 206ùt 206sv 206Nw 206ãx 206ây 206|
206vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv206206206206206206206§à | 206@| 206B| 206D|
206~ 206…~ 206¤€ 206¢ 206
‚ 206„ 206Þ„ 2060† 206±† 206œ‡ 206Aˆ 206mŠ 206‹ 206L‹ 206‡Œ 206î 206\Ž
206æŽ 206èŽ 206vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv206206206206206206206§à èŽ 206Ž
206 206 206 206 206
 206
 207
 208 208 208µ 208 208 208 208 208- 208  208" 208$ 2083
208Ú’ 208*” 208vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv208208208208208208208§à *” 208—–
208_— 208‹— 208ú— 208A™ 2080› 208cœ 2087ž 208+Ÿ 208ZŸ 208¢ 208¸¤ 208~¥
208–¦ 208À¦ 208T§ 208ß© 208C¬ 208o¬ 2085 208T® 208V®
208vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv208208208208208208208§à V® 208X® 208-¯ 208¼°
208ɱ 208*² 208[² 208³ 208Ú³ 208|µ 208Š¶ 208ⶠ208“¸ 208Eº 208¾ 208n¾
208®¿ 208À 208o 208:Ä 208Å 208\Ç 208šÊ
208vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv208208208208208208208§à šÊ 208öË 208°Ì 208#Í
208›Í 208 Ï 2080Ð 208bÐ 208ÆÒ 208AÔ 208ÿÔ 208ŽÖ 208× 208¤Ø 208ÉØ 208ÑÚ
208ÔÚ 208ÖÚ 208ØÚ 208ÚÚ 208ÜÚ 208ÞÚ 208àÚ
208vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv208208208208208208208§à àÚ 208âÚ 208äÚ 208æÚ
208èÚ 208Ú 208ìÚ 208üÚ 208”Ü 208vÞ 208xÞ 208zÞ 208Ýß 208©à 208µâ 208Câ
208Eâ 208Gâ 208=ã 208hã 208Aä 208éå 208ëå
208vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv208208208208208208208§à ëå 208íå 208iæ 208 ç
208Uè 208Àé 208Ÿí 208ïí 208ﾏ î 208
ï 209{ñ 209·ó 209hõ 209üö 209ú 209·ú 209¨ü 209×ü 209þ 209èþ 209z209209^
209q209vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv209209209209209209209§à q209:209v209¤209]
209Q209S209U209W209Y209[209]
209_209a209c209e209g209i209k209m209o209~209¦209vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv20
9209209209209209209§à ¦209P 209
209·
209à
209&
209S
209Ÿ
210"210
210˜210ÿµ2105§210v210µ210¢210
21062108210H-210-210Æ210ü
210vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv210210210210210210210§à ü
210b"210r#210µ%210&&210$'210÷(210©*210+210ä+210-
210'/210ï
0210x
1210‚
3210È
4210e
5210í
5210D
7210!9210Ë9210Š:210Œ:210vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv210210210210210210210§à
Œ:210Ž:210:210•:210—:210™:210©:210³:210V<2103>210–?
210Q@210MC210{D210QE210F210¨G210-
H210ÌH210ùH210aJ210áJ210RK210vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv21
0210210210210210210§à RK210|L210ÛL210

M210MN210tO210éP210£Q210æR210ÍS210åT210U210‹W210Y210,Y210pZ210,]21
0W^210Â_210†`210í`210Ša210äb210vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv21
0210210210210210210§à
äb210éc210§d210©d210e210”f210lh210nh210„h210)j210Èj210ûj210ik210²l210n2
10jq210©t210ßu210ev210!w210ﾐ x210<z210Sz210vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv2102102
10210210210210§à Sz210ˆ{210 }210Û}210y210ҁ210Fƒ210……210´…
210P†210Gˆ210ш210_‰210§Š210Ê210Œ210þŒ210Ž2100
210ñ210G‘210Û’210Ò“210vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv210210210210210210210§à
Ò“2100”210·”210´•210j—210y˜210
š210p›2105
œ210œ210ãŸ210ìŸ210îŸ210ñŸ210õŸ210÷Ÿ210ùŸ210ûŸ210þŸ210210210210210210vv
vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv210210210210210210210§à 210210
21021
0^£21
0¸£21
0º£21
0¼£21
0š¤21
0&¦210¥¦210[§210‰§210Щ210«21
0µ«210«210'«21
0ø«210}¬210T210N®210Ó®210vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv210210210210210210210§à
Ó®210F¯210Ù¯210ѱ210–
²210™²210ʳ210"µ210˜¶210*¹210©»21
0ˆ¼210Ö¼210¹½210µ¾210˜¿210ÜÀ210øÁ210.Â210Ã210QÄ2106Å210Ç21
0vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv210210210210210210210§à
Ç210wÇ210{É210sÊ210ÈÊ210WË210%Í210áÍ2107Ï210’Ï210¸Ð210þÐ210fÒ210ŠÔ210ŒÔ
210ŽÔ210Ô210Ô210jÕ210—
Õ2100Ö210áÖ210Ü×210vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv210210210210210210210§à Ü×210
Ø210ùØ210¦Ù210ÛÚ210dÛ210gÛ210“Û210¹Ü210ÄÝ210—Þ210Sß210
á210ñâ210
ä210øä210±å210yæ210Òæ210ôæ210Ðç210[é210[210vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv21
0210210210210210210§à
[210ë210Tì210í2103î210ðî210žð210§ñ210¿ó210&õ2101ö210á÷210›ù210Cú210Fû2
10²ü210§ý210Îý210tÿ210¦
210Ö210210Æ210vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv210210210210210210210§à Æ210W 210ª
210Ç
210H
211
211@
211µ211É211Û211Ò211]µ211ºµ211§211ƒ§211…§211‡§211‰§211‹§211§211
§211‘§211“§211vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv211211211211211211211§à “§211•§211—
§211™§211›§211Ÿ§211¡§211§§211©§211«§211¼§211¿§211ž211